Um Cat1000ps e

CAT1000S
Program for Tolerance Comparison

of 3D Surfaces and Borders
CAT1000P
Program to Create a GEOPAK Part Program
with the Help of CAD Data
User's Manual v3.5

MCOSMOS
1 MCOSMOS
PartManager
Administrator
ProtocolManager
DialogDesigner
Scheduler
GEOPAK
CMM system manager
Scanning
Mafis
ROUNDPAK
PatchScanningGenerator
SurfaceDeveloper
DMIS-OUT
CAT1000PS
GEARPAK
MI-Worm
Bevel-Hypoid
STATPAK
Formula
TASK-EDITOR
2 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000PS Table of Contents
2 CAT1000PS Table of Contents

1 MCOSMOS ........................................................................ 2
2 CAT1000PS Table of Contents ........................................ 3
3 General Information ....................................................... 14
4 Limitations in CAT1000PS ............................................. 15
5 Hints for Help .................................................................. 16
6 Help for CAT1000P and CAT1000S ............................... 17
7 CAT1000S........................................................................ 18
7.1 General Information ................................................................ 18
7.2 General Preparation................................................................ 18
7.2.1 Space Navigator..................................................................... 18
7.2.1.1 SpaceNavigator: Introduction ............................................. 18
7.2.1.2 SpaceNavigator: Change 3D-View..................................... 20
7.2.1.3 SpaceNavigator: Move Virtual Machine ............................. 22
7.2.1.4 SpaceNavigator and "Move Machine"................................ 23
7.2.1.5 SpaceNavigator and "Move in Five Axes" .......................... 24
7.2.1.6 SpaceNavigator and "Change Probe by Angle" ................. 25
7.2.1.7 SpaceNavigator and "Scan on Curve" ............................... 26
7.2.1.8 SpaceNavigator and "Sweep Scan" ................................... 27
7.2.1.9 SpaceNavigator and "Rotate Table"................................... 27
7.3 Settings .................................................................................... 28
7.3.1 General Settings .................................................................... 28
7.3.1.1 Length unit conversion (CAT1000)..................................... 28
7.3.1.2 Create graphic grid............................................................. 28
7.3.2 Settings for 3D-View .............................................................. 29
7.3.3 Settings for CAD Files ........................................................... 29
7.3.3.1 Settings for CAD Files ........................................................ 29
7.3.3.2 Settings for IGES Import .................................................... 29
7.3.3.3 Settings for CATIA V4 Import ............................................. 30
7.3.3.4 Settings for CATIA V5 Import ............................................. 31
7.3.3.5 Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter............................. 32
7.3.3.6 Settings for Parasolid Import .............................................. 32
7.3.3.7 Settings for Pro/E Import .................................................... 33
7.3.3.8 Settings for STEP Import.................................................... 33
7.3.3.9 Settings for VDAFS Import ................................................. 34
7.3.3.10 Settings for Unigraphics Import .......................................... 34
7.3.3.11 Settings for SolidWorks Import........................................... 35
7.3.3.12 Settings for Inventor Import ................................................ 35
7.3.4 Settings for Measurement..................................................... 36
12.04.13 v3.5 3
7.3.4.1 Settings for Measurement: Introduction ............................. 36

7.3.4.2 Settings for Measurement: Position Tolerance .................. 37
7.3.4.2.1 Option boxes ............................................................................. 37
7.3.4.2.2 Input box "Tolerance for GEOPAK" .......................................... 37
7.3.4.3 Settings for Measurement: Surface.................................... 37
7.3.4.3.1 Examples .................................................................................. 38
7.3.4.4 Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value......................... 41
7.3.4.4.1 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma": .............................. 41
7.3.4.4.2 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma Angle":.................... 41
7.3.4.5 Settings for Measurement: Avoidance Path (CAT1000) .... 41
7.3.4.6 Examples for Clearance Zone and Offset .......................... 43
7.3.4.7 Model Facets...................................................................... 45
7.3.4.8 Avoidance Path .................................................................. 46
7.3.4.9 Avoidance Path: Example .................................................. 46
7.3.5 Settings for Output ................................................................ 47
7.3.5.1 Grafic Output Resolution.................................................... 47
7.3.5.2 Representation of Measurement Points............................. 47
7.3.5.3 Coloured Surface View of Measurement Points ................ 49
7.3.6 Colours for Tolerance Classes............................................. 52
7.3.7 Simulation .............................................................................. 52
7.3.8 Preview Simulation................................................................ 53
7.3.9 Simulation: Part Program ..................................................... 53
7.3.10 Simulation Buttons (CAT1000) ............................................. 54
7.3.11 General Graphics Settings ................................................... 55
7.3.12 Display Clearance Height in Graphics Window (CAT1000) 56
7.3.13 Colour of Clearance Height .................................................. 57
7.4 Main Window........................................................................... 57
7.4.1 Introduction............................................................................ 57
7.4.2 Screen Configuration ............................................................ 58
7.4.3 Toolbar Configuration ........................................................... 58
7.4.4 Window Positions.................................................................. 58
7.4.5 Create a New Part .................................................................. 59
7.4.6 New Model.............................................................................. 59
7.4.7 Open Model ............................................................................ 59
7.4.8 Clear Model ............................................................................ 59
7.4.9 Load Model............................................................................. 60
7.4.9.1 Load Model: Prerequisite ................................................... 60
7.4.9.2 Dialogue "Load model"....................................................... 60
7.4.9.2.1 Options in the Dialogue "Load CAD-Model" ............................. 61
7.4.9.3 Load Model: Steps ............................................................. 62
7.4.9.4 Load Model: Import Settings .............................................. 62
7.4.10 View and Analyse Model ....................................................... 63
7.4.11 Windows and Measurement Points ..................................... 63
7.4.12 Colour Settings ...................................................................... 63
7.4.13 Zoom....................................................................................... 64
7.4.14 "Zoom All" and "Zoom Model" ............................................. 65
7.4.15 Rotate View ............................................................................ 65
4 v3.5 12.04.13
7.4.16 Commands Window............................................................... 66

7.4.16.1 Commands Window: Introduction ...................................... 66
7.4.16.2 Working with the Commands Window................................ 67
7.4.16.2.1 Commands in the Buffer............................................................ 67
7.4.16.2.2 Program Run Stopped............................................................... 67
7.4.16.2.3 Continue Program Run.............................................................. 67
7.4.16.3 Application Example for the Commands Window .............. 68
7.4.16.4 Commands Window: Delete Commands ........................... 69
7.5 Prepare Measurement............................................................. 70
7.5.1 Fixtures ................................................................................... 70
7.5.1.1 Fixtures: Introduction.......................................................... 70
7.5.1.2 Complete CAD-Model is Fixture......................................... 71
7.5.1.3 Part of a Model is Fixture ................................................... 72
7.5.1.4 Reset Fixture Status........................................................... 72
7.5.1.5 Fixtures in 3D-View ............................................................ 73
7.5.2 Pick Surfaces ......................................................................... 74
7.5.3 Layer, Body and CAD-File..................................................... 74
7.5.3.1 Task.................................................................................... 74
7.5.3.2 Proceed as follows ............................................................. 75
7.5.3.3 Dialogue "Picked Elements"............................................... 75
7.5.4 Change entity attributes........................................................ 75
7.5.5 Element Point ......................................................................... 76
7.5.5.1 Element Point (CAT1000) .................................................. 76
7.5.5.2 Element Point: Further Options .......................................... 77
7.5.5.3 Element Point and Sheet Thickness .................................. 78
7.5.5.4 Offset and Sheet Thickness ............................................... 79
7.5.5.5 Offset: Examples ................................................................ 80
7.5.6 Surface Point with Pre-Probing ............................................ 81
7.5.6.1 Surface Point with Pre-Probing: General Settings ............. 81
7.5.6.2 Surface Point with Pre-Probing: Further Options ............... 83
7.5.7 Tolerance of Distance............................................................ 84
7.5.7.1 Tolerance of Distance: Task............................................... 84
7.5.7.2 Tolerance of Distance and Surface Measurement ............. 84
7.5.7.3 Tolerance of Distance: Further Differences........................ 85
7.5.7.4 Best Fit after Tolerance of Distance ................................... 86
7.5.7.5 Tolerance of Distance: Tolerate ......................................... 86
7.5.7.6 Tolerance of Distance: Steps ............................................. 87
7.5.7.7 Further Tolerance Options (CAT1000S) ............................ 87
7.5.7.8 Tolerance of Distance: Output............................................ 88
7.5.7.9 Tolerance of Distance along Probing Direction: Background
89
7.5.8 Surface Profile Tolerance...................................................... 90
7.5.8.1 Surface Profile Tolerance: Introduction .............................. 90
7.5.8.2 Surface Profile Tolerance: Options .................................... 91
7.5.9 Settings for probe display..................................................... 91
7.5.10 Settings for Machine Display................................................ 92
12.04.13 v3.5 5
7.5.11 Collision Check (CAT1000P)................................................. 93

7.5.12 Move CMM .............................................................................. 95
7.5.12.1 Move CMM: Introduction .................................................... 95
7.5.12.1.1 Purpose of the function "Move CMM" ....................................... 95
7.5.12.1.2 Activating the "Move CMM" function......................................... 95
7.5.12.2 "Settings for machine movement" dialogue ....................... 95
7.5.12.3 "Move machine" dialogue................................................... 96
7.5.12.4 Move CMM: Background.................................................... 96
7.5.12.5 Intermediate positions: Three methods.............................. 97
7.5.12.6 Intermediate positions: One or more methods ................... 99
7.5.12.7 Move CMM: Confirm position........................................... 100
7.5.13 Surface Measurement ......................................................... 100
7.5.13.1 Surface Measure Mode.................................................... 100
7.5.13.2 "Measurement Mode" Dialogue ....................................... 100
7.5.13.3 Sort and Label Measurement Data .................................. 103
7.5.13.3.1 Sort measurement data........................................................... 103
7.5.13.3.2 Label measurement data ........................................................ 104
7.5.13.4 Freeform Surface: Further Measurement Steps .............. 104
7.5.13.4.1 Connecting element “Freeform surface” ................................. 105
7.5.14 Restrict Comparison ........................................................... 105
7.5.14.1 Restrict Comparison: Introduction.................................... 105
7.5.14.2 Restrict Comparison: Example......................................... 106
7.5.14.3 Restrict Comparison: Steps ............................................. 107
7.5.14.4 Restrict Comparison: Surface Measurement ................... 108
7.5.14.5 Combine Several Surfaces .............................................. 109
7.5.15 Picked Model Point.............................................................. 109
7.5.16 Work Steps in Dialogue "Picked Model Point" ................. 110
7.5.17 Automatically Check Restriction of Comparison ............. 111
7.5.18 Create Grid ........................................................................... 112
7.5.18.1 Create Grid: Introduction (CAT1000S)............................. 112
7.5.18.2 Create Grid: Dialogue ...................................................... 113
7.5.18.3 Create Grid: Further Options............................................ 114
7.5.18.4 Grid Measurement: Start and End Point .......................... 114
7.5.18.5 Grid Measurement: Examples.......................................... 115
7.5.18.6 Create Grid (Change Probing Direction) .......................... 117
7.5.18.7 Measure Grid ................................................................... 117
7.5.19 Clearance Height (CAT1000PS).......................................... 118
7.5.20 Manipulate CAD Model........................................................ 118
7.5.21 Recover Surfaces ................................................................ 119
7.5.22 Geometrical Elements ......................................................... 119
7.5.23 Search for Edge Points ....................................................... 119
7.5.23.1 Transmission to GEOPAK................................................ 120
7.5.24 Minimum edge distance ...................................................... 120
7.5.25 Probe Edge Point in CAT1000S.......................................... 122
7.5.26 Edge Point Measurement: Dialogue .................................. 122
7.5.27 Figures for Edge Point Measurement ................................ 123
7.5.28 Create Section and Scanning ............................................. 125
6 v3.5 12.04.13
7.5.28.1 Create Section.................................................................. 125

7.5.28.2 Create section with cutting plane ..................................... 125
7.5.28.3 Redefine Existing Section ................................................ 128
7.5.28.4 Create section from edge ................................................. 128
7.5.28.5 Save contour .................................................................... 129
7.5.28.6 Save contour: Further options .......................................... 130
7.5.28.7 Scan CNC ........................................................................ 131
7.5.28.8 Scan CNC: Further options .............................................. 132
7.5.28.9 Scan by leading contour................................................... 134
7.5.28.10 Scan by leading contour: Further options......................... 136
7.5.28.11 Scan on curve .................................................................. 137
7.5.28.12 Scanning on curve: Control Points (CP)........................... 139
7.5.28.13 Settings for control points................................................. 140
7.5.28.14 Scan on curve: Edit and insert ......................................... 144
7.5.28.15 Scan on curve: Further options ........................................ 146
7.5.28.16 Additional Point at End of Edge (CAT1000S)................... 147
7.5.29 Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface .......................... 149
7.5.30 Measurement Procedure ..................................................... 150
7.5.31 Information about Measurement Data ............................... 150
7.5.32 Info Selected Measurement Point ...................................... 151
7.5.32.1 Dialogue "Info Selected Measurement Point" .................. 151
7.5.33 Info. Selected Meas. Point (Table)...................................... 152
7.5.34 Probe Change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P........................... 152
7.5.34.1 Probe Change in CAT1000PS ......................................... 152
7.5.34.2 Manual Probe Change ..................................................... 153
7.5.34.3 Automatic Probe Change ................................................. 154
7.5.34.4 Dialogue "Probe Change" ................................................ 155
7.5.34.5 Measurement Tasks with Automatic Probe Change ........ 155
7.5.34.6 Probe Change: Background ............................................. 156
7.5.34.6.1 Special cases .......................................................................... 156
7.5.34.7 Probe Change: 3D-View................................................... 157
7.5.35 Sweep-Scan in CAT1000 ..................................................... 158
7.5.35.1 Sweep Scan in CAT1000 ................................................. 158
7.5.35.2 Sweep Scan in CAT1000 / Settings ................................. 160
7.5.36 Change probe by angle (CAT1000) .................................... 160
7.5.36.1 Change probe by angle (CAT1000) ................................. 160
7.5.36.2 Probes (Change probe by angle / CAT1000) ................... 163
7.5.36.3 Overview of the probes (Change probe by angle / CAT1000)
163
7.5.37 Move in five axes (CAT1000)............................................... 164
7.5.37.1 Move in five axes (CAT1000) ........................................... 164
7.5.37.2 Move in five axes - options (CAT1000) ............................ 165
7.5.38 Avoiding Collisions ............................................................. 165
7.5.38.1 Avoiding Collisions (CAT1000PS).................................... 165
7.5.39 Change Probe Tree in CAT1000 ......................................... 166
7.6 Data Evaluation ..................................................................... 167
12.04.13 v3.5 7
7.6.1 Select Element ..................................................................... 167

7.6.2 Define Co-ordinate System................................................. 168
7.6.3 Shift / Rotate CAD Model .................................................... 168
7.6.4 Comparison with Measurement Data................................. 169
7.6.4.1 Transmit Measurement Results ....................................... 170
7.6.5 Best Fit ................................................................................. 170
7.6.6 Dialogue "Accept Best Fit Results" ................................... 171
7.6.7 Normal or Extended Precision ........................................... 171
7.6.8 Reset Best Fit Results......................................................... 172
7.6.9 Move/Rotate Measurement Points ..................................... 172
7.6.10 Tolerance & Recalculate ..................................................... 173
7.6.11 Tolerance Comparison Contour in CAT1000 .................... 174
7.6.11.1 Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S) .................. 174
7.6.11.2 Tree View and "Tolerance Comparison Contour" in
CAT1000S 176
7.6.11.3 Display of Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S) . 179
7.6.11.4 Settings for Tolerance Contour (CAT1000S) ................... 180
7.6.11.5 Width of Tolerance ........................................................... 180
7.6.11.6 Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S): Offset ...... 182
7.6.11.7 Scale for error display ...................................................... 183
7.7 Results: Representation and Output .................................. 183
7.7.1 Results Window ................................................................... 183
7.7.2 Representation of Results .................................................. 184
7.7.3 Specifications ...................................................................... 185
7.7.4 Error Report ......................................................................... 185
7.7.5 Edit Graphic Report............................................................. 186
7.7.6 Changing Callout Design .................................................... 187
7.7.7 Elements-List ....................................................................... 188
7.7.8 Standard Callout Properties ............................................... 190
7.7.9 Callout Properties................................................................ 191
7.7.10 Graphical Output ................................................................. 192
7.7.11 Callout Designer .................................................................. 193
7.7.11.1 Callout Designer: Introduction.......................................... 193
7.7.11.2 Callout Design.................................................................. 194
7.7.11.3 Callout Type ..................................................................... 195
7.7.11.4 Surface Point Callout Name............................................. 195
7.7.11.5 General Settings .............................................................. 196
7.7.11.6 Table Properties............................................................... 196
7.7.11.7 Cell Properties.................................................................. 198
7.7.11.8 Keywords ......................................................................... 199
7.7.12 Callouts ................................................................................ 203
7.7.13 Layout for Protocol ............................................................. 205
7.7.13.1 Dialogue "Layout for protocol".......................................... 205
7.7.13.2 "Reset layout for protocol"................................................ 205
7.7.14 Layout for Protocol: Hints .................................................. 205
7.7.15 Output of Tolerance Chart and 3D-View............................ 206
8 v3.5 12.04.13
7.7.16 Protocol Output.................................................................... 206

7.7.17 ProtocolDesigner in CAT1000S .......................................... 207
7.7.18 Data Output to External Systems ....................................... 208
7.7.19 Export HSF ........................................................................... 208
7.7.20 Repeat Mode CAT1000S and GEOPAK.............................. 209
7.7.21 Learn Layout for Repeat Mode ........................................... 210
7.7.22 Export Measurement Data................................................... 210
7.7.23 Archive Measurement Data................................................. 211
7.7.24 Print Graphic Results .......................................................... 211
7.8 Tools ...................................................................................... 212
7.8.1 Create Measurement Path (CAT1000S).............................. 212
7.8.2 Gasket Scan for Surface in CAT1000S .............................. 214
7.8.3 Options in the "Surface (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in
CAT1000S............................................................................................... 217
7.8.4 Create Section for Nominal Contour.................................. 217
7.8.4.1 Create Section for Nominal Contour (CAT1000).............. 217
7.8.4.2 Using Cutting Plane.......................................................... 219
7.8.4.3 Using Offset Along Face(s) .............................................. 222
7.8.4.4 Using Cylinder/Cone Slice................................................ 223
7.8.5 Scan on Curve (Guide Feature) .......................................... 226
7.8.5.1 Scan on Curve (Guide Feature) ....................................... 226
7.8.5.2 Guide Point....................................................................... 230
7.8.5.3 Guide Line ........................................................................ 233
7.8.5.4 Guide Curve ..................................................................... 236
7.8.5.5 Guide Feature: Further Options ....................................... 237
7.8.5.6 Guide Feature and Collision Check.................................. 238
7.9 Coordinate System ............................................................... 240
7.9.1 Set Relation to CAD Co-ordinate System .......................... 240
7.10 Mark........................................................................................ 243
7.10.1 Recover CAD Elements ....................................................... 243
8 CAT1000P...................................................................... 245
8.1 General information .............................................................. 245
8.2 Introduction ........................................................................... 245
8.2.1 Introduction: Purpose ......................................................... 245
8.2.2 Important features of CAT1000P ........................................ 245
8.2.2.1 Automatic element measurement by mouse click ............ 245
8.2.2.2 Scanning in CAT1000P .................................................... 246
8.2.2.3 Automatic measurement of multiple elements ................. 246
8.2.2.4 CAT1000P and CAT1000S .............................................. 246
8.2.2.5 Interaction with GEOPAK ................................................. 246
8.2.3 Programstart and further steps .......................................... 247
8.2.4 Create geometric element: Start......................................... 247
8.2.5 Scanning in CAT1000P........................................................ 248
8.2.5.1 Option scanning: Work steps ........................................... 248
12.04.13 v3.5 9
8.2.5.2 Special cases ................................................................... 248

8.2.5.3 Scanning: Graphical representation................................. 249
8.3 CAT1000 Windows................................................................ 249
8.3.1 "Tree Views" Dialogue Box in CAT1000 ............................ 249
8.3.2 "Tree Views" Dialogue Box in CAT1000: Options ............ 252
8.3.3 Colour and Transparency of Picked Entity ....................... 253
8.4 General Preparation ............................................................. 254
8.4.1 Feature Control Frames (CAT1000) ................................... 254
8.4.1.1 Feature Control Frames in the 3D-View (CAT1000P)...... 254
8.4.2 Define GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)....................................... 255
8.4.2.1 Define GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)................................... 255
8.4.2.2 Nominal Datum Definition (CAT1000P) ........................... 257
8.4.3 GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)................................................... 257
8.4.3.1 GD&T Wizard (CAT1000PS)............................................ 257
8.4.3.2 Nominal Element in the GD&T Wizard (CAT1000PS) ..... 260
8.4.3.3 Datum Definition (CAT1000PS) ....................................... 261
8.4.3.4 Scaling of Tolerance Diagrams (CAT1000PS)................. 261
8.4.3.5 Further Tolerance Options (CAT1000PS)........................ 263
8.4.3.6 GD&T Wizard and MMC (CAT1000PS) ........................... 264
8.5 Scanning in CAT1000P......................................................... 264
8.5.1 Scanning in CAT1000P........................................................ 264
8.6 Head Touch(PH20/REVO)..................................................... 266
8.7 Element Line ......................................................................... 267
8.7.1 Element Line: Introduction ................................................. 267
8.7.2 Help when working with the dialogue window ................. 268
8.7.3 General inputs (line) ............................................................ 269
8.7.4 Programming help ............................................................... 270
8.7.5 Defining the position of the line ......................................... 271
8.7.6 Measurement height............................................................ 271
8.7.6.1 Absolute measurement height ......................................... 272
8.7.7 Edge points .......................................................................... 272
8.7.7.1 Edge point: Start .............................................................. 272
8.7.7.2 Edge point: End................................................................ 272
8.7.7.3 Measurement height ........................................................ 273
8.7.8 Surface points...................................................................... 273
8.7.9 Check measurement points................................................ 273
8.7.9.1 Probing direction .............................................................. 273
8.7.10 Settings for probe display .................................................. 275
8.7.11 Minimum edge distance ...................................................... 276
8.8 Edit: Circle............................................................................. 277
8.8.1 Element Circle: Introduction............................................... 277
8.8.2 General inputs (circle)......................................................... 278
8.8.3 Defining the position of the circle...................................... 279
8.8.3.1 Projection ......................................................................... 280
10 v3.5 12.04.13
8.8.4 Circle Measurement and Thread Pitch............................... 280

8.9 Element Cone ........................................................................ 281
8.9.1 Element Cone: Introduction................................................ 281
8.9.2 General inputs (cone) .......................................................... 282
8.9.3 Defining the position of the cone ....................................... 283
8.10 Element Sphere ..................................................................... 284
8.10.1 Element Sphere: Introduction............................................. 284
8.10.2 General Inputs (Sphere) ...................................................... 285
8.10.3 Defining the position of the sphere.................................... 285
8.11 Element Plane (Grid)............................................................. 286
8.11.1 Element Plane (Grid): Introduction .................................... 286
8.11.2 General inputs (plane) ......................................................... 287
8.11.3 Defining the position of the plane (grid)............................ 288
8.11.4 Defining the measurement height (plane) ......................... 289
8.11.5 Terms used in the dialogue "Element plane".................... 289
8.12 Element Plane (Circle) .......................................................... 290
8.12.1 Element Plane (Circular): Introduction .............................. 290
8.12.2 General inputs (plane / circular) ......................................... 291
8.12.3 Determine the Position of the Plane (Circular) ................. 292
8.13 Element Plane (Gasket) ........................................................ 294
8.13.1 Element Plane (Gasket) in CAT1000P ................................ 294
8.13.2 Options in the "Element Plane (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in
CAT1000P............................................................................................... 296
8.14 Element Cylinder................................................................... 297
8.14.1 Element Cylinder: Introduction .......................................... 297
8.14.2 General inputs (cylinder)..................................................... 299
8.14.3 Defining the position of the cylinder.................................. 299
8.15 Hole Shapes in CAT1000P.................................................... 300
8.15.1 Hole Shapes in CAT1000P: Introduction ........................... 300
8.15.2 Hole Shape Element: Preparation ...................................... 301
8.15.3 Hole Shape Element: Programming Helps ........................ 302
8.16 Inclined Circle........................................................................ 302
8.16.1 Inclined Circle in CAT1000: Introduction........................... 302
8.16.2 Element Inclined Circle: Preparation ................................. 303
8.16.3 Element Inclined Circle: Programming Helps ................... 304
8.17 Edit Elements ........................................................................ 304
8.17.1 Edit Elements (General) ...................................................... 304
8.17.1.1 Edit the Elements: Overview ............................................ 304
8.17.1.2 Check points..................................................................... 305
8.17.1.3 Calculate .......................................................................... 305
8.17.2 Edit: Line............................................................................... 306
8.17.2.1 Edit Element Line: Overview ............................................ 306
8.17.2.2 Exchange start and end point........................................... 306
12.04.13 v3.5 11
8.17.2.3 Change probing direction ................................................. 306

8.17.3 Edit: Circle............................................................................ 306
8.17.3.1 Edit Element Circle: Overview.......................................... 306
8.17.3.2 Angle ................................................................................ 307
8.17.3.3 Movement strategy (circle)............................................... 307
8.17.4 Edit: Cone............................................................................. 308
8.17.4.1 Edit Element Cone: Overview .......................................... 308
8.17.4.2 Angle ................................................................................ 308
8.17.4.3 Movement Strategy (Cone, Sphere) ................................ 309
8.17.5 Edit: Sphere ......................................................................... 309
8.17.5.1 Edit Sphere: Overview ..................................................... 309
8.17.5.2 Angle ................................................................................ 310
8.17.5.3 Zenith Angle (Sphere) ...................................................... 310
8.17.6 Edit: Plane (Grid) ................................................................. 312
8.17.6.1 Edit Plane (Grid): Overview.............................................. 312
8.17.6.3 Exchange / flip start and end point (plane)....................... 313
8.17.6.4 Catch main axis (plane) ................................................... 314
8.17.7 Edit Plane (Circle) ................................................................ 315
8.17.7.1 Edit Plane (Circular): Overview ........................................ 315
8.17.7.2 Angle ................................................................................ 315
8.17.8 Edit: Cylinder ....................................................................... 317
8.17.8.1 Edit Cylinder: Overview.................................................... 317
8.17.8.2 Angle ................................................................................ 317
8.17.8.3 Movement strategy (cylinder)........................................... 317
8.18 Prepare Measurement .......................................................... 318
8.18.1 WEPROM .............................................................................. 318
8.18.1.1 Import of Tolerance Data with WEPROM-File ................. 318
8.18.1.2 Example: Feature "Diameter"........................................... 319
8.18.1.3 Import of CAD-File with Feature File: Steps..................... 320
8.18.1.4 WEPROM Window........................................................... 321
8.18.1.5 WEPROM: Examples....................................................... 321
8.18.2 Virtual Alignment ................................................................. 322
8.18.2.1 Virtual Alignment of Workpiece ........................................ 322
8.18.2.2 Virtual Alignment: Dialogue.............................................. 323
8.18.2.3 Virtual Alignment: Position of CAD Model........................ 324
8.18.2.4 Change CAD Co-ordinate System ................................... 325
8.18.2.4.1 Steps in the Dialogue "Change CAD Co-ordinate System" .... 325
8.18.2.4.2 Origin of the CAD model ......................................................... 326
8.18.3 Alignment Wizard ................................................................ 326
8.18.3.1 Alignment Wizard: Introduction ........................................ 326
8.18.3.2 Alignment Wizard for RPS ............................................... 327
8.18.3.3 Select Elements (Alignment Wizard for RPS) .................. 328
12 v3.5 12.04.13
8.18.3.4 Input Parameters (Alignment Wizard for RPS)................. 329

8.18.3.5 Alignment Wizard for Best Fit........................................... 331
8.18.3.6 Select Elements (Alignment Wizard for Best Fit) ............. 332
8.18.3.7 Input Parameters (Alignment Wizard for Best Fit)............ 333
8.18.4 Collision Check (CAT1000P)............................................... 335
8.18.5 Move CMM ............................................................................ 337
8.18.5.1 Move CMM: Introduction .................................................. 337
8.18.5.1.1 Purpose of the function "Move CMM" ..................................... 337
8.18.5.1.2 Activating the "Move CMM" function ....................................... 337
8.18.5.2 "Settings for machine movement" dialogue...................... 337
8.18.5.3 "Move machine" dialogue................................................. 338
8.18.5.4 Move CMM: Background.................................................. 338
8.18.5.5 Intermediate positions: Three methods ............................ 339
8.18.5.6 Intermediate positions: One or more methods ................. 341
8.18.5.7 Move CMM: Confirm position ........................................... 342
8.18.6 Rotate Table in CAT1000PS ................................................ 342
8.19 Further options when working with CAT1000P .................. 344
8.19.1 Tips on working with CAT1000P ........................................ 344
8.19.2 Display measured elements................................................ 344
8.20 Settings .................................................................................. 344
8.20.1 Settings for Measurement: Introduction............................ 344
8.20.2 Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value........................ 345
8.20.2.1 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma": ..................... 345
8.20.2.2 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma Angle": ........... 346
8.20.3 Settings for CAT1000P Dialogues ...................................... 346
8.21 Multiple Circle Measurement................................................ 347
8.21.1 Multiple Circle Measurement (CAT1000P) ......................... 347
8.21.2 Measurement Parameters (Multiple Circle Measurement in
CAT1000P).............................................................................................. 349
8.21.3 Movement Path (Multiple Circle Measurement CAT1000P)
350
8.21.4 Options (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P) ...... 352
8.21.5 Scanning (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P).... 353
8.21.6 Multi Circle Tolerance.......................................................... 353
12.04.13 v3.5 13
General Information
3 General Information
CAT1000PS
Copyright (c) 2012 Mitutoyo
Neuss, April 2012
Mitutoyo Europe GmbH
Borsigstrasse 8 - 10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone ++49 (0) 21 37-102-0
Fax ++49 (0) 21 37-86 85
E-mail:info@mitutoyo.eu
The program and the software documentation are protected by national and
international laws (c) 2010 by Mitutoyo Europe GmbH. All rights reserved, world-
wide.
14 v3.5 12.04.13
Limitations in CAT1000PS
4 Limitations in CAT1000PS
Measurement in CAT1000PS with the optical measurement system QVP

(QuickVisionProbe) is not supported.
12.04.13 v3.5 15
Hints for Help
5 Hints for Help

You have different possibilities to call our special aids to this program.
 Via the menu bar with the Help / MCOSMOS Help. You get an
overview about the big program groups Mitutoyo is offering. By
clicking on "CAT1000S", you come to the table of contents of this
program. Select the topic you want, either from the table of contents
or from the index.
 Via the buttons with "? Help" in the dialogue windows. When clicking
on these buttons, you immediately come to the topic.
 If you want to "Confirm", optionally select <Return>, <Enter> or the
"OK" buttons in the dialogue windows.
 When you find definitions in the help texts that are coloured and
underlined, you will come to the next topic. You point this definition
with the mouse that is changing into a hand with outstretched finger,
click on the definition and come immediately to the next item. This
can also be a pop-up window with special information. In each case,
you proceed according to Windows conventions.
16 v3.5 12.04.13
Help for CAT1000P and CAT1000S
6 Help for CAT1000P and CAT1000S
Since basic display functions of the CAD model and the operation of the
3D-view in CAT1000P and CAT1000S are identical, there will be some
online help topics that are also the same. These topics are contained in the
help for CAT1000S.
See also "CAT1000S contents".

The following topics from the CAT1000S help are also relevant to CAT1000P:
Main window
 Window positions
 Create a new part
 Load model
 View and analyse model
 Windows and measurement points
 Pre-define colours of model
 Zoom
 Rotate view
Measurement arrangements and measurement course
 CAD data: Search surfaces
 Selected model point
 Clearance height
 Manipulate CAD model
 Restore surfaces
 Geometrical elements
 Search edge points
 Probe edge point
 Edge point measurement: Dialogue
Data evaluation
 Define co-ordinate system
 Shift / rotate CAD model
12.04.13 v3.5 17
CAT1000S
7 CAT1000S
7.1 General Information
CAT1000S
 The CAT1000S program compares measured points and 3D
surfaces.
 For a list of the supported formats, go to the topic "Load Model".
 The program also enables you to compare borders and surfaces.
Neuss, December 2011
Borsigstrasse 8-10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone ++49 (0) 21 37-102-0
++49 (0) 21 37-86 85
E-mail:info@mitutoyo.eu
The program and the software documentation are protected by national and
international laws (c) 2011 by Mitutoyo Europe GmbH. All rights reserved, world-
wide
7.2 General Preparation

7.2.1 Space Navigator
7.2.1.1 SpaceNavigator: Introduction
CAT1000 supports the SpaceNavigator controller of the company "3Dconnexion".
SpaceNavigator settings
After installation of the SpaceNavigator software make the settings of the

SpaceNavigator by means of the "3Dconnexion Control Panel". Double click the
"3DxWare" icon to start the "3Dconnexion Control Panel".
To open the help file of the 3Dconnexion Control Panel options, double
click the "3DxWare" icon. In the 3Dconnexion Control Panel choose the "Help"
menu from the menu bar.
If you use the SpaceNavigator and CAT1000 we recommend to make the
following changes in the Control Panel:
 Tab "App. Configuration (application configuration)": Check the
"Commanding" check box.
 Tab "Device Configuration" and tab "Advanced Settings": The
individual combination of your computer and the SpaceNavigator
leads to a systematic speed of the SpaceNavigator during
movement in all axes. Therefore check the speed which will be best
for your tasks.
18 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Task
You can use the SpaceNavigator to move the complete CAD model in 3D-View
(e.g. the complete CMM model and the CAD model of the workpiece). The
SpaceNavigator allows to zoom, rotate and shift.
The SpaceNavigator can be used in several dialogues with virtual movement of
the CMM. It can be used as a "virtual joystick". In this case move the virtual CMM
displayed in the 3D-View in a similar manner to which the real CMM is moved by
the CMM joystick box. The SpaceNavigator also allows the user to adjust A and
B panning/rotation of the probe head (REVO, PH9/10, PHS1). These options are
available only when a supported movement dialogue in CAT1000 is active, e.g.
"Move in five axes".
The following movement dialogues are supported
SpaceNavigator and "Move machine"
SpaceNavigator and "Move in five axes"
SpaceNavigator and "Change probe by angle"
SpaceNavigator and "Scan on curve"
SpaceNavigator and "Sweep Scan"
SpaceNavigator and "Rotate table"
Operation
The SpaceNavigator disposes of a controller cap that allows six degrees of
movement and of two buttons. Moving the controller cap or pressing a button
provides input to CAT1000, i.e. by means of the SpaceNavigator you can fill in
the drop-down lists for position or angles in the movement dialogues and you can
move the virtual CMM or the virtual probe system.
Placement of the SpaceNavigator is typically when the "3Dconnexion" label
points forward and the USB cable points backward (see picture below).
1 = controller cap
2 = left button
3 = right button
Two modes in movement dialogues
When a movement dialogue which supports the SpaceNavigator in CAT1000 is
open you can choose from two SpaceNavigator modes. Use the right button of
the SpaceNavigator to choose the mode.
"Change 3D-View" mode
You can change the 3D-View using the SpaceNavigator.
12.04.13 v3.5 19
CAT1000S
In this mode the title bar of the movement dialogue additionally indicates "(3D-
View)". See also:SpaceNavigator: Change 3D-View.
"Move virtual CMM" mode
With the SpaceNavigator it is possible to move the virtual CMM in the 3D-View as
prescribed in the movement dialogues and to enter the values in the drop-down
lists of the movement dialogues. See also: SpaceNavigator: Move virtual
machine
Further topics
SpaceNavigator: Introduction
SpaceNavigator: Change 3D-View
SpaceNavigator: Move virtual machine
SpaceNavigator and "Five axes movement"
7.2.1.2 SpaceNavigator: Change 3D-View

Changing mode
In an active movement dialogue change to the "Change 3D-View" mode by
pressing the right button of the SpaceNavigator. In this mode you can move the
entire CMM model and the CAD model of the workpiece. In addition to the
dialogue title, "(3D-View)" is indicated in the title bar.
Hint
If no movement dialogue is selected the "Change 3D-View" mode is
always active.
Change view
With the left SpaveNavigator button you can switch the different views:
 ISO view
 Front view
 Back view
 Right side view
 Left side view
 Top view
 Bottom view
 ISO view
When using the SpaceNavigator to change the 3D-View the following functions
are active:
Pan function
Translating the controller cap in X pans the 3D-view

right or left.
20 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Translating the controller cap in Z pans the 3D-view up or

down.
Zoom function
Translating the controller cap in Y zooms the 3D-view in or out.

Rotation function
Tilting the controller cap about X tilts the 3D-view.
Tilting the controller cap about Y rolls the 3D-view.
Twisting the controller cap about Z spins the 3D-view.

Further topics
12.04.13 v3.5 21
CAT1000S
7.2.1.3 SpaceNavigator: Move Virtual Machine

In order to move the virtual CMM in the 3D-View an active movement dialogue is
required, e.g. "Move machine". "(3D-View)" must not be indicated in the title bar
of the movement dialogue. If so, change the mode by pressing the right button of
the SpaceNavigator.
Moving virtual CMM in X- , Y- or Z-direction
In all supported movement dialogues it is possible to move the virtual CMM in X- ,
Y- or Z-direction.
 Translating the controller cap in X

updates the value of the X-axis of the CMM and pans the virtual
CMM right or left.
 Translating the controller cap in Y updates the

value of the Y-axis of the CMM and zooms the virtual CMM in or out.
 Translating the controller cap in Z updates the

value of the Z-axis of the CMM and pans the virtual CMM up or
down.
Tilting virtual probe system
In some supported movement dialogues you can pan or rotate the virtual probe
system by using the SpaceNavigator, e.g. in the "Move in five axes" dialogue.
 Tilting the controller cap

about X or Y updates the value of the A angle in the edit field. The
increment depends on the probe used. The virtual probe system is
tilted/rolled accordingly.
22 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 Twisting the controller cap about Z updates

the value of the B angle in the edit field. The increment depends on
the probe used. The virtual probe system is spun accordingly.
Further topics
7.2.1.4 SpaceNavigator and "Move Machine"

Choose "Measure / Move machine" from the CAT1000 menu bar to open the
"Move machine" dialogue box.
If "3D-View" is indicated in the title bar of the movement dialogue use the right
button of the SpaceNavigator to change the mode.
Choosing movement options
You can clamp one axis. Use the left button of the SpaceNavigator to select one
of the following options:
 Move machine
 Move machine X
 Move machine Y
 Move machine Z
The selected movement option is indicated in the title bar of the dialogue box.
Moving virtual CMM
You move the virtual CMM in 3D-view. At the same time the current values of the
CMM position in X, Y and Z are updated in the dialogue box.
It is also possible to enter the values in the drop-down lists or to use the arrow
buttons without using the SpaceNavigator.
Buttons relevant to the SpaceNavigator
If you click the "Position of machine" button, the values of the current CMM
position are shown in the drop-down lists. The virtual CMM is moved back from
the target position to the current CMM position.
Activating the "CMM in target position" button shows the target position in
the 3D-View. Deactivating the "CMM in target position" shows the current CMM
position.
12.04.13 v3.5 23
CAT1000S
Hint
A green line shows the movement path. Click "OK" to confirm. The
movement command will be carried out.
Further topics
7.2.1.5 SpaceNavigator and "Move in Five Axes"

Choose "Measure / Move in five axes" from the CAT1000 menu bar to open the
"Move in five axes" dialogue box.
You can clamp axes for movement or angles for panning. Use the left button of
the SpaceNavigator to select one of the following movement options:
 Move in five axes
 Move in five axes XYZ
 Move in five axes X
 Move in five axes Y
 Move in five axes Z
 Move in five axes AB
 Move in five axes A
 Move in five axes B
Moving virtual CMM
You move the virtual CMM in 3D-view. At the same time the current values of the
CMM position in X, Y and Z are updated in the dialogue box.
You pan the probe system or you rotate the probe system. At the same time the
current values of the virtual probe system for angle A and angle B are updated in
the dialogue box.
position.
24 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Hint
Further topics
7.2.1.6 SpaceNavigator and "Change Probe by Angle"

Choose "Measure / Change probe by angle" from the CAT1000 menu bar to
open the "Change probe by angle" dialogue box.
You can clamp axes for movement or angles for panning. Use the left button of
the SpaceNavigator to select one of the following options:
 Change probe by angle (all angles / all axes)
 Change probe by angle XYZ (axes XYZ)
 Change probe by angle X (X axis)
 Change probe by angle Y (Y axis)
 Change probe by angle Z (Z axis)
 Change probe by angle AB (angles A and B)
 Change probe by angle A (angle A)
 Change probe by angle B (angle B)
Panning virtual probe system
You pan or rotate the virtual probe system. At the same time the current values of
the virtual probe system for angle A and angle B are updated in the dialogue box.
A green line shows the movement path.
The movements in X, Y and Z direction are possible only if the "Move machine
after probe change" function is active.
To activate the function "Move machine after probe change" click the "CMM
in target position" button.
The angles are changed in increments which depend on the probe system.
12.04.13 v3.5 25
CAT1000S
position.
Hint
Further topics
7.2.1.7 SpaceNavigator and "Scan on Curve"

Choose "Tools / Create section" from the CAT1000 menu bar. In the "Create
section" dialogue box click the "Scan on curve" button.
Hint
In this dialogue you can use the SpaceNavigator only if the following
conditions are fulfilled: you use a REVO probe system, "Edit" is activated
and the limiting point for which you wish to change the angle is selected.
You can clamp one angle. Use the left button of the SpaceNavigator to select one
 Angle AB (angle A and angle B)
 Angle A
 Angle B
Panning virtual probe system
You pan or rotate the probe system. At the same time the current values of the
virtual probe system for angle A and angle B are updated in the dialogue box.
Further topics
SpaceNavigator: Change virtual machine
26 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S

7.2.1.8 SpaceNavigator and "Sweep Scan"

Choose "Measure / Sweep scan" from the CAT1000 menu bar to open the
"Sweep Scan" dialogue box.
Hint
In this dialogue you can use the SpaceNavigator only if the following
conditions are fulfilled: you use a REVO probe system, "Edit" is activated
and the limiting point for which you wish to change the angle is selected.
You can clamp one angle. Use the left button of the SpaceNavigator to select one
 Sweep scan AB (angle A and angle B)
 Sweep scan A
 Sweep scan B
Further topics
The following movement options are supported
7.2.1.9 SpaceNavigator and "Rotate Table"

Choose "Measure / Rotate table" from the CAT1000 menu bar to open the
"Rotate table" dialogue box.
If you twist the controller cap, the virtual table is twisted

accordingly in the 3D-view and the corresponding angle is updated in the
dialogue box.
Further topics
12.04.13 v3.5 27
CAT1000S

7.3 Settings
7.3.1 General Settings
7.3.1.1 Length unit conversion (CAT1000)
Start
To open the "Length unit conversion" dialogue box choose the "File" menu from
the CAT1000 menu bar.
Task
Choose the measuring unit of your CAD model in the "Length unit conversion"
dialogue box (Millimetres or inch).
Example 1
Your CAD model is available with the measuring unit inch. To change the
measuring unit of your model to millimetres proceed as follows:
 Choose the "millimetres" radio button.
 Check the "Convert model" check box.
 Click "OK" to confirm.
Example 2
In the CAD file of your CAD model the measuring unit millimetres has been
defined by mistake. The CAD model however has been defined with the
measuring unit inch, which means that all measures are available in inch,
whereas the unit "millimetres" is displayed in the task bar of the 3D view. To
determine the correct measuring unit proceed as follows:
 Uncheck the "Convert model" check box.
 Choose the "inch" radio button.
 The CAD file and the CAD model have the same measuring unit in
CAT1000.
To set millimetres for your CAD model proceed as described in example 1.
Hint
The "Convert model" check box is normally checked. Uncheck this check
box for exceptions only (example 2).
7.3.1.2 Create graphic grid

Start
To open the "Create grid" dialogue box choose "Create graphic grid..." from the
"Tools" menu.
Task
This function is a graphical help to estimate distances on the CAD model. You
have the possibility to position a graphic grid on the CAD model.
28 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Hint
This function is not related to the CAT1000 topic "Create grid for
measurement".
Dialogue
In the "Interval" input fields you enter the distances in the screen axes in the
model unit (millimetres or inch). You can input whole numbers only.
Restrictions
The grid is only visible if the CAD model is displayed in the three principal planes.
 YZ plane
 ZX plane
 XY plane
7.3.2 Settings for 3D-View

For changing the colours of the CAD-model, read the help topic "Colour settings
".
Related topics
"General Graphics Settings".
"Settings for Probe Display".
"Settings for machine display".
7.3.3 Settings for CAD Files

7.3.3.1 Settings for CAD Files
To be able to work with the programs CAT1000S and CAT1000P, you must first
read in a CAD model. For further information about this topic, please refer to
"Load Model". CAT1000S / CAT1000P supports the mostly required CAD file
formats.
To get to the settings for CAD files use the menu "Settings" / "CAD Files" /
"Settings for...".
For detailed information about the settings for CAD files, please refer to:
Settings for IGES Import
Settings for CATIA V4 Import
Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter
Settings for Parasolid Import
Settings for Pro/E Import
Settings for STEP Import
Settings for VDAFS Import
Settings for Unigraphics Import
Settings for SolidWorks Import
Settings for Inventor Import
7.3.3.2 Settings for IGES Import

To get to the window "Settings for IGES Import" use the menu "Settings" / "CAD
Files”.
Select the desired options for the import of the CAD model via the checkmark
buttons.
12.04.13 v3.5 29
CAT1000S
Also read free contours

With this option you can determine whether you want the free contours to be
converted or ignored.
Also read free points
With this option you can determine whether you want the free points to be
Also read free planes
With this option you can determine whether you want the free planes to be
Healing
With this option you can determine whether you want the ACIS model to be
corrected after performed conversion.
Read also dirty elements
Faulty elements are shown after the import of the CAD file.
Convert unit of model in mm (millimetre)
With this option you can convert the unit of the model in millimetres.
Also read blinded out elements
With this option you can determine whether blinded-out or hidden (not to be
displayed) entities are considered during the conversion from IGES to ACIS.
Separate spline contours
With this option you can determine whether you want the borders of faulty spline
planes to be repaired.
Display log
When you select this option, a log file is created and opened.
Used trim contour
With this option you can define if you want the 2D- or 3D-contours to be
considered during conversion or if you want to use the default setting from the
IGES file for this. If the file contains only 3D-contours, no 2D-contours can be
read.
7.3.3.3 Settings for CATIA V4 Import

To get to the window “Settings for CATIA Import" use the menu "Settings" / "CAD
Files".
button.
With this option you can determine whether you want free points to be converted
or ignored.
With this option you can determine whether you want free planes to be converted
or ignored.
Read solids
With this option you can determine whether you want solids to be read.
30 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Use analytical planes

In the CATIA File, an analytical definition is stored together with the polynomial
definition of the plane.
With this option you can determine, which definition is to be used for the
conversion. This API sets the option for the use of the analytical plane definition
stored in the CATIA file.
Only read master workspace
With this option you can determine if only the master workspace is to be read.
Only read root entities
With this option you can determine whether you want all entities or only the root
CATIA entities to be read.
Read "NoShow" entities
With this option you can determine whether you want the "NoShow" entities to be
read.
Read attributes
Use this option to define the attributes to be transferred. Attributes like, for
example, name, layer and colour can be transferred.
Healing
With this option you can determine whether you want the ACIS model to be
corrected after performed conversion.
Read local co-ordinate system
The CAD model may contain several co-ordinate systems. Differentiation is made
between the "active local" and the "global" co-ordinate system. Before importing
the CAD model you can define that only the active co-ordinate system is taken
on. In this case, activate the check box or otherwise the global co-ordinate
system is transferred.
Display log
7.3.3.4 Settings for CATIA V5 Import

To get to the window "Settings for CATIA V5 Import" use the menu "Settings" /
"CAD files".
button.
Read also free points
Use this option to define if free points shall be transferred or ignored.
Read attributes
With this option you can determine which attributes you want to be converted.
Attributes like, for example, name, layer and colour, can be converted.
Healing
With this option you can determine whether the ACIS model shall be corrected
after performed conversion.
12.04.13 v3.5 31
CAT1000S

Display log
Read PMI (Product Manufacturing Information)
If you choose this option the GD&T information will be transferred to CAT1000.
7.3.3.5 Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter

To get to the window "Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter", proceed via the
menu bar / Settings / CAD files.
Use the check boxes to select the required options for importing the CAD model.
Healing
Use this option to define if the ACIS model shall be corrected after completed
conversion.
Healing and tightening gaps
Use this option to define if the ACIS model shall be corrected after completed
conversion. Furthermore, this option closes possible gabs in the display of the
CAD model.
Stitching for multi-bodies
If there are several bodies, you can use this option to define that the ACIS model
is loaded as one single body.
Show logfile
Use this option to create and open a logfile.
7.3.3.6 Settings for Parasolid Import

To get to the window “Settings for Parasolid Import” use the menu “Settings” /
“CAD Files”.
You select the desired options for the import of the CAD model via the checkmark
button.
Check entities
When you select this option, the generated ACIS entities are checked and
entered into the log.
Read attributes
32 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Healing
Display log
7.3.3.7 Settings for Pro/E Import

To get to the window "Settings for Pro/E Import" use the menu "Settings" / "CAD
files".
button.
Read assemblies
When you select this option, Pro/E assemblies are translated into ACIS entities.
Pro/E takes a Pro/E assembly file as an entry together with the path of the sub
part files and translates the file into ACIS entities.
Read parts
When you select this option, Pro/E files are translated into ACIS entities. A Pro/E
part file is taken as an entry and translated into ACIS entities.
Read also free surfaces
Use this option to define if free surfaces shall be converted or ignored.
Read attributes
Show logbook
Use this option to create and open a log file.
7.3.3.8 Settings for STEP Import

To get to the window "Settings for STEP Import” use the menu “Settings” / “CAD
files”.
button.
12.04.13 v3.5 33
CAT1000S
Read class I
Read class II
Read class III
Read class IV
Read class V
Read class VI
For further information about the options “Read class I” up to “Read class VI”,
please refer to the STEP standard.
Read also free points
Use this option to define if free points shall be converted or ignored.
Read attributes
Healing
Display log
7.3.3.9 Settings for VDAFS Import

To get to the window "Settings for VDAFS Import" use the menu “Settings” /
“CAD files”.
button.
translated or ignored.
With this option you can determine whether you want the free points to be
With this option you can determine whether you want the free planes converted
or ignored.
Healing
With this option you can determine if the ACIS model shall be corrected after
performed conversion.
Separate open edges
With this option you can determine whether the borders of faulty spline planes
shall be repaired or not.
Display log
7.3.3.10 Settings for Unigraphics Import

To get to the window "Settings for Unigraphics import", proceed via the menu bar
/ Settings / CAD files.
34 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Read also free curves
Use this option to define if the free curves shall be converted or ignored.
Healing
Use this option to define if the ACIS model shall be corrected after completion of
the conversion.
Read layers
Read multi-parts
The individual parts of the CAD files (bodies) are read separately.
Read attributes
Show logbook
7.3.3.11 Settings for SolidWorks Import

To get to the window "Settings for SolidWorks Import", proceed via the menu bar
/ Settings / CAD files.
Read assemblies
When selecting this option, SolidWorks assemblies are translated to ACIS
entities.
SolidWorks takes on a SolidWorks assembly file as an input together with the
path of the sub part file and translates the file into ACIS entities.
Read also hidden elements
Use this option to define if hidden or suppressed (not to be shown) entities shall
be considered during the conversion of SolidWorks in ACIS.
Read suppressed parts
Show logbook
7.3.3.12 Settings for Inventor Import

To get to the window "Settings for Inventor Import" use the menu "Settings" /
"CAD Files".
buttons.
12.04.13 v3.5 35
CAT1000S
Display log
7.3.4 Settings for Measurement

7.3.4.1 Settings for Measurement: Introduction
To get to the "Settings for Measurement" dialogue, use the menu bar and the
"Settings" menu.
Five tabs are available
 General
 Position Tolerance
 Surface
 Nominal Value
 Avoidance Path
Settings for measurement: General
Here you can establish a permissible deviation. This function is necessary
because CAT1000S / CAT1000P expects an ideal element for the calculation of
the probing points.
It may, however, happen that elements in the CAD model slightly deviate due to
roundoff errors. Verification of these probing points may show that these points
are not located exactly on the element. As a result of such check, the probing
points would be regarded as not valid points.
Establishing a permissible deviation helps overcome this problem. This distance
defines how far the calculated probing points are allowed to deviate from the
ideal element. Within this deviation, the probing points are regarded as valid
probing points.
If the permissible deviation is a small value, surfaces will be searched for in

a small range around the calculated measurement point.The smaller the
range the faster the calculation. If the range is, however, too small, it is
quite possible that the correct surface is not found. To reduce this risk you
are advised to determine a value that is not too small.
Number of decimals
Here, you can define the number of decimals.
Use master ball for collision check
If you activate the checkbox "Use master ball for collision check", the master ball
is used for collision check.
If you deactivate the checkbox "Use master ball for collision check", the master
ball is not used for collision check.
Example: You have defined the master ball in your configuration. Then you
removed the master ball from the CMM table. In this case you can deactivate the
collision check for the master ball.
Maximum step size for collision control
Here, you enter a value in the unit of your CAD model. Collisions with objects that
are smaller than this step size are possibly not recognised. On the other hand, a
smaller value entails a bigger calculation effort and is thus more time consuming.
36 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
7.3.4.2 Settings for Measurement: Position Tolerance

To get to the dialogue "Settings for Measurement" use the menu "Settings".
Purpose of this function:
The purpose is to establish what effect the position tolerances accepted by
GEOPAK are to have in CAT1000S.
7.3.4.2.1 Option boxes

The option boxes allow you to choose from the following possibilities:
 The position tolerance is accepted into CAT1000S in the same
way as in GEOPAK.
 The position tolerance is converted into a distance between the
nominal point and the actual point.
Example:
 Your intention is to measure a circle. The centre of the circle is X =
0 and Y = 0. The actual value, however, is X = 0,1.
 Select the first option (position tolerance). Specify the tolerance in
GEOPAK and transfer the element to CAT1000S.
 Result: The total deviation amounts to 0,2.
 With the second (distance) option selected, the total deviation is 0,1
millimetres.
7.3.4.2.2 Input box "Tolerance for GEOPAK"

Enter here what you propose for the position tolerance. This value is transferred
from CAT1000S to GEOPAK.
The real value, however, is entered into the dialogue "Clicked Model Point". To
get to this dialogue, use menu bar and the "Tools" and "Select Points" menu.
For further information regarding the dialogue refer to: Settings for Measurement:
Surface Settings for Measurement: General Settings for Measurement: Nominal
Value Avoidance path generation
7.3.4.3 Settings for Measurement: Surface

This topic is relevant to CAT1000S only
Start
Definition
As a standard, the "Probe radius compensation for CAD point calculation" in the
dialogue "Settings for measurement / surface" is active.
In case of a surface measurement in CAT1000, the probe radius is added from

the probe centre in direction of the surface to be scanned. The result is the
compensated measurement point. From this point, the shortest distance to the
CAD surface is determined.
This procedure is used for all surfaces around the probe centre.
12.04.13 v3.5 37
CAT1000S
The CAD surface next to (absolute value) the relevant compensated

measurement point is then used for the calculation.
1 = CAD surface
2 = Measurement surface
3 = Deviation
7.3.4.3.1 Examples
Is the position of a measurement point close to surface intersections, it is not
always possible to clearly determine the contact point of the probe. Until now,
CAT1000 has always used the next surface to the compensated measurement
point for calculation.
This is not always desired.
The following examples show the different effects of the function "Probe radius
compensation for CAD point calculation".
Measurement point not close to surface intersection
If the measurement point is not close to a surface intersection, it is irrelevant
whether you have activated the function "Probe radius compensation for CAD
point calculation" in the dialogue "Settings for measurement / surface" or not.
In the example below, a negative deviation results.
1 = CAD surface
38 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
2 = Measurement surface
3 = Deviation
Measurement point close to surface intersection

Probe radius compensation active
You measure close to the surface intersection and the measurement surface
(actual surface) has a negative deviation.
In this example, the shortest distance to the CAD surface (nominal surface) is the
distance to surface 1 at the surface intersection.
A positive deviation is the result.
1 = CAD surfaces
2 = Measurement surfaces
3 = Deviation
4 = Surface intersection
5 = CAD surface 1
12.04.13 v3.5 39
CAT1000S
6 = CAD surface 2
Probe radius compensation inactive
In this example, the same data are used as in the example above, however, the
probe radius compensation is inactive.
With this method, the shortest distance from the probe centre (uncompensated
measurement point) to the CAD surface to be scanned is determined.
This procedure is used for all surfaces close to the probe centre.
The CAD surface next to (absolute value) the relevant uncompensated
measurement point is then used for the calculation.
1 = CAD surfaces
2 = Measurement surfaces
3 = Deviation
40 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
4 = Surface intersection
5 = CAD surface 1
6 = CAD surface 2
For further information regarding the "Settings for measurement" refer to:
Settings for Measurement: General Settings for Measurement: Position
Tolerance Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value Settings for Measurement:
Avoidance Path
7.3.4.4 Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value

7.3.4.4.1 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma":

Here you establish the digit after the comma starting from which CAT1000P will
round the nominal values of the elements.
Example:
 Based on the model data, the diameter of a circle has been
calculated. The diameter is 24,996 (length unit of the model loaded).
 In case you have established three digits after the comma, then
precisely this value will be transmitted to GEOPAK.
 If you limit the number of digits after the comma to 2, the circle
diameter will be rounded to 25.
7.3.4.4.2 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma Angle":

Here you establish the digit after the comma starting from which the angle will be
rounded in CAT1000P.
For further information regarding the dialogue refer to:
Settings for Measurement: Surface
Settings for Measurement: General
Settings for Measurement: Position Tolerance
Avoidance path generation
7.3.4.5 Settings for Measurement: Avoidance Path (CAT1000)

Start
To get to the dialogue "Settings for measurement", proceed via the menu
"Settings".
12.04.13 v3.5 41
CAT1000S
Note
Deactivate the clearance height in GEOPAK before creating the
avoidance path in CAT1000. See also: Clearance height
Options
Default for automatic probe change
Use this option to activate or deactivate the automatic probe change upon
program start.
Allow generation of new probes
When selecting this option, the automatic probe change can generate new probe
positions. Advantage: The program automatically generates the probe positions.
When selecting this option, the automatic probe change can generate new probe
positions. Advantage: The program automatically generates the probe positions.
Disadvantage: Each and every probe needs to be calibrated in GEOPAK.
Number of measurement points for probe search in percent
Select this option if the probe shall be changed during the element measurement.
The value defines the minimum percentage of points that need to be measurable
before the search for a new probe is stopped. The default value is 100 percent.
Resorting of measurement points
When selecting this option, the measurement points are – if required – resorted
to shorten the path and to minimise the number of probe changes. However, this
option may affect the calculation of the geometric elements.
Clearance zone
In case that the distance between workpiece and probe is smaller than the safety
distance minus clearance zone, this combination is deemed to be a collision.
If the clearance zone is bigger than the safety distance, the clearance zone is
limited to the safety distance. Otherwise, a collision would occur during each
probing.
The input is performed in model units.
If you define a very small clearance zone, the program could misleadingly show
collisions. The reasons for this are to be found in the usage of the model facets
for this collision control. Read also the following topic:
Model Facets
Examples about the "Clearance zone"
Graphical examples about the "Clearance zone" are found in the following help
topic:
Clearance Zone and Offset
Avoid collisions
Read the following topic about avoidance of collisions:
Collision check in CAT1000PS
Offset
If you create a collision free movement path and if an interim position has to be
inserted first, the offset defines the distance between this interim position and the
workpiece. Furthermore, the probe radius is added to this offset. The input is
performed in model units.
For further information regarding the "Settings for measurement" refer to:
42 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S

Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value
7.3.4.6 Examples for Clearance Zone and Offset

CAD model facets and safety distance
In case that the distance between workpiece and probe is smaller than the
safety distance minus clearance zone, this combination is deemed to be a
collision.
1 = Safety distance minus clearance zone
2 = Safety distance
3 = Facet
4 = Cylinder to be measured (top view)
5 = Probe sphere
Collision check deactivated
The collision check is deactivated.
12.04.13 v3.5 43
CAT1000S
The four measurement points can be measured.

Collision check activated and low resolution (coarse faceting)
The collision check is activated. The resolution is low.

Because of the facets, the four selected measurement points are detected
as collisions.
Collision check activated and high resolution (fine faceting)
The collision check is activated. The resolution is high.
44 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
The collision check calculates a movement path without any collisions. The
four measurement points can be measured.
Segment of a circle and low resolution (coarse faceting)
Because of the low resolution, the CAD model facets are visible.
Result: The collision check detects a collision when calculating the
movement path to the measurement point.
CAD model facets
The following topic contains a graphical example of the facets of a CAD model:
CAD model facets
7.3.4.7 Model Facets

For a graphic representation of three-dimensional bodies, the bodies need to be
facetted.
This means: All model surfaces are divided into triangles. These triangles can
then be represented by the graphics card.
These triangles do not give an accurate representation of the surfaces but are
only an approximation.
Example:
A cylinder (top view) is not represented as a round circle but with edges.
To set the graphic resolution of the facets, go to the dialogue "General Graphics
Settings"
12.04.13 v3.5 45
CAT1000S
7.3.4.8 Avoidance Path

Task "Avoidance path"
When you select the option "Automatic Probe Change", the system adds probe
changes to the path.
The path is represented statically by lines. In addition, you can have a simulation
of the path. See also "Simulation".
Start
The avoidance path is automatically calculated during the element measurement
when the collision control is activated (menu bar / Measurement / Collision
control). The collision control can only operate when the clearance height in
GEOPAK is deactivated.
For more information, see " Avoidance Path: Example".
7.3.4.9 Avoidance Path: Example

Example
Example for the measurement of a plane with optimised avoidance path and
automatic generation of probe positions.
Procedure
 The probe positions are defined. Probe positions are assigned to all
measurement points.
Probe position 1
Probe position 2
 Optimisation of avoidance path
The measurement points with the same probe position are
connected to the optimised avoidance path. In this case, the path
has two segments.
46 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 Probe change
A path for the probe change is created.
 Possible collisions are automatically detected.

 Avoidance path
The interrupted segments of the path are connected.
Result: the optimal avoidance path.
7.3.5 Settings for Output

7.3.5.1 Grafic Output Resolution
Start
Choose "Grafic output resolution" from the "Settings" menu. The "Grafic output
resolution" dialogue appears.
Task
In the "Grafic output resolution" dialogue you determine the resolution of bitmaps
used in the ProtocolDesigner protocols.
Dialogue
The default value in the "Resolution" input field is 100 dpi. Choose a value
between 72 and 300 dpi. If you enter a value smaller than 72 or greater than 300
dpi an error message appears.
The settings in the "Grafic output resolution" dialogue are saved for all parts.
7.3.5.2 Representation of Measurement Points

Start
Choose "Graphic" from the "Settings" menu. In the "Graphic" submenu choose
"Measurement Points Style" to open the "Measurement Points Style" dialogue
box.
Advantages of the Cone View
In the "Measurement Points Style" dialogue box choose either the "Meas. point
as cone" or the "Meas. point as sphere" option field. When starting CAT1000S
the default setting is "Meas. point as sphere". The graphical representation of
measurement points as cones after the nominal-actual comparison is especially
suited for a great number of measurement points that are positioned inside the
material of the CAD model. The cones are always positioned outside the CAD
model.
12.04.13 v3.5 47
CAT1000S
Representation of Cones
The colours of the measurement points (sphere or cone) are determined in the
"Colour of tolerance classes" dialogue box (choose "Colour for tolerance classes"
from the "Settings" menu).
A measurement point with positive deviation is displayed as a cone, the

base of which is positioned on the surface of the CAD model.
A measurement point with negative deviation is displayed as a cone, the

tip of which touches the surface of the CAD model.
The size of a cone and the distance from the model do not depend on the
deviation.
The colour of a cone and the direction of the cone tip depend on the deviation.
Note
Choosing the "Measurement point as cone" option means that the "With
deviation lines" check box will be unchecked.
On the left: The measurement points are displayed as spheres (default

setting).
On the right: The measurement points are displayed as cones.
Further Options
 With deviation lines (spheres only)
Checking the "With deviation lines" check box means that in addition
to the spheres also lines are displayed (see left picture above). A
large deviation is represented by la long line. A small deviation is
represented by a short line.
 Visibility test
Checking the "Visibility test" check box means that only the visible
points including the corresponding information can be seen in the
current 3D view. The hidden points, including the corresponding
information, such as e.g. callouts are faded out. Unchecking the
"Visibility test" check box means that all points, also the hidden ones
including the corresponding information are shown in the current 3D
view.
 Text for single points
• Only colours: If you choose this option only the colours of the
tolerance classes will be shown. The spheres or the cones will
be displayed in the same colour.
• No. of meas. point: Choosing this option displays the number of
measurement points.
• Deviation (X, Y, Z): The individual values of the deviation of the
three axes are displayed.
48 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
• Deviation: The total deviation is displayed.

Further settings
The settings for the magnification of the deviation and for the size of the sphere
or cone are determined in the following dialogue boxes:
 "Settings", "Graphic", "General Settings", "Minimum size for meas.
points display" (means the diameter of the conical surface).
 "Settings", "Graphic", "Settings for probe display", "Magnification
factor" (valid for cone and sphere).
 The colour settings for the tolerance classes are determined in the
"Colour of tolerance classes" dialogue box (choose "Colour for
tolerance classes" from the "Settings" menu).
7.3.5.3 Coloured Surface View of Measurement Points

Task
The graphical representation of measurement points as coloured surface after a
nominal-actual-comparison is recommended for a large number of measurement
points. For a lower density of measurement points it is recommended to display
the measurement points as spheres or cones. See also: Measurement point
style.
The coloured surface shows the deviation between measurement points and the
nominal surface by means of different colours on the nominal surface.
Start
 Choose "Graphic" from the "Settings" menu. In the "Graphic"
submenu choose "Settings for coloured surface view" to open the
"Settings for coloured surface" dialogue box.
 Or click the relevant button in the icon bar.

Note
When starting CAT1000 the measurement points are displayed as
spheres.
12.04.13 v3.5 49
CAT1000S
Settings for Coloured Surface
Check the "Enable coloured surface view" check box in the "Settings for coloured
surface" dialogue box.
If you prefer not to have gradients between the different colours, check the "No
gradient" check box. Gradient: Along a line the colour of a surface changes from
the start colour to the target colour. There is a smooth change between the
colours.
50 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Move the slide of the "Number of colours" button to select the desired number.
For the "Coloured Surface" in CAT1000S choose at least five colours. The
maximum number of colours is 15.
Click the "Swap top and bottom colour" button to reverse the colour
representation.
Presettings
The blue colour represents 150 per cent of the upper tolerance limit. The red
colour represents 150 per cent of the lower tolerance limit. Green means a
deviation of 0.
Gradient or Colour gradings
If you prefer the coloured surface view with gradient uncheck the "No gradient"
check box. In this case the coloured surface is displayed by means of colour
gradings, i.e. without a smooth change from one colour to another.
This picture shows the coloured surface view with gradient.

"Max grid"
CAT1000PS creates a grid for calculating the colour representation. By default
the value in the input field is 1.000 (CAD unit).The size of the cells is determined
by the "Max grid" value which indicates the maximum desired grid spacing.
If there are several measured points within the area of a cell, the value is largest
deviation from those measured points with.
Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)
If there are no measured points within the area of the cell then the value of the
cell is estimated using the IDW (Inverse Distance Weighting) algorithm from the
centre of the cell.
The Range value and the Distance factor value determine the IDW value.
Range
The "Range" value specifies the distance over which nearby points are
considered when estimating the value for a cell. A range value of at least twice
the "Max grid" value will increase the likelihood some nearby points will be
considered if no points lie within the area of a cell.
12.04.13 v3.5 51
CAT1000S
Distance factor
The "Dist factor" value determines how quickly the effect of a point will diminish
as the distance increases. A larger Dist. factor will give more weight to closer
points and less weight to points further away. A small Dist. factor will give a more
equal weighting, but closer points will have more weight.
With a value of one the weight will diminish directly with the distance.
With a value of two the weight will diminish with the square of the distance.
7.3.6 Colours for Tolerance Classes

To get to the "Colours for Tolerance Classes" dialogue, use the menu bar and the
"Settings" menu.
Here you have the opportunity to assign different colours to each of the tolerance
classes.
In CAT1000S, the complete tolerance range is subdivided into 14 tolerance
classes.
Proceed as follows:
 Click on the button with the desired tolerance class.
 In the subsequent window designated "Colours", follow the Windows
conventions and confirm.
This allows you to define different colours for the upper and the lower tolerance
classes. This is required in case you want to find out whether there is too much
(+ deviation) or too little material (- deviation) available.
7.3.7 Simulation
Preparation
Before starting a simulation, you should go to "Settings for machine display" and
select the components of the system that are to be represented in the simulation.
Read the topic "Settings for Machine Display".
Task
CAT1000P and CAT1000S provide options for simulation and collision control for
your current measurement task. This function also considers the kinematic model
of your complete CMM.
Applicable for CAT1000P only:
When working with CAT1000P, you can also perform a simulation and collision
control with an already existing part program. This is useful when, for example,
you have changed an existing part program with the part program editor.
Two simulations
CAT1000S/CAT1000P offer two types of simulation.
Preview simulation
Before the CMM starts to move, a preview shows the simulation of the movement
path and the measurement in 3D-view.
Following this simulation, the probe shown in 3D-view moves back to start
position.
Also read the topic "Preview simulation".
Simulation of an existing part program
For this, read the topic "Simulation of an existing part program".
52 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
7.3.8 Preview Simulation

Situation and task
You are programming a part program. For example, before you measure a circle,
you can check the command "Circle measurement" using the simulation. The
path of the current measurement task is simulated. For this path, CAT1000S and
CAT1000P offer a collision control. The corresponding points are removed.
Start of the preview simulation
Use the button to start the simulation. For how to control the simulation,
read the topic "Simulation Buttons".
7.3.9 Simulation: Part Program

This topic is relevant to CAT1000P only
Situation and task
You can control and, if necessary (e.g. in case of a collision) edit an existing part
program using the simulation function.
If you want to use simulation for collision control, you will first need to start
the corresponding function.
Activate the collision control either by clicking the symbol or go to the menu
bar / Measurement / Collision control.
Start
In CAT1000P, select the simulation mode by going to the menu bar /
Measurement / Simulation mode.
GEOPAK is started in simulation mode. In the following GEOPAK dialogue,
select the part program to be displayed in the simulation. This dialogue
corresponds to the dialogue for the repeat mode.
Use the buttons of the toolbar to control the simulation. You can start the same
functions by going to the menu bar / view.
For how to control the simulation, refer to the topic "Simulation Buttons".
Start editor at current position

Select this function to add a new position to the part program to avoid collisions.
Before you can activate the function "start editor at current position" the
simulation in CAT1000P has to be stopped (pause mode).
By clicking this symbol, GEOPAK jumps back to the position just before the
collision. At the same time, the GEOPAK editor is opened.
If you want to continue the simulation close the GEOPAK editor and deactivate
the pause mode.
The simulation is continued from the position that is just before the position where
the editor has been started.
Collision control
When activating the collision control, the simulation is paused upon the first
collision.
12.04.13 v3.5 53
CAT1000S
Collision
In case of a collision during the simulation of a part program, the simulation is
stopped (pause mode).
The corresponding CMM movement is displayed in the colour you have
previously defined for collisions.
Now the GEOPAK editor is opened. You can remedy the causes of the
collision with the editor and then continue with the simulation.
Remove possible errors
The simulation is only possible with the co-ordinate systems provided by
GEOPAK. A wrong alignment leads to a faulty result of the simulation and a faulty
collision control.
During the simulation of an existing part program, you can not learn new
commands with GEOPAK or CAT1000.
For this, refer to the topic Simulation.
7.3.10 Simulation Buttons (CAT1000)

Use the buttons of the toolbar to control the simulation. The same functions can
also be started via the menu bar / view.
Start simulation
A click on the button starts the simulation.
Stop simulation
A click on the button stops the current simulation. The probe shown in the 3D-
view moves to start position.
Pause simulation
A click on the pause button puts the simulation to a pause at the current position.
Another click on the button, and the simulation continues.
Step forward: three options

 If you click this button while the simulation is in a pause, the current
command is shown in the simulation. Then, the simulation is paused
again.
 If you click this button during the simulation, the current command is
shown in the simulation. Then the simulation is put to pause mode.
 If you click this button and the simulation has been stopped, the
next command is shown in the simulation. Then the simulation is
paused.
Continuous simulation
A click on this button restarts the simulation as soon as the simulation has
reached the end position.
54 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Speed
With the drop-down list you can increase or reduce the

speed of the simulation.
Note
The movement path displayed in the simulation consists of the sections of the
individual commands.
Changing Start positions
You can go to the start positions of the commands using

the Minus button, the Plus button and the slider. For that the simulation has to be
put to a pause. You can start the simulation again from the new start position by
deactivating the Pause button.
Also refer to the topic Simulation.
7.3.11 General Graphics Settings

To get to the dialogue "General graphics settings" use the menu "Settings",
"Graphics", "General settings".
Here you can determine general settings that have an influence on the 3D-view.
Input field: Min. size for meas. points display
Enter a size in the unit of the model (millimetre or inch) into the input field.
Input field: Magnify deviation display
This input field is only relevant to CAT1000S.
In most cases the deviations of your measurements are too small to be even
perceptibly displayed in the graphics window.
 Enter a magnification factor.
Input field: % measurement point offset
This input field is only relevant to CAT1000S.
Definition:
The offset is a proportional part of the probe diameter.
The offset points to the probing direction.
 If you define an offset of 0 percent in the input field "%
Measurement point offset ", a measurement point is described as
follows:
 A hemisphere is displayed in the 3D-view. The other half of the
sphere disappears into the work piece.
 If you define a negative offset of minus 50 percent in the input field
"% measurement point offset", a measurement point is represented
as follows:
 The complete sphere is visible and is tangent to the plane of the
work piece.
12.04.13 v3.5 55
CAT1000S
Input field: Magnify co-ordinate system

Enter a magnification factor.
Input field: Width of model lines
Please enter the desired width of the model lines into the input field in pixel.
Button "Type of font"
If you want to change the font for text / numericals in the graphics window,
activate the button "Font". You get to the Windows dialogue "Font".
Example:
When working with the function "Activated model point", the point co-ordinates
and the letters for the co-ordinate axes are represented in the selected font.
Draw refinement
For example, the representation of circles is more exact when choosing the
highest possible resolution. Disadvantage: Due to the higher computation effort,
the sequences slow down.
Graphics driver
Note
If you have not yet installed the DirectX graphics driver on your computer,
you can install it from your MCOSMOS DVD.
The default graphics driver in CAT1000 is the OpenGL driver. From version 3.1
you can also use the DirectX graphics driver.
 Click the "OpenGL rendering driver" option button or
 click the "DirectX rendering driver" option button.
 After you have changed the graphics driver, you have to restart
CAT1000.
7.3.12 Display Clearance Height in Graphics Window (CAT1000)

Background: Task of clearance height
The clearance height in CAT1000S / CAT1000P is used for CMM movements.
For introductions to these topics, please refer to:
Clearance Height
Task of this function
The current clearance height is displayed in the graphics window.
This has the following advantages:
 The graphical representation enables you to define the clearance
height more precisely.
 From the graphical representation you can see immediately and
even before the measurement, if the clearance height is positioned
correctly for your next measurement task.
Start of the function
To activate the graphical representation of the clearance height use the menu
“View”. Click on the function “View clearance height”. Is the box in front of “View
clearance height” ticked, this function is active.
Graphical representation of the clearance height
If you have activated the function, the clearance height is shown in the graphics
window as an additional plane.
The size of the plane depends on the size of the bordering box of the model.
56 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
The plane is transparently represented in the colour that you have defined
(Colour of Clearance Height).
Related topics:
Move Machine
Dialogue "Settings for Moving Machine”
Dialogue "Move Machine"
Move Machine: Background
Colour of Clearance Height
7.3.13 Colour of Clearance Height

Define colour of clearance height
To get to the dialogue "Settings for clearance height" use the menu "Settings” /
“Graphics”.
 To change the colour, click on the colour bar.
 The Windows dialogue “Colour” is opened.
 Click on the desired colour and confirm.
7.4 Main Window

7.4.1 Introduction
The measurement with CAT1000S can be realized in two ways:
 Start GEOPAK and call the surface measurement.
 Start CAT1000S and activate GEOPAK for the real measurement.
In some instances, the procedures are a bit different for the two types of
measurement. We will indicate this wherever applicable.
Getting Started and Further Steps
If you did not yet load a model, you first should do that (see details of "Load
Model ").
You can ...
 View the model and get information about it (see details of "View
and Analyse Model ")
 Select single surfaces and slightly modify the model (see details of
"Extract CAD-Data ")
 Search points on the borders of the model and send these to
GEOPAK for further processing (see details of "Search Border
Points ")
 Create sections through the model (see details of "Presetting for
Definition of Sections").
 Configure your screen (see details of "Screen Configuration ")
 Align the part (see details of "Define Co-ordinate System ")
 Perform the actual comparison with the measured points (see
details "Comparison with Measurement Data ")
 Turn and rotate the points so that the deviations as a whole get
minimised (see details of "Best Fit ")
 Prepare graphical and numerical documentation of the results (see
"Presentation of Results ")
12.04.13 v3.5 57
CAT1000S
 Send the results in standard formats to other systems (see details of

"Output to External Systems ")
 Measure more parts in repeat mode (see details of "Repeat Mode ")
7.4.2 Screen Configuration

CAT1000S offers several possibilities in order to inform you about the existing
data. All information windows are interrelated. This means: All information
windows are always updated simultaneously. For example, a point that you
delete in the main window is immediately removed from the "List of Measurement
Points", and the histograms as well as the information window are also
recalculated without this point.
Usually, the drawing of the model takes most of the screen. Besides this
information there are
 The "List of Measurement Points" containing the numerical values
 A histogram with information window (explanation of the colours)
 the Result Window .
If you have chosen your favourite window arrangement and sizes, you can store
this; then you get the same configuration again when restarting the program. You
store the configuration via the pull-down menu ("Window / Store Window
Positions").
Histogram (Information Window)
The classes of the histogram are labelled in a different way, depending on
whether all measurement points have the same tolerance or not.
If all measurement points have the same tolerance, the classes (limits) are
labelled in millimetres.
If there are measurement points with different tolerances, the classes are labelled
in "Percent", and the points are assigned to these classes depending on the
percentage of the individual tolerance.
List of Measurement Points
In this list, you automatically find all necessary information about the
measurement points. The table is online-updated line by line during the
measurement course.
7.4.3 Toolbar Configuration

In CAT1000S / CAT1000P you can customize each toolbar. Proceed as follows:
 Click with the right mouse button on the relevant toolbar.
 In the subsequent dialogue "Adjust toolbar", you can add or remove
the desired buttons. Furthermore, you can change the sequence of
the shown icons and insert separators.
If you activate the button "Reset", the toolbar is reset to the way it was before
starting the dialogue "Adjust toolbar".
Tip:
You can arrange toolbars with drag-and-drop either horizontally or
vertically.
7.4.4 Window Positions

You can select between two modes of window style, namely the
 normal mode and the
58 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 “Split Screen” mode.

Hint:
In the default, the windows are displayed in the normal mode.
If you activate the "Split Screen" function in the pull-down menu, all
windows are displayed in the "Split Screen" mode.
The "s" accelerator button offers another possibility: You can switch
between the normal mode and the “Split Screen” mode.
You get the functions via the menu bar and “Window". The store, load and default
functions are valid for the normal mode as well as for the “Split Screen” mode.
"Split Screen" mode.
By the "Split Screen" function, it is possible to display at the same time e.g.
windows of CAT1000S and GEOPAK or CAT1000P and GEOPAK on your
screen.
Camera Position of the other Mode
In CAT1000S, you dispose of the additional "Camera Position of the other Mode"
function. This function offers the possibility to transfer the stored display
parameters (e.g.: angle (after rotation of the model), zoom factor and display
positions of the CAD model on the screen) between the “Split Screen” mode and
the normal mode.
Storage
You can store those window positions you have selected at last according to your
ideas. At restart, you will get these positions again.
Restore
Via this function, you can restore the status of your last defaults you have stored.
Default
Under "Default Window Positions", you will find a configuration that Mitutoyo
considered to be useful. Wherever your window positions may be, via this
function you return into a home position, with which you can, in each case,
continue your work.
7.4.5 Create a New Part

Change to the PartManager. There, you proceed as described in Create a New
Part in the PartManager documentation.
7.4.6 New Model

To get to the function "New model", go to the menu "File" in CAT1000S.
Task
With this function, an empty template is opened. Afterwards you can, for
example, import a new model.
7.4.7 Open Model

To get to the function "Open model", go to the menu "File" in CAT1000S.
Task
When you open a model, you can only view but not measure this model.
7.4.8 Clear Model

To get to the function "Clear model", go to the menu "File" in CAT1000S.
12.04.13 v3.5 59
CAT1000S
Example:
 You are working with a CAD model in CAT1000S. You have, for
example, already saved several views of the model.
 You want to load a new, current model. The new model hardly
differs from the old model.
 Use the function "Clear model". Then import the updated model.
The new model is loaded in the same part.
If you have deleted the old model, you should not close CAT1000S. If you
close CAT1000S before you have loaded the new model, all CAT1000S
files for this part are deleted.
7.4.9 Load Model

7.4.9.1 Load Model: Prerequisite
Prerequisite
The program CAT1000S creates tolerance comparisons between 3D-surfaces
and measurement points.
For the import of CAD-files, interfaces are used.
CAT1000S and CAT1000P work with CAD-files (planes and complete models).
These CAD-files must have been created with a CAD-system. CAT1000S /
CAT1000P supports the following formats:
 IGES
 CATIA V4
 CATIA V5
 CATIA V5 RepairConverter
 Parasolid
 Pro/E
 STEP
 VDAFS
 Unigraphics
 SolidWorks
Read the topic
Dialogue "Load Model".
7.4.9.2 Dialogue "Load model"

Start
To get to the dialogue “Load modal” use the menu “File” / “Import single model”
or “Import multiple model”.
60 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
For using a feature file, read the help topics for the topic "WEPROM". Start with
the topic "Import of CAD-Files with Feature File: Introduction". CAT1000S /
CAT1000P requires planes. Are there no planes, no model is displayed. Although
some CAD-systems display all kinds of lines, those are not sufficient for a spacial
comparison. The lines must be connected with the planes. In case that the plane
to be measured does not fully correspond to the specimen, CAT1000S /
CAT1000P offers a variety of options to adjust the default values according to the
specimen.
7.4.9.2.1 Options in the Dialogue "Load CAD-Model"

Mirror
 You can mirror the model using the symbols , and

for "No mirroring". These options are important for the
automotive industry. The engineering data are, e.g. for a wing, only
drawn up once, e.g. for the right wing. However, both the right and
the left wing must be measured.
Settings
 The following paragraph is only relevant to CAT1000S (topic: sheet
thickness, see below).
 For sheet panel parts you can enter a "sheet thickness". For panel
sheets sometimes only the form of the "underside" is given, but
probing is only possible on the "upside". In this case you enter the
sheet thickness which is then compensated for in the course of the
tolerance comparisons.
Furthermore it is possible
 that although the upside of a sheet panel part is defined by the CAD
data,
 the press tool of the underside must be measured.
 In this case you enter the sheet thickness and
 click on the appropriate checkmark button.
 This appears as though you had entered a (not permitted) negative
sheet thickness.
 You can assign the characteristic "Fixture" to the complete CAD-
Model. For this, refer to the topic "Fixtures: Introduction".
Automatic monitoring
Upon each restart, CAT1000S / CAT1000P checks if the latest CAD data of the
work piece to be measured are installed. If not, an alert message appears
• that the data have changed and
• a message to load the changed data to avoid mistakes.
For more information about this topic, please refer to "Load Model: Steps".
12.04.13 v3.5 61
CAT1000S
7.4.9.3 Load Model: Steps

Three possibilities
There are three possibilities to load a model.
 Via the menu "File" / function "Open model”.
Please note:
You can use the function “Open model” only for viewing the model.
If you want to work with the model, you need to import it (see
below).
 Via the menu "File" / function "Import single model".
 Via the menu "File" / function "Import multiple model".
Import single model
In the dialogue window "Import single model", use the button to select the
required model from a directory.
 The list box "CAD format" shows the file format of the selected CAD
model.
 However, it is possible that the file extension has been defined by
the user.
 In this case, use the list box to assign the required CAD file format
to the CAD file.
 The list box only displays those CAD file formats that are released
by the dongle.
In the dialogue windows "Import single model” and “Import multiple model” you
find the button “Import settings”.
Activate the button “Import settings” in order to determine the settings of the
translator of the selected file type in the following dialogue.
For more information about this topic, please refer to "Load Model: Import
Settings".
7.4.9.4 Load Model: Import Settings

You are led to the dialogue "Import settings"
 via the menu “File” / “Import single model” or respectively “Import
multiple model” or
 via the menu “Settings” / “CAD files” / “ Settings for ...”.
Depending on the selected file type you are led to one of the following dialogues:
Settings for IGES Import
Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter
Settings for Parasolid Import
Settings for Pro/E Import
Settings for STEP Import
Settings for VDAFS Import
Settings for Unigraphics Import
Settings for SolidWorks Import
For further information about this topic, please refer to "Settings for CAD-Files".
62 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
7.4.10 View and Analyse Model

Model View
Once the model has been

loaded, you can view it from all sides. In the icon bars and toolbars, CAT1000S
offers a series of functions (see picture above) with which you can e.g.
 view the model in the different co-ordinate planes and
 rotate it around the single axes.
It is possible to view the model in three different ways
 Shading
 Edges (polygon drafts)
 Wire-frame
See further details of topic "Windows and Measurement Points".
7.4.11 Windows and Measurement Points

Any time you want, it is possible to open an additional window via the "Window /
New Window" pull-down menu. In any case, you can zoom or rotate in the
windows independently from the others.
If new data (e.g. measurement points) are added, all open windows are
automatically updated.
 The following section is only of relevance for CAT1000S (Topic:
Size of spheres).
 Measurement points are drawn as small spheres. If you want to
change the size of these represented spheres, you select in the
"Settings" pull-down menu the "Graphics / General Settings"
functions. There, you can determine the size of the spheres in mm.
By means of the icons (beginning on the left side)

you can
 shift the model,
 rotate,
 realize a dynamic zoom,
 realize a zoom by pulling a rectangle over the desired section and
 realize an animation (3D graphic). Stop the animation effect by
clicking on any other function.
7.4.12 Colour Settings

You can individually define colours, e.g. for surfaces, edges, vertices, cross-
sections or CAT1000P-elements.
Proceed as follows:
 To get to the dialogue window "Determine the colour of the model ",
use the menu bar / Settings / Graphics / Model colours.
 In the dialogue window "Determine the colour of the model ", click
on one of these options
• Surfaces
• Edges
• Vertices
12.04.13 v3.5 63
CAT1000S
• Sections
• Background
• CAT1000P-elements
• Fixtures
• Highlight or
• Selection
 In the following window "Colours" proceed according to the
Windows conventions and confirm.
7.4.13 Zoom
In the 3D-view you can

 shift or
 turn the CAD-model,
 dynamic zoom,
 zoom a detail,
 or view an animation.
Proceed as follows:
Method 1
Like in common CAD-programs, you can apply these functions using the mouse
keys and the control key.
The mouse keys are operated as follows:
Zoom
 Keep the left mouse key and the Ctrl-keysimultaneously

activated.
 Move the mouse upwards to enlarge the model.
 Move the mouse downwards to reduce the model.
Turn
 Keep the right mouse key and the Ctrl-key

simultaneously activated.
 Move the mouse to turn the model.
Shift
 Keep the right and the left mouse key and the Ctrl-
keysimultaneously activated.
 Move the mouse to shift the model.
Method 2
 Click on one of the symbols.

 The mouse pointer is shown accordingly.
64 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 Click in 3D-view into the model and move the mouse while clicking
the left mouse key.
Zoom
You can zoom in on your model whenever the mouse pointer is displayed
as a "magnifying pointer". Then, the mouse pointer is displayed as a magnifying
pointer.
 Move the "Magnifying Pointer" to one corner point of the area you
want to zoom.
 Keep the left mouse button pressed and open a rectangle around
the area.
 As soon as you release the mouse button, the area is displayed
filling the whole model window.
 You can repeat this – even in the zoomed area – several times.
 To return to the initial state, click in the menu bar on "View / Zoom
All".
Dynamic Zoom
With this icon, you can realize a dynamic zoom. Click with the left
mouse button (magnifying glass with vertical outline pointer) on the graphics. By
using the elevator up/down, you increase/reduce your model.
Rotation and Shift
With the rotation, shift and animation functions (beginning

from the left), you proceed in a similar fashion.
7.4.14 "Zoom All" and "Zoom Model"

To start the functions "Zoom all" and "Zoom model" use the menu bar / view.
Zoom all
When activating "Zoom all" all graphic information that can be displayed in 3D-
view are shown in the 3D-view.
Therefore, the following components are zoomed, e.g.:
 CAT1000P-elements
 machine position
 measurement points
 CAD-model
Zoom model
If you activate "Zoom model", the complete CAD-model is shown in 3D-view.
7.4.15 Rotate View
If you want to measure a part with CAT1000S, you can see the part in
the CAT1000S main window in a centered position; the Z-axis is upright to the
screen.
12.04.13 v3.5 65
CAT1000S
Normally, you would like to display your part on the screen in the same angle of
view it is positioned on the CMM. That means, you must rotate the part around
one or several axes. You can do that ...
 ...e.g. with the X, Y and Z keys on your keyboard (with the shift
button, you rotate in the opposite direction) or …
 with the icons (here an example for "Rotate +Z"). If you

point your mouse cursor on one of the symbols, the balloon shows
which rotation function you have activated (we explain projections
later).
 Furthermore, you have the possibility to rotate the model with the
arrow keys and the PgUp key respectively the PgDn key. Rotation is
realised around the axes of the current view.
7.4.16 Commands Window

7.4.16.1 Commands Window: Introduction
With the commands window the program provides you with an instrument to have
all commands displayed. These include, for example, the following commands:
 Element begin
 Element end
 Single measurement points
 Commands for CMM movement
 Clearance height
 Commands for the automatic element measurement
To get to this window use the Tool bar / Window / Commands window.
In the Title line of the commands window you see the name of the part you are
currently processing.
Below this line you find the three buttons "Stop", "Continue" and "Delete".
In the View you see the commands in a tree structure.
Overview
You can control,
 which commands / elements have already been transferred to
GEOPAK and have already been measured.
The list displays these completed commands in bold;
 which commands / elements are still in the buffer (normal fond) and
which commands still need to be worked off;
 which command in the list is currently being processed.
The window "Commands window" does not replace the result field in
GEOPAK with its detailed information.
66 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Commands Window and Buffer

The commands window is linked with a buffer. In this buffer, all data are stored
that are displayed in the commands window.
 Thanks to the buffer you will, in case of a collision, not loose all the
data that were previously sent by CAT1000S / CAT1000P to
GEOPAK.
For how to avoid collisions, refer to "Collision Control in CAT1000S /
CAT1000P".
 Furthermore, this buffer ensures that you do not loose data from the
GEOPAK buffer.
 The buffer simplifies working with the program. You need not wait
until a measurement of an element or a point is completed, before
you can start the next measurement.
For further information about this topic, refer to
Commands Window: Delete Commands Application Example for the Commands
Window
Working with the Commands Window
7.4.16.2 Working with the Commands Window

In case of an error, the "Commands window" automatically appears on your
screen. This enables you to proceed with your work.
7.4.16.2.1 Commands in the Buffer

All commands are temporarily saved in a buffer. These include, for example, the
following commands:
 Element begin
 Element end
 Single measurement points
 Commands for CMM movement
 Clearance height
 Commands for the automatic element measurement
An element is only displayed in the 3D-view after its successful completion.
7.4.16.2.2 Program Run Stopped

 In case of an error during performance of a command that was
created with CAT1000, GEOPAK is stopped. The "Commands
Window" appears.
 The stop button in the "Commands window" is active.

CAT1000S / CAT1000P is in the "Pause mode". The working off of
the commands in the buffer is stopped.
 The corresponding GEOPAK error message is displayed.
 After you have confirmed the GEOPAK error message, CAT1000 is
displayed in the foreground, and the "Commands window" is active.
7.4.16.2.3 Continue Program Run

Now you can define in the "Commands window" in CAT1000 how to proceed with
the part program. You have two options:
12.04.13 v3.5 67
CAT1000S
Continue
When the program is in the pause mode and you are learning further
commands, you are asked whether you want to end the pause mode.
Activate the button "Continue" only after you have remedied the error.
For this, also refer to the topic "Application Example for the Commands Window".
You can, for example, remove the error by defining an intermediate position in
GEOPAK or by deleting a command in the commands window.
Delete
 You can delete all commands that have not yet been learnt in
the GEOPAK part program. For this, highlight the relevant
commands in the "Commands window" and click on the button
"Delete".
 You can also delete the last command executed. Proceed as
described above.
 In case that a command was not learnt with CAT1000 you can not
delete this command in CAT1000.
When commands are stored in GEOPAK that stand after the
last command of CAT1000, these commands are also deleted when
you delete the last command in CAT1000.
 After deleting, you activate the button "Continue".

For more information about this topic, refer to
Commands Window (Introduction)
Application Example for the Commands Window
7.4.16.3 Application Example for the Commands Window

Task: Measurement of an element point on a freeform surface
 You want to measure a point of a freeform surface.
 When moving the machine a collision with a work piece fastener
occurs.
 The "Commands window" is displayed.
 An error message in GEOPAK appears. GEOPAK is blocked.
 You confirm the error message.
 GEOPAK is no longer blocked.
First option
 You define an intermediate position in GEOPAK.
 You activate the button "Continue" in the "Commands

window".
 Thus, the last measurement point at which the collision occurred
before, is measured again. This time, the CMM moves via the
intermediate position.
68 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
For this example: You must define the intermediate position in GEOPAK.
You can not define the intermediate position in CAT1000S / CAT1000P,
because the program is in the pause mode. The command would be
attached to the end of the list.
Second option
When the CMM can not reach a probed measurement point, you have a further
option:
 Delete the current measurement point from the commands window.
 Activate the button "Continue" in the "Commands window"

and continue with the measurement of the next measurement point.
For further information about this topic, refer to
Delete Commands
7.4.16.4 Commands Window: Delete Commands

With the option "Reset communication" you can delete all commands in the
commands window in CAT1000PS in the event of a collision or during
programming.
Function call
The "Reset communication" command can be selected from the "Settings" menu.
Example: Deletion during programming
 Condition: The "Stop" button in the commands window is

clicked. The option "Reset communication" can be selected.
 In CAT1000PS you can execute and correct any command. The
commands are not immediately transferred to GEOPAK. Thereby,
your part program commands in CAT1000 are not completed.
 The 3D view always shows the position most recently learned in
CAT1000.
 On the "Settings" menu, click "Reset communication".
 All commands in the commands window are deleted.
 The communication with GEOPAK is reset. The commands that
already exist in GEOPAK are preserved in CAT1000PS.
CAT1000PS takes the GEOPAK machine position.
 When you have created commands, click "Continue" if you

want to transfer these commands to GEOPAK.
Example: Reset in the event of a collision

12.04.13 v3.5 69
CAT1000S
 In the event of a collision the "Commands window" appears

automatically. The command responsible for the collision is
highlighted in the commands window.
 On the "Settings" menu, click "Reset communication".
 All commands in the commands window are deleted. The last open
element that has already been transferred to GEOPAK is still
displayed.
 The communication with GEOPAK is reset. The commands that
already exist in GEOPAK are preserved in CAT1000PS.
CAT1000PS takes the GEOPAK machine position.
Example: Intermediate position in the event of a collision

 In the event of a collision the "Commands window" appears
automatically. The command responsible for the collision is
highlighted in the commands window.
 You can determine an intermediate position in GEOPAK to avoid
the collision.
 In this case the communication with GEOPAK need not be reset.
The available commands need not be deleted.
 Click "Continue".
 Moving is continued and the remaining commands in the commands
window are executed.
See also
Application Example for the Commands Window
7.5 Prepare Measurement

7.5.1 Fixtures
7.5.1.1 Fixtures: Introduction
Situation
It is often difficult to measure certain parts of a workpiece when a workpiece
fixture obstructs the probing path. A collision of the probe with the fixture may
occur.
You can, however, solve this problem, when the data for all parts of a fixture are
available in a CAD-file.
You can assign the characteristic "Fixture (only for collision control)" to the
fixture.
After assigning this characteristic, the workpiece and the fixture/fixture parts can
be loaded separately.
You can define that the CAD-file with the attribute "Fixture" is not measured.
70 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Task of the function

 The attribute "fixture" of a CAD-model or of a part of a CAD-model is
used for the collision control.
 The fixture shall not be used for the measurement and
evaluation/calculation in CAT1000S.
 At your option, you can either hide or show the fixtures or parts of
fixtures in the 3D-view. This option facilitates an optimised
representation of your measurement results for the output.
Definition
In this context, "fixture" means the fixing device of the workpiece to be
measured. This holding device shall notbe used for measurement and
calculation.
Prerequisites
 If the fixture is available as a CAD-model, you can assign the
attribute "fixture".
• The CAD-model of the fixture may be available in a separate
CAD-file.
• The CAD-model of the fixture and the CAD-model of the
workpiece may be available in the same CAD-file.
 The alignment of the CAD-model must correspond to the alignment
of the fixture.
Related topics
Complete CAD-Model is Fixture
Single Import of CAD-Model
Part of Model is Fixture
Reset Fixture Status
The settings for the 3D-view are described in the following topics.
Fixtures in 3D-View
Define Colours for Model
7.5.1.2 Complete CAD-Model is Fixture

Fixture in a separate CAD-file
If the CAD-model of the fixture is available in a separate CAD-file, proceed as
follows:
 In the dialogue "Single import of CAD-model", you activate the
check box "Fixture". To get to the dialogue "Single import of CAD-
model", use the menu bar / File / Import single model.
 This way, the complete CAD-model has the attribute "fixture".
 Result: This CAD-model is not used for measurement and
calculation.
Related topics
Fixtures: Introduction
Part of a Model is Fixture
The settings for the 3D-view are described in the following topics:
12.04.13 v3.5 71
CAT1000S
Fixtures in 3D-View
7.5.1.3 Part of a Model is Fixture

Fixture and workpiece in a CAD-file
If the CAD-model of the fixture and the CAD-model of the workpiece are available
in the same CAD-file, proceed as follows:
 Click with the picking tool on the fixture in the 3D-view.
 Then define the activated surfaces as "fixture".
Proceed as follows
Activate the picking tool "surface" or "edge"
 either via the symbols

 or via the menu bar / Tools / "Pick surfaces" or "Pick edges".
Below, the working steps for the picking tool "Surface" are described. The
working steps for the picking tool "Edge" are the same.
 Click on the picking tool "Surface".
 Click the surface of the CAD-model in 3D-view to which you want to
assign the attribute "Fixture".
 In the pop-up menu (right mouse button), activate the entry "Info
picked surface(s).
 You get to the dialogue "Picked elements". In the list (left hand side
of the dialogue), the picked surface is selected.
 Then activate the button "Fixture element". This way, the

surface has the attribute "Fixture".
Result: The picked surface of the CAD-model is not used for measurement and
calculation.
Hint:
You can also click several surfaces with the picking tool. Then assign the
attribute "Fixture" to multiple surfaces in the dialogue "Picked elements".
Related topics
Fixtures in 3D-View
7.5.1.4 Reset Fixture Status

Before a reset is possible, you first have to assign the attribute "Fixture" to
surfaces or edges.
72 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
If you want to reset the status "Fixture" for surfaces or edges, proceed as
follows:
 Go to the menu bar / Mark and select the entry "Reset fixture
status".
 You get to the dialogue "Reset fixture status".
If you have previously assigned the attribute "Fixture" to surfaces and edges, the
buttons "Fixture surfaces" and "Fixture edges" are visible.
Upon the start of thedialogue, the list displays all fixture

elements. The buttons "Fixture surfaces" and "Fixture edges" are represented as
active.
When clicking and therefore deactivating the button "Fixture surfaces",

the list will only show the edges with the attribute "Fixture".
When clicking and therefore deactivating the button "Fixture edges", the
list will only show the surfaces with the attribute "Fixture".
Use the buttons "Fixture surfaces" and "Fixture edges" to sort

the list of fixture elements. You can not use these two buttons to change
the actual status of the fixture elements.
Use the buttons in the lower part of the dialogue "Reset fixture status" to change
the actual status of the fixture elements. Proceed as follows:
 With a click on the button "All", all fixture elements are reset. In this
case it is irrelevant which fixture elements you have marked in the
list.
 With a click on the button "OK", only the fixture elements you have
marked in the list are reset.
 With a click on the button "Reverse", all

fixture elements are set to the new status "normal". All elements
(surfaces and edges) in the CAD-model that previously had the
status "normal", are now reversed to the status "Fixture".
Related topics
Fixtures in 3D-View
7.5.1.5 Fixtures in 3D-View

Hide or show
Use the menu bar / View / Fixture to hide or show the fixture in the 3D-view.
Example:
12.04.13 v3.5 73
CAT1000S
For a printout of a result, you can hide the fixture for the purpose of clarity.
Colour for fixture
To get to the dialogue "Colour settings", use the menu bar / Settings / Graphic /
Colour for model. Click the button "Fixtures" to define a certain colour for the
fixture.
Related topics
The settings for the 3D-view are described in the following topic:
7.5.2 Pick Surfaces

The CAD-model you can see on the screen contains all nominal data. Each entry
via the keyboard becomes superfluous. You only work with the mouse.
Usually, you first would like to become familiar with the part and its data.
You must choose the way via the menu bar with the "Measurement /
Single Mode" functions. Thus, the two programs can communicate. Don’t
try to start GEOPAK via the PartManager. No communication will be
possible.
Proceed as follows
 Click the icon "Pick surfaces (with mouse)".
 The mouse cursor changes to an arrow with binoculars.

 Move the mouse cursor near the surface you want to mark, and
press the left mouse button.
 The picked surface is identified with a colour. The respective colours
are defined in the dialogue "Colour for model ". Also refer to the
topic "Define Model Colours".
 You get to the dialogue "Picked Elements from the pop-up menu
(with right-hand mouse button on the surface and the function "Info
picked surface(s)").
• The surfaces are listed in the left text box, namely each time
with the name of the CAD model.
• In the text box (top right) you can enter your own "meaningful"
name for the surface.
7.5.3 Layer, Body and CAD-File

7.5.3.1 Task
Read in the topic "Pick Surfaces" for information about how to select and edit
surfaces of the CAD-model in the 3D-view.
74 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
In the same way you can also simultaneously select and edit multiple surfaces.
These surfaces must be components of a CAD model structure. The following
CAD model structures are available:
 layer
 body and
 complete CAD file
7.5.3.2 Proceed as follows

Activate a picking tool for surfaces. CAT1000S offers four picking tools for
surfaces:
 Pick surfaces
 Pick layers
 Pick bodies
 Pick CAD file
To select the picking tool go to the menu bar / tools or to the toolbar.
Following the installation of CAT1000S and / or CAT1000P, the

buttons "Pick layers", "Pick bodies" and "Pick CAD file" are not shown. To
customize the toolbar, proceed as follows:
 Click with the right mouse button on the toolbar "Picking tools".
 In the subsequent dialogue "Adjust toolbar" you can add the desired
buttons.
After you have activated the picking tool, proceed as follows:
 The mouse pointer turns into an arrow with binoculars.

 Move the mouse pointer in the 3D-view and click the left mouse
button.
 The surface, the layer, the body or the CAD-file are identified with a
colour. To define the colours, use the dialogue "Colour settings" and
read the topic "Define Colours for Model".
7.5.3.3 Dialogue "Picked Elements"

You get to the dialogue "Picked elements" via the pop-up menu (click with the
right mouse button on the surface and the function "Info picked surface(s)").
Read the help topic Dialogue "Picked Elements"
7.5.4 Change entity attributes

 All entities that you have previously selected by clicking on the
CAD-model are listed in the left text box together with the
corresponding name from the CAD-model.
 You can select the desired entities from the list.
 In the text box to the top right you can enter your own "meaningful"
name for the entity. By activating the button "Store name", the name
is stored.
Options in the dialogue
In the dialogue "Picked entities" you assign a certain status to the entities by
clicking the respective button:
12.04.13 v3.5 75
CAT1000S
You can deactivate the selected entities. Example: Some of the entities
(surfaces or edges) shall not be used for measurement.
You can assign the status "Fixture entity" to the picked entities. For this, read
the topic "Fixtures: Introduction".
You can completely hide the picked entities. Example: Some surfaces
shall not be shown in a printout.
Use this button to set the status to normal.
7.5.5 Element Point

7.5.5.1 Element Point (CAT1000)
Opening the dialogue box
On the "Measure" menu, click "Point" to open the "Element Point" dialogue box.
Or click the button on the toolbar.

Task
CAT1000P When working with CAT1000P only: Aim of the dialogue: You create
a part program command for measuring the element point.
CAT1000S
When working with CAT1000S, you can use the "Element point" dialogue box to
create theoretical points. If you want to measure surfaces, use the CAT1000S
function "Element surface" (menu "Measure"). See also "Freeform Surface
Measurement".
Point measurement with head touch
During point measurement with head touch you can measure a measurement
point simply by moving the probe head in two axes. The CMM itself does not
move.
The "Head touch" tab is only displayed if a probe head suitable for head
touch is selected in the MachineBuilder (for example a PH20).
PH20 and REVO require an I++ server. Consequently the settings for the
probe head, such as head speed and head acceleration are set in the "Set
I++ properties" dialogue box in GEOPAK.
 Click the "Head touch" button.

 The "Head touch" tab is appears.
 Click the "CMM in target position" button and the probe is

displayed at the position after the measurement.
 Click the "Read actual angles" button if the current stylus angle
is not known.
Note
The stylus direction is the direction between the angle of the probe head
from head to tip and the co-ordinate system. The co-ordinate system can
either be the current part co-ordinate system or the machine co-ordinate
system.
76 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 To determine the probing direction, type a value in the "X,Y,Z" text

boxes.
 If you want to measure from the opposite direction, click the

"Change direction vector" button.
Working steps in the "Element Point" dialogue box
Note
When working with CAT1000P only, the functions to measure and tolerate
are not available.
We suggest that you proceed as follows in the "Element point" dialogue box:
 From the list box in the first line of the dialogue box, select "Surface
points", "Edge points", "Section points" or "Vertices".
 Select one of the four options by clicking the button.
• Measure element point
• Theoretical element point
• Measure and tolerate (position tolerance)
• Tolerance of distance
 Click in the CAD model in 3D view to define the point.
 The point co-ordinates appear in the X, Y and Z text boxes. The
probing direction is also displayed.
Note
The options "Measure and tolerate" and "Tolerance of distance" are only
relevant for CAT1000S.
Measure element point You create a part program command to measure the
element point.
Theoretical element point
Type the position of the element point using the keyboard or click in the 3D-view.
In this case, the element point is not created by a measurement.
Measure and tolerate When selecting this option, type a position tolerance in the
"Tolerance" text box. This value is transferred from CAT1000S to GEOPAK. Click
in the CAD-model in 3D view. Two GEOPAK commands are created with a
mouse click.
 The selected point is measured and
 tolerated.
Tolerance of distance For more information, see "Tolerance of Distance". For
information about further options in the "Element point" dialogue box, see
"Element Point: Further Options".
7.5.5.2 Element Point: Further Options

Further Options in the Dialogue "Element Point"
Recalculate Point
Also refer to the topic "Calculate".
Loop counter Is the memory number incremented by 1, the loop counter is
adjusted accordingly.
12.04.13 v3.5 77
CAT1000S
A requirement is that you are in a loop in GEOPAK. Otherwise the function

will be deactivated. This function is not possible when using the function
"Tolerance of distance".
Instant measurement
The activated points are immediately measured and transferred to GEOPAK.
The dialogue window remains open.
The OK-button is deactivated.
Example: If you want to measure many points, select this option. It is not
necessary to confirm each point with "OK".
Dialogue will restart after finish for a new element

If you want to measure many points, we recommend this option. In this case you
only confirm for each measured point with the OK-button. It is not necessary to
restart the dialogue for each new point.
Change probing direction

For this, refer to the topic "Change Probing Direction".
Below in the dialogue you can define an offset under "Sheet thickness".
Refer to the topics
"Dialogue "Element Point" and Sheet Thickness" and
"Offset and Sheet Thickness".
7.5.5.3 Element Point and Sheet Thickness

If you enter a value for sheet thickness (offset) in the dialogue "Element point",
this sheet thickness is used for the
• theoretical point or for the
• measurement point / probing point or for
• measurement and tolerating or for the
• distance along probing direction.
Apart from the three input fields of the co-ordinates, the dialogue shows three
further input fields. These additional fields contain the co-ordinates with the
offset.
Theoretical Point
 Enter an offset.
 The co-ordinates of the theoretical point (for positive values) are
moved in opposite direction to the normal line of the surface.
Aim:
You create a theoretical point on the surface not defined in the CAD-model.
Measurement Point / Probing Point
 Enter an offset.
78 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 The co-ordinates of the probing point are moved in opposite

direction of the probing direction. For example, the probing in Z is at
a higher level.
Aim: You enter this offset to avoid a collision. Measuring and Tolerating /
Distance along Probing Direction The co-ordinates of the theoretical point and of
the probing point are moved in opposite direction to the probing direction.
Consequence: The result always refers to the surface actually measured. For
this, also refer to the topic "Offset: Examples"
7.5.5.4 Offset and Sheet Thickness

Surface Measurement and Sheet Thickness
Situation
You are working with a "sheet model". This CAD-model is not a volume model.
In this case, you can use the function "Sheet thickness" in the dialogue
"Measurement mode".
Background:
A "Sheet model" is a CAD-model of a sheet part for which the sheet thickness
has not been taken into account.
As opposed to this, a volume model is a solid body.
1 = Upper side (not defined in the CAD-model)

2 = Lower side (defined in the CAD-model)
3 = Measurement point / probing point
4 = Nominal point on the CAD-model
5 = Sheet thickness
The sheet thickness in the dialogue "Measurement mode" is included in the
calculation.
Therefore, the result of the calculation always refers to the side given in the CAD-
model.
The sheet thickness in the dialogue "Measurement mode" does not change the
probing points.
After having confirmed the dialogue "Measurement mode", you can
 either take on points with the joystick,
 or define measurement points in the dialogue "Picked model points".
These are then measured in CNC-mode.
12.04.13 v3.5 79
CAT1000S
When working with models with high sheet thicknesses and small safety
distances, a risk of collisions exists. To avoid the collision, use the option "Offset"
in the dialogue "Picked model point". In the dialogue "Picked model points" you
also have the possibility to enter the offset for the probing points, because the
sheet thickness that you have entered in the dialogue "Measurement mode" does
not change the probing points.
For the offset value, the program suggests the sheet thickness you have
previously entered in the dialogue "Measurement mode".
For more information, refer to the topic "Offset: Examples".
For more information, also refer to the topic "Dialogue "Element Point" and
"Sheet Thickness"".
7.5.5.5 Offset: Examples

Surface Measurement
Offset in the Dialogue "Measurement Mode"
You have entered the value 10 millimetres in the input field "Offset".
You have measured a surface point.
You get the following result after the tolerance comparison:
Nominal values: X= 60.000; Y= 25.000; Z= 25.000
Actual values: X= 60.100; Y= 25.000; Z= 25.000
Deviation: X= 0.100; Y= 0.000; Z= 0.000
Offset in the Dialogue "Picked Model Point" You have not entered an offset in the
dialogue "Measurement mode". In the dialogue "Picked model point" you have
entered the value 10 millimetres in the input field "Offset". You have measured a
surface point. You get the following result after the tolerance comparison:
Nominal values: X= 70.000; Y= 25.000; Z= 25.000 Actual values: X= 70.100; Y=
25.000; Z= 25.000 Deviation: X= 0.100; Y= 0.000; Z= 0.000 In this case, the
tolerance comparison leaves out the offset.
Offset in the Dialogue "Element Point"
You have entered the sheet thickness 10 millimetres in the input field "Offset".
After the tolerance of the distance along the probing direction or after the position
tolerance, you get the following result:
Nominal values: X= 70.000; Y= 25.000; Z= 25.000
Actual values: X= 70.100; Y = 25.000; Z = 25.000
Deviation: X= 0.100; Y = 0.000; Z = 0.000
Unlike for the surface measurement it is not possible here to refer the result to
the surface contained in the CAD-model.
80 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
1 = Upper side (not defined in the CAD-model)

2 = Lower side (defined in the CAD-model)
3 = Measurement point / probing point
4 = Nominal point on the CAD-model
5 = Sheet thickness = 10 millimetres
7.5.6 Surface Point with Pre-Probing

7.5.6.1 Surface Point with Pre-Probing: General Settings
Measurement errors may occur if there are considerable differences between the
CAD model and the surface of the workpiece to be measured. The reason
therefore is the use of the theoretical direction vector of the CAD model for the
probing direction.
When using the "Surface point with pre-probing" function it is possible to measure
a plane at first. Measurement of the plane is always done with three pre-probing
points. The theoretical point is projected on the measured surface. That way the
position for probing the surface point to be measured is calculated. The probing
direction is generated by the surface normale of the measured plane.
Note
This function is mainly helpful for the alignment of the workpiece. For
more detailed information refer to "Alignment wizard: Introduction"
Calling the function
 In CAT1000PS click this icon.

 Or choose "Measure/Surface point with pre-probing..." from the
menu bar.
 The "Surface point with pre-probing" dialogue box appears.
12.04.13 v3.5 81
CAT1000S
"Surface point with pre-probing" dialogue box

Input of parameters for surface point
In the "Element point" group box enter the parameters for the surface point to be
measured.
 In the CAD model click the position at which the point is to be
measured.
 The "X", "Y" and "Z" text boxes show the position for probing the
point. You can change these values.
 In the "Name" text box a name for the surface point is
recommended to you. You can also enter an individual name.
Do not use a memory number that is already used in GEOPAK. Otherwise

the previous element is overwritten.
 In the "Memory" text box the next free memory number is

recommended to you. You can change this number.
Note
The theoretical point (calculated position for probing the point) does not
get a separate memory number.
Input of parameters for plane
In the "Element plane" group box enter the parameters for the plane to be
measured.
 In the "Name" text box a name for the plane is recommended to
you. You can also enter an individual name.
82 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Do not use a memory number that is already used in GEOPAK. Otherwise

the previous element is overwritten.
 In the "Memory" text box the next available memory number is

recommended to you. You can change this number.
 In the "Diameter" text box you change the diameter of the circle on
which the three measurement points for the plane are positioned.
 Click "OK" to confirm and the plane and the point are measured and
the results are transferred to GEOPAK.
 After measurement the element plane and the element point
including name and memory number appear in the list of measured
elements in GEOPAK.
Further options
For more detailed information about further individual settings in the "Surface
point with pre-probing" dialogue box refer to "Surface point with pre-probing:
Further options".
Related topics
Element point: Introduction
Measurement of surface point
7.5.6.2 Surface Point with Pre-Probing: Further Options

In the "Surface point with pre-probing" dialogue box you can make further
individual settings.
Calculate
For more detailed information refer to "Calculate".
Loop counter When activating the loop counter the memory number is
automatically increased (by increments).
Condition is that the program is in a loop in GEOPAK. Otherwise the function is

deactivated.
Reset dialogue values

If you want to delete the values entered into the dialogue box click the "Reset
dialogue values" button.
Dialog will restart after finish for a new element

When measuring several points this option is recommended. Click "OK" to
confirm each time and the dialogue box will automatically appear for each new
point.

For more detailed information refer to "Change probing direction".
12.04.13 v3.5 83
CAT1000S
7.5.7 Tolerance of Distance

7.5.7.1 Tolerance of Distance: Task
Definition: The tolerance of distance in CAT1000S is always a "Tolerance

of distance along the probing direction". Also refer to the topic "
Tolerance of Distance along Probing Direction: Background".
Task of the Function

You use the function "Tolerance of distance" when you wish to measure and
tolerate a point on a surface and if the nominal point shall not be changed with
the measurement.
Example:
The measuring technician has the task to measure and tolerate certain points.
These points to be checked are identified exactly by means of the co-ordinates.
This task can now be perfectly performed by using the function "Tolerance of
distance".
In this case, the following applies:
The "Theoretical points" are points that the measuring technician must measure
according to his given task.
Related Topics:
Differences: Tolerance of Distance and Surface Measurement
Tolerance of Distance: Further Differences
Element Point
Best Fit after Tolerance of Distance
Tolerance of Distance: Tolerate
Tolerance of Distance: Steps
Further Tolerance Options
Tolerance of Distance: Output
7.5.7.2 Tolerance of Distance and Surface Measurement

Tolerance of Distance
Select the function "Tolerance of distance" in the dialogue "Element Point".
Also refer to the topic "Element Point".
By clicking into the 3D-view, you define a measurement point / probing point and
a "Theoretical point".
The nominal point does not change when you measure and tolerate a point with
the function "Tolerance of distance".
The nominal point is always the theoretical point.
The tolerance comparison tolerates theoretical point and probing point.
Surface Measurement
Refer to the topic "Freeform Surface Measurement".
Define a measurement point / probing point by clicking into the 3D-view.
84 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
The nominal point may change when measuring and tolerating a point by means
of a surface measurement.
For the tolerance comparison, the program uses the surface point that is next to
the measurement point not compensated.
The program does not use a theoretical point for the tolerance comparison.
Example:
The target / measurement point cannot be reached with the surface
measurement due to the fact that the probe touches another surface first.
In this case, the program is not using the point you have picked in the 3D-view for
the tolerance comparison.
Here, the following points are used for the tolerance comparison:
 The nominal point is the surface point next to the measurement
point not compensated (probing point).
 The actual point is the point that has been probed. As the material
of the workpiece prevents a direct probing path, this point is not the
point that has been clicked on in the 3D-view.
Related topics:
Tolerance of Distance: Further Differences
Element Point
7.5.7.3 Tolerance of Distance: Further Differences

Further Differences
Calculation Effort
If you need to measure many measurement points, select the function "Tolerance
of distance", as the calculation effort for this method is considerably less than for
the function "Surface measurement".
Deviation
If you use the function "Tolerance of distance" to measure points and if a given
target point can not be reached directly, the deviation after the tolerance
comparison is often a bit bigger than after a point measurement with the function
"Surface measurement".
If a direct probing is not possible for the "Surface measurement", the program
automatically looks for the next point.
Therefore, the deviation in this case is usually less.
Limitations
The function "Tolerance of distance" cannot be used
• for Scanning and
• for the Connection Element Surface.
The function "Tolerance of distance" can only be used for CNC-co-ordinate
measurement devices.
12.04.13 v3.5 85
CAT1000S
Related topics:
Element Point
7.5.7.4 Best Fit after Tolerance of Distance

Differences of the Best Fit after Surface Measurement and after Tolerance of
Distance
 When using the function "Tolerance of distance", the "Theoretical
point" and the probing direction are not changed during best fit.
In this case, only the measurement points (probing points) are
shifted and/or turned until an optimum position is reached.
 When you perform a best fit after a surface measurement, the
measurement points (probing points) are shifted and/or turned until
an optimum position is reached. The probing direction and the point
positioned next on the surface are also recalculated in this case.
For detailed information about this topic refer to Best Fit.
Related topics:
Element Point
7.5.7.5 Tolerance of Distance: Tolerate

The tolerating is the same as for the surface measurement.
Difference to GEOPAK
In CAT1000S, always the distance in space along probing direction is tolerated.
Therefore, this function does not exactly conform to the tolerating function in
GEOPAK.
In GEOPAK, it is not always the distance in space that is tolerated. In GEOPAK
you can also select individual axes apart from the special deviation.
The working steps in the dialogue "Element point" are also described in the help
topic "Tolerance of Distance: Steps".
Related topics:
Element Point
86 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
7.5.7.6 Tolerance of Distance: Steps

When you select the option "Tolerance of distance", enter an upper tolerance and
a lower tolerance in the dialogue "Element point". These values are transferred
from CAT1000S to GEOPAK.
Click in the 3D-view on the CAD-model.
With a mouse click, four GEOPAK commands are automatically created in
sequence.
 An Element Point is created as the theoretical element.
 A further Element Point is created by measurement.
 The Element Distance is created. This Element Distance in
CAT1000S corresponds to the Element Distance in GEOPAK.
The distance between the "Theoretical element" and the measured

point is calculated in probing direction.
 The calculated distance is tolerated. This is the tolerance
comparison "Distance". The result of the tolerance comparison is
transferred back to CAT1000S by GEOPAK.
Example
You can use the function "Tolerance of distance" for example in the following
situation:
The nominal points on a surface from a CAD-system are given. Additionally given
are the directions of the normal lines in the surface points. However, only the
deviations perpendicular to the surface shall be ascertained.
The distance along the probing direction can also be a negative value.
In this case, material is missing.
To define further tolerance options, click on the symbol. Refer also to the
topic "Further Tolerance Options".
Related topics:
Element Point
7.5.7.7 Further Tolerance Options (CAT1000S)

Click this button to determine further tolerance options.

You can
abort the part program if above upper tolerance or
abort the part program if below lower tolerance.
The feature can be transferred to STATPAK. Therefore, give the feature a

name. When typing at least one character, the "Report to statistical program"
button is available. It is also possible to type the feature name only for the report.
12.04.13 v3.5 87
CAT1000S
Note
You can specify user-defined feature names for your part programs. Type
these names in the "FeatureNames.txt" file. Before, you have to create
this file in your MCOSMOS directory in the "INI" folder. Then you can
select a predefined name from the "Feature name" drop-down combo box.
See also "User-defined feature names".
Additional information:
 Position number: You can use the position number for example for
an initial sample. In the initial sample report program of Mitutoyo,
the features are sorted by this number before they are printed. This
allows you to perform the measurement in a different sequence than
the sequence by which the characteristics are required in the report.
 A feature (label): This can be the grid square identification in a
bigger drawing, for example, to make it easier to locate the feature.
 A datum label: This label is intended for an allowed use of the MMC.
Here, the drawing sometimes specifies that the MMC may also be
applied to a reference element (e.g. 'A'). In cases where GEOPAK
allows the application of the MMC, you find also the possibility to
enter this reference identification. Upon inputting the data you
receive a list of the references that have already been defined.
Related topics:
Element point
7.5.7.8 Tolerance of Distance: Output

The following applies for all output possibilities of CAT1000S.
The output contains the following information:
 Theoretical point.
 The Measurement point projected in probing direction on the
"Theoretical point".
 The memory number of the Element Distance.
 Upper and lower tolerance limits.
 Into the measurement point table of CAT1000S, the "feature label"
from the dialogue "Further tolerance options" is entered in the
column "label".
 The deviation calculated from the projected measurement point and
the theoretical measurement point. The preceding sign of the
deviation gives you information about the material direction.
• A positive preceding sign indicates that there is too much
material.
• A negative preceding sign indicates that there is too little
material.
88 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Background: Projection
A projection generates a perpendicular foot point. This perpendicular foot point
corresponds to the "Projected probe centre" (see drawing).
1 = Probing direction (perpendicular to surface) Fläche)

2 = Measurement point (probe centre)
3 = Projected point (projected probe centre; corresponds to perpendicular foot
point)
4 = Theoretical point
5 = Actual surface
6 = Theoretical surface
Related topics:
Element Point
7.5.7.9 Tolerance of Distance along Probing Direction: Background

When using the function "Tolerance of distance along probing direction" in
CAT1000S, the following points are used for the tolerance comparison:
 the projected measurement point and
 the theoretical point.
Background: Projection
By means of a projection, a perpendicular foot point is generated. This point
corresponds to the "Projected probe centre" (see drawing).
12.04.13 v3.5 89
CAT1000S
1 = Probing direction (perpendicular to surface)

2 = Measurement point (probe centre point)
3 = Projected point (projected probe centre point, corresponds to the
perpendicular foot point).
4 = Theoretical point
5 = Actual surface
6 = Theoretical surface
7.5.8 Surface Profile Tolerance

7.5.8.1 Surface Profile Tolerance: Introduction
Task
You measure a surface in CAT1000S and subsequently tolerate the surface
profile tolerance in GEOPAK.
Proceed as follows:
 Measure an element "Surface" in CAT1000S. Read also the topic
"Surface Measure Mode".
 Finish the element by clicking the button "Element finished".

If you have not finished the element "Surface", the dialogue
"Surface measure mode" is not selectable.
 Open the dialogue "Surface profile tolerance" in CAT1000S

either by using the icon or by using the menu bar / Measure /
Surface profile tolerance.
 In the dialogue "Surface profile tolerance", select the desired
surface from the list. Then enter the desired tolerance into the input
field "Width tolerance". Confirm with "OK". The command "Surface
profile tolerance" is transferred to GEOPAK.
GEOPAK
After the measurement, all deviations of the measurement points of the element
"Surface" are calculated in CAT1000S and transferred to GEOPAK. The largest
deviation (absolute value) is multiplied by 2.0 and compared with the defined
tolerance.
90 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
In the field for results in GEOPAK, the result of the surface profile tolerance is
shown in one line.
Hint
You can use the surface profile tolerance in learn mode and repeat mode.
In the dialogue "Surface profile tolerance" you can use this symbol to
define "Further Tolerance Options".
7.5.8.2 Surface Profile Tolerance: Options

In the dialogue "Further tolerance options", you can define further settings for the
surface profile tolerance.
Abort the part program if out of tolerance.

When activating this button, the execution of the part program is aborted when
the calculated deviation is outside the surface profile tolerance.
You can transfer the feature to STATPAK. For this, you must first assign a
name for the feature. As soon as at least one character has been entered as a
name, the symbol "Transfer statistic data" is activated. However, the feature
name may also be entered for the protocol only.
Additional information:
 Position number – you can, for example, use the position number
for measurements of initial samples. In the Mitutoyo program for
initial sample reports, the features are sorted by this number before
they are printed out. This allows you to execute the measurement in
a different sequence than the sequence in which features are
required in the report.
 A further feature (label) – this can, for example, be the grid
description of a more complex drawing to facilitate finding the
feature.
7.5.9 Settings for probe display

To get to the dialogue "Settings for probe display", use the menu bar, "Settings,
Graphic".
Colour settings
Under “Colour settings” you define the colour for the first and the last
measurement point and the colours for “Move machine”, “Probing direction” and
“Rotating sphere”. Proceed as follows:
 Click in the colour bar.
 The Windows dialogue window "Colour" opens.
The intermediate points between the two end points are displayed using an
automatic colour transition scale.
Colours for removed points
Under "Colours for removed points" you define the colours for points that are not
measurable.
12.04.13 v3.5 91
CAT1000S
Proceed as follows:
 Click into the colour bar.
 The Windows dialogue "Colour" opens.
Magnification factor
The diameter of the measurement points in the 3D view is equivalent to the probe
diameter multiplied by the magnification factor. If the magnification factor is 1, the
probe will be displayed in its normal size.
Arrow head size / probe diameter as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the ratio of the length of the arrow head size
to the probe diameter as a percentage.
Leader size / probe diameter as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the ratio of the leader size to the probe
diameter as a percentage.
Probe point intrusion as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the percentage proportion of the probe that
lies submerged within the work piece.
Note
In the following case, the display with probe point intrusion in the CAD
model is important – should the surface normal of the CAD model be
incorrect, there will still be a part of the probe point displayed in 3D view.
Without a representation of the intrusion, you would not be able to see
any points in the model.
Show
To view immediately all the settings in the 3D view, click on the "Show" button.
Show advanced movement path
See details under "Show advanced movement path"
7.5.10 Settings for Machine Display

Start
To get to the dialogue "Settings for machine display", proceed via the menu bar /
Settings / Graphic.
In the dialogue "Settings for machine display", you select the components that
shall be displayed in 3D-view and in the animation.
Machine
Under "Machine", the program offers the following options:
 Whole CMM
 CMM table
 Rotary table
If you don't want to see the CMM, the CMM table and the Rotary table 3D-view,
you can also deactivate all buttons.
Other hardware
Under "Other hardware", the following options are available:
 Racks
92 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
 Masterballs
 Fixtures
You can select one or multiple / all options. You can also deactivate all options.
Probing system
Under "Probing system", select one of the following three options:
 Complete probing system
 Probe
 Only probe ball
7.5.11 Collision Check (CAT1000P)
You can carry out a collision check in CAT1000 only when no clearance
height has been determined in GEOPAK before.
Normally the co-ordinate measurement machine (CMM) takes the shortest direct
route to the target point. Certain features of the workpiece - for example a bulge
blocking the direct route - can lead to collisions.
You can carry out collision check for elements that you have created with
CAT1000P. All points and intermediate positions of an element are checked.
Temporary activation of collision check
You can specifically activate or deactivate collision check for a certain element.
The flexible selection of the collision check reduces the calculation effort/time
required for your task.
Permanent activation of collision check
When creating elements that do not have a "Collision check" button in the
dialogue box, a permanent activation of the collision check is recommended.
To activate the collision check, click "Collision check" on the

"Measurement" menu or click the "Collision check" button in the toolbar.
Procedure
 The CMM moves over the safety distance to the point that is above
the measurement start point.
The measurement start point is the point before a measurement
point, from which the CMM moves at measurement speed.
 From this position the CMM moves to the measurement start point
of the next measurement point. Collision check for this CMM
movement takes place. If a collision is detected, this point is not
measured as it cannot be reached without collision.
 Collision check always takes place when the points of the element
are recalculated.
 Should the work process become too slow as a result of this
procedure, you can temporarily deactivate the collision check during
creation of the element in the dialogue boxes listed above.
Afterwards activate the collision check again. Collision check is
carried out for the following recalculation.
12.04.13 v3.5 93
CAT1000S
 Between two elements the CMM moves over the safety distance.
This movement corresponds to the movement in GEOPAK. In this
case, a collision check of the CMM movement takes only place from
the safety distance to the element.
Example without collision check
Example: Element circle

Collision check is not activated; a collision would take place
Example with collision check

Collision check is activated
The CMM moves over the safety distance to the point that is above the
measurement start point.
See also
Settings for Measurement: Avoidance Path
94 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
7.5.12 Move CMM

7.5.12.1 Move CMM: Introduction
7.5.12.1.1 Purpose of the function "Move CMM"

 When you create part programs offline using the virtual machine, it
will often be necessary to define intermediate positions.
 The "Move CMM" function in CAT1000S and CAT1000P enables
you to define an intermediate position by a mouse click on the 3D
view of the CAD model.
 The graphic display of the movement allows you to perform an
optical collision check.
 You can also perform an automatic collision check. For this, activate
the collision check in CAT1000S and CAT1000P. The graphics will
now show possible collision situations.
 You can check the movement path and possible collisions in the
graphics prior to confirming the machine movement.
For the function "Move CMM" (which is possible only in the learn mode) you use
the two dialogues:
 "Move Machine" dialogue
 "Settings for Machine Movement" dialogue
7.5.12.1.2 Activating the "Move CMM" function
Activate the "Move CMM" function using the symbol or the menu
"Measurement" and "Move machine".
For detailed information about this subject refer to:
"Settings for machine movement" dialogue
"Move machine" dialogue
Move CMM: Background
Intermediate positions: Three methods
Intermediate positions: One or more methods
Move CMM: Confirm position
7.5.12.2 "Settings for machine movement" dialogue

To get to the "Settings for Machine Movement" dialogue, use the menu
"Settings".
 Activate "Confirm position" if you want to obtain information prior to
moving the CMM.
 Activate "Use model points", if the intermediate position is required
to be calculated by means of an intersection point with the model.
 Activate "Move parallel to view", if the CMM is to be moved from the
current position parallel to the screen view plane.
 Activate the button "Use movement box" if the movement box shall
be used for calculation.
• You can have a movement box displayed in the graphics by
clicking on "Get box". A movement box is calculated for the
complete model.
12.04.13 v3.5 95
CAT1000S
• If you activate the check box "Offset for movement box", you
can define a value in the corresponding input box. This is the
value with which the movement box is offset in all axes.
• You define the planes of the movement box on which the
intermediate positions can be located. To define these planes,
click the "Min" and "Max" checkboxes of the three planes on or
off.
Example: If the work piece is aligned on the CMM table in such
a way that the XY plane of the work piece corresponds to the
XY plane of the CMM, it will be necessary to click off the
minimum value for Z. Otherwise a collision with the CMM table
would occur.
• All values can also be entered manually.
7.5.12.3 "Move machine" dialogue

Working with the "Move machine" dialogue is only possible after having
performed the following two steps:
 Activate the "Confirm position" entry in the "Settings for Machine
Movement" dialogue.
 Select an intermediate position by a click in the 3D view.
Upon completion of these two steps the co-ordinates (numerical values) of the
calculated intermediate position will be shown in the "Move machine" dialogue.
This position is also shown in the graphics window.
"Recalculate point": Click on this symbol, if you have manually

changed the values and you want to see the target position in the graphics.
"Recalculate and show": Activate this function, if the movement path

from the current machine position to the intermediate position is to be updated
automatically after manual changes have taken place in the dialogue. Then, the
movement path is automatically displayed before the CMM starts moving.
"Restart dialogue": Click on this symbol if you want the dialogue to

remain open after the intermediate position has been reached.
Confirm with "OK" to actually start the CMM movement.
7.5.12.4 Move CMM: Background

Background
The "Move CMM" function enables you to define intermediate positions in the 3D
view of the CAD model by a mouse click.
However, this mouse click in the 3D view of the CAD model provides only two-
dimensional information.
Problem
Based on the two-dimensional information (on the screen) a three-dimensional
information shall be created.
96 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
How to proceed
In order to obtain a three-dimensional information, the program proceeds as
follows (see ill. below):
Illustration (top view)
1: Intersection with the model

2: Projected machine position
3: Intersection with the movement box
4: Movement box
5: Current machine position
6: View plane
7: Position you have clicked on
 Click into the 3D view of the CAD model.
 The view direction corresponds to a line running through the model
space. This line contains the points 1, 2, 3, 7 (see ill.).
 The two-dimensional information is available.
 The line through the model space is calculated. This line contains
the points 1, 2, 3, 7 (see ill.).
 Using this line you can now obtain the three-dimensional information
required to define an intermediate position with one of three
available methods.
Refer to the subjects:
7.5.12.5 Intermediate positions: Three methods

There are three methods to obtain the three-dimensional information required for
defining intermediate positions in CAT1000S and CAT1000P.
The methods and settings for the methods are determined in the "Settings for
machine movement" dialogue window. You access this dialogue using the menu
bar, "Settings".
12.04.13 v3.5 97
CAT1000S

4: Movement box
6: View plane
7: Position which you have clicked
Intersection with the model
 You click directly on a surface.
 An intersection point of the line with the model (see ill. point 1) is
used to obtain an intermediate position.
 The point on the surface is shifted by an offset. This is a value you
define in the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue window (via
menu bar, "Settings"). The direction of the offset corresponds to the
surface normal of the surface which you have clicked on. The result
is the intermediate position.
 This calculation is possible only when you click directly on a surface.
Current machine position
 The second method uses the current machine position in order to
calculate the intermediate position. The "view direction line"
containing the points 1, 2, 3, 7 intersects point 2 (see ill.).
 With this method, the machine always moves only parallel to the
screen view plane.
 The machine does not perform an uncontrolled movement along the
view direction.
 This calculation is always possible. Consequently, there is no need
for you to click on a plane.
98 v3.5 12.04.13
CAT1000S
Intersection with the movement box

 The third method uses an intersection of the "view direction line"
containing the points 1, 2, 3, 7 with the movement box (point 3 in the
ill.) The movement box corresponds to a clearance height for all
axes.
 You determine a minimum and a maximum value for each axis in
the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue window.
 A calculation can only be performed if the "view direction line" (see
ill.) actually intersects the valid planes of the movement box, i.e. you
must click a point that is positioned within the movement box.
 The edges of the movement box square are shown in red.
 The calculated positions are additionally shifted away from the
model by the currently valid probe radius and the safety distance.
Refer to the topic:
7.5.12.6 Intermediate positions: One or more methods

You can use one or more methods to define an intermediate position.
You determine the method in the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue
(refer to "Dialogue: Settings for machine movement" and "Intermediate positions:
Three methods").
If you select more than one method, the calculation will be performed in the
following sequence:
 Intersection with the model
 Move CMM parallel to view plane
 Intersection with the movement box.
Once you have made your decision for a combination, the following applies:
 The first successfully calculated point will be used.
 "Successfully" means:
• The point can be calculated.
• With the collision check function activated, no collision of the
probe tip will occur while the CMM is moving from the current to
the calculated position.
Tip
It makes sense to combine the options "Use model points" and "Use
movement box". As a rule, the option "Move parallel to view" should not
be combined with any other option.
Error
In case that an intermediate position cannot be calculated, the following will
occur, regardless of the method used:
 A beep will be sounding.
 At the same time, an error message appears in the status line of the
CAT1000S and CAT1000P windows.
12.04.13 v3.5 99
CAT1000S
7.5.12.7 Move CMM: Confirm position

In the dialogue window "Settings to move CMM", you use the check box "Confirm
position" to define whether the CMM movement starts immediately or upon query
(dialogue).
 Deactivating the "Confirm position" check box causes the CMM to
move immediately to the intermediate position.
 Activating the "Confirm position" check box causes the CMM to
move to the intermediate position only after you have confirmed the
"Move machine" dialogue.
The "Move machine" dialogue serves to check the selected co-
ordinates.
If you have deactivated the check box "Confirm position" in the window
"Settings for machine movement" and if you have at the same time
deactivated the collision control, this constitutes a risk of collisions. In this
case there will be no alert before the CMM carries out any movement that
may cause a collision.
 In case you use the "Move machine" dialogue to check the selected
co-ordinates, the 3D view will show a line from the current to the
calculated position of the CMM.
 The line and positions are shown in the colours you have defined for
"Move CMM" in the "Settings for probe display" dialogue window
(via menu bar, "Settings", "Graphics").
7.5.13 Surface Measurement

7.5.13.1 Surface Measure Mode
Before you can perform a freeform surface measurement, you need to start
GEOPAK.
 To measure a point on a freeform surface, click on this

symbol.
 You get to the dialogue "Element surface". Alternatively you get to
this dialogue via the menu bar / Measurement / Element surface.
 In the dialogue "Element surface", enter the name and memory
number and confirm.
 The window "Measurement mode" is displayed.
Read the topic "Dialogue Window Measurement Mode".
7.5.13.2 "Measurement Mode" Dialogue
Click these buttons to determine what you want to measure ("Surface"

or "Edge").
Click this button if you want a voice comment for each measurement point.
100 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Tolerance
Under "Tolerance", two options are suggested:
 "Mean value is best value" and
 "Lower limit is best value".
Tip: Open the table of measurement points (CAT1000 menu bar, "Window"
menu, "Meas. points table") to see the differences of the options.
Note
The option "Mean value is best value" is normally used. The option "Lower
limit is best value" is suitable only in exceptional cases.
Mean value is best value
The mean value is calculated as follows:
Mean value = lower tolerance + (upper tolerance - lower tolerance) / 2
Furthermore, enter the tolerance values (upper and lower tolerance). Also one-
sided tolerances are supported.
Option "Mean value is best value"
Table of measurement points including the option "Mean value is best

value"
Lower limit is best value
In the example below the deviation should be as close to the lower tolerance limit
(0.0) as possible. If the deviation falls below the tolerance limit, the table of
measurement points shows the colour for the maximum deviation (in this
example: purple).
Option "Lower limit is best value"
12.04.13 v3.5 101

CAT1000S
Table of measurement points including the option "Lower limit is best value"
Sheet thickness
In the "Sheet thickness" drop-down list you can enter a value.
 With this value you can add an individual offset for each element
surface.
 This is reasonable when different sheet thicknesses are to be found
in your CAD model.
Transferring statistic data
 To transfer the feature to a statistical program, click this

button after you have typed the feature name in the text box.
Note
 Select the "Attach point number to name" function if you want

to add a point number to the feature name. In this case, the
deviation of each measurement point is a single feature.
 If the "Attach point number to name" function is not selected, all
measurement points of an element are measured as a single
feature.
Note
As long as an element is open, you can open the "Change

measurement mode" dialogue box at any time using the "Change
measurement mode" icon in CAT1000S.
Restrict comparison
Select the check box to activate this function. You can define the surfaces or
edges to be used for surface measurements. The surfaces or edges you have not
selected are ignored for the surface measurement.
See also "Restrict Comparison".
Nominal actual comparison and sorting of features
The position number can be used for example for the measurement of an initial
sample inspection. In the Mitutoyo initial sample inspection report the features
are sorted according to this position number before printing. This allows the
measurement in a different order than the features are requested in the report.
102 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
The position label can be used if you want to use alphanumerical characters
instead of numbers for the position number (for example PKN1, PKN2, PKN3,
and so on). In the Mitutoyo initial sample inspection report the features are sorted
according to this position label before printing.
Note
The position label is sorted as text, that means the order of the position
labels 1A, 2A,...10A after sorting is 1A, 10A, 2A.
This can be avoided simply by adding a blank before single-digit position
labels (for example 1A).
Position number and position label in a part program
When position numbers and position labels are used in a part program and when
the first characters of the position labels are numbers, the position labels are
sorted as follows:
If you use the position labels, for example "1A", "1B", "1C" and a position number
1 in a part program, then the sort sequence is 1, 1A, 1B, 1C.
Leading zeros in a position label are also taken into consideration. That means,
position labels with leading zeros, for example 001 and 01, are always followed
by a 1, namely in the sequence 001, 01, 1.
Example: The position labels 001, 002, 003 and the position numbers 1, 2, 3 are
sorted in the sequence 001, 002, 003, 1, 2, 3.
You will find more detailed information about the priority of ASCII characters in
the Internet under the topic
" ASCII table".
For how to change the sequence of the measurement point table in the "Change
measurement mode" dialogue box, refer to
"Sort and Label Measurement Data".
For how to continue the surface measurement, refer to
"Freeform Surface: Further Measurement Steps".
7.5.13.3 Sort and Label Measurement Data
7.5.13.3.1 Sort measurement data

Input field position number: Task
In the dialogue window "Switch Measurement Mode" you can define the
sequence of the measurement point table via the input field "Position number”.
To get to the measurement point table, use the menu “Window”.
This sequence of the measurement point table is used for all outputs (e.g.
printout or “Export measurement data”).
The input field “Position number” can only be used to sort freeform
surface points.
Example
In a series measurement (many parts of the same kind), you want to measure
several freeform surface points in a certain sequence.
This sequence is not the sequence in which CAT1000S processes the
measurement task.
Reason: The measurement in CAT1000S automatically optimises the move.
12.04.13 v3.5 103

CAT1000S
By defining a position number, the desired freeform surface point is inserted at

the desired position of the measurement point table.
Please proceed as follows
 Enter a "2" into the input field "Position number".
 With position number 2, you measure six points.
 Enter a "3" into the input field "Position number".
 With position number 3, you measure four points.
The measurement point table lists your freeform surface points in the following
sequence:
 The first line (index 1) shows the freeform surface point with the
position number 2 and measurement point number 1.
 The sixth line (index 6) shows the freeform surface point with the
 The seventh line (index 7) shows the freeform surface point with the
 The tenth line (index 10) shows the freeform surface point with the
Please note
Measurement points without position number are assigned the number 0
by CAT1000S. This means that the measurement point table lists these
measurement points before the other measurement points.
7.5.13.3.2 Label measurement data

Task
You can assign the freeform surface point a name which is then additionally
displayed in the measurement point table.
The system uses the name that you have entered into the input field “Feature’s
name”.
Furthermore you can attach a numerical value to this name which is then
numbered upwards.
 Enter a name into the input field “Feature’s name”.
 Click on the button “Attach element number to name”.

 The measurement point table now lists the freeform surface points
with the entered name (the column before last; below “Mark”). To
this name, the element number is attached with an underline. The
attached element numbers are numbered upwards.
Example
If you want to measure a freeform surface on a certain part of a work piece, the
labelling of the work piece part with its name provides a better overview over the
measurement point table and all outputs.
7.5.13.4 Freeform Surface: Further Measurement Steps

For general information about the topic freeform surface measurement, please
refer to
"Freeform Surface Measurement".
104 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
The following steps are required to conclude the freeform surface measurement:
 You can now probe measurement points also by using the joystick
box.
 For “Searching model points”, click on this symbol. The

mouse cursor in this mode is represented as a crosshair cursor with
the letter “i”. At the same time you get to the appropriate window.
 Click on the spot to be measured.
 The program shows a point in the colour setting you chose. The
point is displayed with its co-ordinates.
 Click on this symbol to measure the point.

Fore more details about this topic please refer to "Chosen Model Point".
7.5.13.4.1 Connecting element “Freeform surface”

Situation
You want to measure geometrical elements in GEOPAK and you want to use the
same measurement points also in CAT1000S.
How to proceed
 You open the element “Freeform surface” in GEOPAK.

 Click on the symbol “Connecting element” to create a connecting
element “Freeform surface”.
7.5.14 Restrict Comparison

7.5.14.1 Restrict Comparison: Introduction
Situation and Task
You wish to measure a surface with CAT1000S.
Click on the CAD-model in the 3D-view.
It is possible that the program does not use the picked surface of the CAD-model
for the measurement.
Possible root causes:
 The workpiece is not correctly aligned and therefore the workpiece
co-ordinate system is not accurate.
 Some surfaces of the CAD-model are positioned too close to each
other.
CAT1000S always calculates the distance between the measurement point on
the surface of the workpiece and the surface of the CAD-model positioned next.
Use the option "Restrict comparison" to select one or more surfaces. CAT1000S
then includes only the surfaces you have picked for the calculation (tolerance
comparison).
Option "Restrict Comparison"
Use the option "Restrict comparison" to prepare a measurement.
You define the surfaces of the CAD-model that shall be used for the calculation
(tolerance comparison) later on by assigning a name to the surfaces.
After you have assigned the names, all surfaces with names can be measured.
12.04.13 v3.5 105

CAT1000S
The calculation of the measurement points (tolerance comparison) ignores all

other surfaces.
You can also use the option "Restrict comparison" to define edges.
Proceed in the same way as described for surfaces.
For using the function "Restrict comparison" during a measurement, read the
help topic "Automatically Check Restriction of Comparison".
Read also:
Restrict Comparison: Example
Restrict Comparison: Steps
Restrict Comparison: Surface Measurement
Combine Several Surfaces
7.5.14.2 Restrict Comparison: Example

Illustration 1
1 = workpiece; 2 = probing point
3 = CAD-model; 4 = surface point
S1 = "surface 1" of the CAD-model; S2 = "surface 2" of the CAD-model
Situation (see ill. 1):
There is a form deviation between the workpiece and the CAD-model.
CAT1000S always calculates the distance between the probing point on the
surface of the workpiece and the next positioned surface point of the CAD-model.
In this example: The next positioned surface point (4) is on "surface 2". However,
you wish to calculate the distance between the probing point and the surface
point on "surface 1".
Solution (see ill. 2):
With the option "Restrict comparison" you determine that only the "surface 1" of
the CAD-model shall be included in the calculation.
Result: CAT1000S ignores the "surface 2" and calculates the distance between
the probing point and the next position surface point of the CAD-model. This point
is positioned – as required – on "surface 1".
106 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Illustration 2
1 = workpiece; 2 = probing point
3 = CAD-model; 4 = surface point
S1 = "surface 1" of the CAD-model; S2 = "surface 2" of the CAD-model
Also refer to the topics

Restrict Comparison
7.5.14.3 Restrict Comparison: Steps

Start
You work in the dialogue "Picked elements".
 To get to this dialogue, use the symbol "Pick surface (with

mouse)" or via the menu bar / Tools / Pick surfaces.
 Click on one or more surfaces of the CAD-model that shall be
included in the calculation. For highlighting several surfaces in the
3D-view, activate the "Shift"-key and simultaneously click on the
surfaces.
 Open the dialogue "Picked elements"
• using the right mouse key / context menu "Info. about picked
surfaces" or
• using the menu bar / Tools / Surface / Info picked surface.
Working steps in the dialogue "Picked elements"
 In the dialogue "Picked elements", highlight one or more picked
surfaces in the list ("Shift"-key and mouse click). Assign name(s) to
this surface(s).
 Type the name in the input field "Name".
12.04.13 v3.5 107

CAT1000S
 To complete the definition of the surface / surfaces, click on

the Symbol "Store".
You can also use the option "Restrict Comparison" to define edges.
Also refer to the topics

Restrict Comparison
7.5.14.4 Restrict Comparison: Surface Measurement

Prerequisite for "Restrict comparison"
Before starting the measurement, you need to define the relevant surfaces that
shall be used for the calculation.
Surface Measurement with the Option "Restrict Comparison"
Proceed as follows
 Open an element surface via the menu bar / Measurement

/ Element surface or via the symbol in the toolbar.
 You get to the dialogue "Measure mode".
For this, read the topic "Surface Measurement"
 At the bottom of the dialogue "Measure mode" you find the option
"Restrict comparison".
 Activate this function via the check box.
 The list box displays the names you have previously assigned to
one or more surfaces.
 Select a name from the list box. This name defines one or more
surfaces. Confirm with "OK".
 CAT1000S now uses only the surfaces of the CAD-model that have
been identified with the selected name for the subsequent
calculation. All other surfaces of the CAD-model are ignored.
Also read the topics

Restrict Comparison
108 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.5.14.5 Combine Several Surfaces

You can use the option "Restrict comparison" to combine several surfaces.
Application example
Due to its design, a surface is defined in several patches in the CAD-model. This
is often the case with surface feedbacks.
In this case, you can select all patches and assign only one name to all patches.
This name combines all patches of the CAD-model to a new surface.
This has the effect that the surface comparison and the subsequent tolerating
only take this one surface (consisting of all patches of the same name) into
account.
Also read the following topics
Restrict Comparison
Restrict Example: Surface Measurement
7.5.15 Picked Model Point

Opening the dialog box
On the "Tools" menu, click "Pick model points" to open the "Picked model
point" dialogue box. Or click the "Pick model points (with mouse)" button.
Procedure
 Click in the CAD model in 3D view to define the point.
 The point co-ordinates appear in the X, Y and Z text boxes. The
probing direction is also displayed.
Task
CAT1000S: With the "Picked model points" function you can measure points to
create a freeform surface. In this case, select "Surface points" from the list box.
CAT1000P and CAT1000S: The "Picked model points" function allows to
determine the point positions in 3D view using the mouse. In this case, four
options are available:
 Surface points
 Edge points
 Section points
 Vertices
Example: You want to determine the clearance height to the workpiece. Using the
mouse, click in the 3D view and determine the top point of the workpiece. The
point co-ordinates automatically appear in the three text boxes.
If you want to measure one single point on the model - independent of the
freeform surface - select the function "Element Point". See also "Working steps in
the "Picked model point" dialogue box".
12.04.13 v3.5 109

CAT1000S
Picked model point with head touch
PH20 and REVO require an I++ server. Consequently the settings for the
probe head, such as head speed and head acceleration are set in the "Set
I++ properties" dialogue box in GEOPAK.
 Click the "Head touch" button.

 The "Head touch" tab appears.

is not known.
Note
The stylus direction is the direction between the angle of the probe head
from head to tip and the co-ordinate system. The co-ordinate system can
either be the current part co-ordinate system or the machine co-ordinate
system.
 To determine the probing direction, type a value in the "X,Y,Z" text
boxes.
 If you want to measure from the opposite direction, click the

"Change direction vector" button.
7.5.16 Work Steps in Dialogue "Picked Model Point"

The dialogue "Picked model point" offers several options:
"Automatically Check Restriction of Comparison".
Instant measurement
The picked points are instantaneously measured and transferred to GEOPAK.
The dialogue window remains open.
The OK-button is deactivated.
Example: If you want to measure many points, select this option and you need
not confirm each point with "OK".
Dialogue will restart after finish for a new element.

If you want to measure many points we recommend this option. With this option
you always confirm for each measured point with the OK-button and you need
not restart the dialogue for each new point.
110 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Recalculate point
If you want, for example, to enter exact values for a point, click into the input
fields behind X, Y and Z and enter the values using the keyboard and confirm by
clicking the icon.
The point moves to the new position.
Example: Maybe you wish to measure certain points from a drawing.

Read also the topic "Change Probing Direction".
Offset
Enter an offset to avoid a collision.
The co-ordinates of the probing point are moved in opposite direction to the
probing direction. In Z, for example, the height for probing is higher.
Read also the topics
"Offset and Sheet Thickness".
"Offset: Examples"
7.5.17 Automatically Check Restriction of Comparison

Prerequisite
Before you can use the function "Automatically check restriction of

comparison" you first need to define one or more surfaces using the function
"Restrict comparison". For this, refer to the topic "Restrict Comparison".
Case 1
 You have activated the function "Restrict comparison".
 Click the surface you have previously selected in the dialogue
"Measurement mode". The function "Restrict comparison" is active.
 The comparison is limited to this surface. For the calculation
(tolerance comparison), the program only considers the surface you
have selected.
Case 2
 Click a surface that has already been defined by the function
 The dialogue "Measurement mode" opens. The current name of the
surface is suggested in the list box "Restrict comparison" of the
dialogue.
 You can decide if you want to accept the suggestion of the program,
i.e. the comparison is restricted to the suggested surface. For the
calculation (tolerance comparison), the program only considers the
surface you have selected.
Case 3
12.04.13 v3.5 111

CAT1000S
 Click a surface that has not been defined by the function "Restrict
comparison".
 You get to the dialogue "Name of picked element". In the dialogue,
you can assign a name to the picked surface.
 The dialogue "Measurement mode"opens. In the dialogue, the
current name of the surface is suggested in the list box under
 The comparison is restricted to this surface. For the calculation
(tolerance comparison), the program only considers the surface you
have selected.
7.5.18 Create Grid

7.5.18.1 Create Grid: Introduction (CAT1000S)
Task
With the function "Create grid" you can measure many points on a freeform
surface in only one step.
This freeform surface element can include one or more CAD model planes.
Prerequisite
 Before you can create a grid for a freeform surface measurement,
GEOPAK must have been started.
 Furthermore the element “Freeform surface” must be open (also
refer to "Freeform Surface Measurement").
 You should have activated the collision check before.
Two options
CAT1000S offers two options to measure grid points.
 You can select one plane that belongs to the grid. Afterwards, the
grid points are measured on this one plane.
 You can select several planes. The grid is then placed onto these
selected planes. When you start the measurement, the selected
planes are measured during one working step.
Only measure one plane
 To measure a grid (a group of points) for a single plane, first open
the element “Freeform Surface”.
 Click on the symbol "Create grid for measurement" or

select via the menu “Tools” the function “Create grid for
measurement”.
 The mouse cursor is now represented as a probe.
 Click on the plane to be measured.
 The selected plane is highlighted in red.
 The dialogue “Create grid” is displayed.
Measure several planes at the same time
 To measure a grid (a group of points) for more than one planes, first
open the element “Freeform surface”.
112 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 Click on the symbol “Create grid for measurement” or

select via the menu bar “Tools / Create grid for measurement”.
 The mouse cursor is now represented as a probe.
 While keeping the “Shift”-key pressed, click on the planes to be
measured.
 The selected planes are highlighted in red.
 The dialogue “Create grid” is displayed.
For this topic, please refer to "Create Grid: Dialogue"
7.5.18.2 Create Grid: Dialogue

Plane utilisation
Under “Plane utilisation” you define the section of the grid you want to measure.
For this, you enter the values into the input fields Tmin, Smin und Tmax, Smax.
Background
Freeform surfaces can also be represented in a 2D-space. This is the S-,
T-space. In this case the S-, T-space serves to define a plane utilisation.
With the min.- and max.-values you define, how far the plane shall be
utilised in the relevant axial direction.
The standard setting for the plane utilisation is 100 percent. This means that the
whole plane is measured during a measurement.
If you want to measure only a part of the plane, you change the size of the min.-
or max.-values in S and T. For this, enter the desired values into the input fields.
Example:
If you want a certain distance to an edge, it does not make sense to select a
plane utilisation of 100 percent.
Input fields "Grid dimensions"
Via the input fields “Grid dimensions” you define
• how many lines and
• how many points per line
you want to measure.
Display grid points
 To check the grid position on the plane, click on the button
“Calculate”.
 In the 3D-view, a preview is created in which you can see the
measurement points, the probing direction and the movement path.
Start grid measurement
 As soon as you have created the grid you can start the
measurement.
 Click on the button “OK” in the dialogue window “Create grid”.
Related topics:
"Create Grid: Introduction".
"Probing direction"
"Grid Measurement: Start and End Point"
"Create Grid: Further Options"
12.04.13 v3.5 113

CAT1000S
7.5.18.3 Create Grid: Further Options

Probing direction
If you have activated the button “Calculate”, the three fields below “Probing
direction” display the angles of the probing direction. With this you can check the
correctness of the surface normal.
For the option "Change probing direction" please read the topic
"Change Probing Direction".
For information about the options
"Exchange start and end point" and
"Reverse grid orientation"

please refer to the topic Grid Measurement: Start and End Point".
Repeat
If you activate the button "Dialogue is restarted after measurement”, the

dialogue is automatically restarted after the measurement in order to measure a
new element.
Status line
If you have activated the button "Calculate", the status line (in the lower part of
the dialogue window) displays the number of points to be measured and the
number of points you have defined (in brackets).
Grid measurement and probe change
You can combine the grid measurement with the automatic probe change.
All probe changes are displayed.
Because all probe changes are performed during the measurement without
interruption, a risk of collision exists. Therefore you have to perform a
visual check of the probe changes in the 3D-view before starting the grid
measurement.
For information about this topic, please read "Automatic Probe Change".
7.5.18.4 Grid Measurement: Start and End Point

Further options for distributing the points for grid measurement
The program offers three options to distribute the points on the surface.
114 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Exchange start and end point
Flip grid direction

The start point is exchanged with the point positioned diagonally opposite of the
start point.
Move start point

The start point is moved to the nearest edge of the surface.
Read also the topic "Grid Measurement: Examples".
7.5.18.5 Grid Measurement: Examples

Example 1
Starting situation:
You have defined a grid with three lines and three points per line. You have
hidden the surfaces of the model. The first measurement point is represented in
yellow, the last measurement point in blue.
Click on "Exchange start and end point".

Start and end point on the grid are exchanged.
The measurement points are now distributed as shown in the illustration below.
Now reverse the last step by clicking again on "Exchange start and
end point".
12.04.13 v3.5 115

CAT1000S
Click on "Flip grid direction". The start point is exchanged for the point
positioned diagonally opposite.
Example 2
Starting situation:
You have defined a grid with three lines and three points per line. You have
hidden the surfaces of the model. The first measurement point is represented in
yellow, the last measurement point in blue.
Click on the button "Move start point".

The start point is moved to the nearest edge of the surface.
116 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.5.18.6 Create Grid (Change Probing Direction)

Click on the "Change Probing Direction" symbol, if the surface normal

in the CAD model is wrong. CAT1000S automatically reverses the surface
normal.
Reversing the surface normal
 The surface normal is used for calculating the probing direction.
Usually the surface normal points out of the material. This is the
case particularly with volume models (e.g. for models which have
been read-in in the STEP format.
 The surface normal can, of course, point into the material as well.
This happens quite often with models which are purely surface-
oriented (e.g. VDAFS, IGES). In this case CAT1000S would
calculate the probing direction not correctly. This would result in
collisions.
 CAT1000S automatically reverses the normal in the event of
recognisable mistakes in the CAD model. CAT1000S is, however,
not capable of recognising mistakes in the CAD model in all cases.
In such a case you see right from the 3D view of the measurement
point preview whether the surface normal and the probing direction
calculated from it are correct or not. If the probing direction is wrong,
you can reverse the surface normal by a mouse click.
7.5.18.7 Measure Grid

If you have created the grid, you can start the measurement. You can find
detailed information to the “Create Grid” topic under "Create Grid: Introduction"
and "Create Grid: Dialogue".
Continue as follows:
Click on the "Measure Grid" icon to start the measurement.
If you want to stop the measurement, click on the icon. By clicking on the
"Measure Grid" icon, you can continue the measurement whenever you want.
The measurement will be continued where you have stopped it before.
If you want to definitely exit the measurement, click on the icon.
12.04.13 v3.5 117

CAT1000S
7.5.19 Clearance Height (CAT1000PS)

The clearance height defines the height to which the CMM moves before and
after measurement of each element. In many cases this can save the input of
intermediate positions.
Start
 On the CAT1000 "Settings" menu, click "Clearance height".
 The "Clearance height" dialogue box appears.
Definition of clearance height
 Click the button to define the clearance height in the text box.
 Use the axes buttons to define in which axis movement takes

place.
 The selected axis is displayed.
 Click the "Current machine position" button.

 The current machine position is taken.
 Click the button again to deactivate the clearance height.

Further options in the "Clearance height" dialogue box
Either click the "Get minimum from movement box" or the "Get
maximum from movement box" button.
The minimum or maximum is taken from the dialogue box "Settings for Machine
Movement".
The probe radius and safety distance are subtracted from or added to the
minimum or maximum. This finally results in the clearance height.
7.5.20 Manipulate CAD Model

Deactivate and hide surfaces
It can also occur, that two surfaces are overlapping, of which the one contains an
internal boundary (cut-out), the other however not. When creating an intersection,
the section will not be found.
You eliminate this failing by marking and hiding these single surfaces. In addition,
you will be active in the "Selected Surfaces" dialogue window (also see :Search
Surfaces").
deactivate
If you exclude a surface from all calculations/views, but want to view it in

your drawing or documentation, use the icon.
hide
If you do not want the surface to be viewed any more, use the "Recycle
Bin”. Then, the surfaces will not be taken into consideration any more for all
calculations.
118 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.5.21 Recover Surfaces

At any time, you can restore hidden surfaces individually or together. This is done
via the "Mark / Inactive Elements" menu and/or via "Restore Hidden Elements".
If you individually want to restore the surfaces, you can do that via a list, in which
you find the designations (names) of the surfaces.
7.5.22 Geometrical Elements

Along with the possibilities via the "Geometric Elements", it is no longer
necessary to read design drawings. The geometric elements such as circle, line
etc. can be read in and represented by CAT1000S.
If you have loaded a part, you recognize the elements by the coloured lines
(intersection points). If you do not want to see these lines, deactivate the function
via the menu bar "View / Vertices".
To measure e.g. a circle, proceed as follows:
 Start GEOPAK and run this program in the background.
You must choose the way via the menu bar with the
"Measurement / GEOPAK Online Measurement" functions. Thus,
the two programs can communicate.
Don’t try to start GEOPAK via the PartManager. No communication
will be possible.
 Click on the icon

 The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair pointer with binoculars.
 With the mouse pointer, click on the element and then use the
context menu with the right mouse button.
 In this, click on the "Approach Selected Edge through..." function
and then decide between circle or straight line.
 In the following dialogue window, input the name and the memory of
the element.
Now, you can send the element with a click on the icon to GEOPAK and
there continue your work.
7.5.23 Search for Edge Points

If you want to get information about your model, you can search points on one of
the borders of the surfaces.
 Click on the icon (to the left) and
 The mouse pointer is represented in this mode as hair cross

with the letter "i".
 You move this mouse pointer near the border, whose position you
want to know, and click on the range.
 The point that is found will be marked indicating a grey ball.
12.04.13 v3.5 119

CAT1000S
 Click near the marked point on the right mouse button and select in
the following context menu (picture below) the "Info. Picked Model
Point" function.
You can see that in this context menu, there are different possibilities, e.g.
between model points, surface points, edge and intersection points.
If you search for edge points, you must search in this context menu also for
edges (Picked Model Point -> only Edges). Proceed the same way when
searching surfaces or intersection points and if you want to select all types
of model points.
After clicking on the "Info. Selected Model Point" line, you come to the "Selected
Model Point" window.
7.5.23.1 Transmission to GEOPAK

You also can transmit the point for further processing to GEOPAK (if GEOPAK
has been started from CAT1000S).
 In the "Selected Model Point" window, click on the icon

(picture on the left).
 Also enter a designation to find each point in GEOPAK again.
There, you can connect several points to new elements (see
detailed information of the topic "Type of Construction").
 Quit the search mode by clicking once again on the icon.
7.5.24 Minimum edge distance

To get to the "Minimum edge distance" dialogue window, use the "Settings" menu
in the menu bar.
Minimum edge distance
You define the minimum edge distance in the input field. Any points that are
positioned nearer to an edge than the required minimum edge distance will be
deactivated in the course of the next check. Refer to "Check measurement
points".
120 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Edge offset
Enter the edge offset in the lower input field of the dialogue "Minimum edge
distance". This distance needs to be defined only once and is subsequently
automatically used.
Background
 To allow a correct measurement, the probe may not be pointed
directly at an edge. It is possible that there are defects in the
material.
 The edge offset is
the distance of the outermost measurement point and the start point of a selected
edge and
the distance between the opposite outermost measurement point and the end
point of a selected edge.
Edge offset on the example of the "Element line".

1 = Edge offset
2 = Selected edge
3 = Start point of the selected edge
4 = End point of the selected edge
5 = First measurement point
6 = Last measurement point
12.04.13 v3.5 121

CAT1000S
7.5.25 Probe Edge Point in CAT1000S

If you want to probe an edge point on a thin sheet, you can realize this in
CAT1000S with a special probing strategy. This strategy can also be applied if
the sheet you want to measure is bent compared with the model or the learnt
part.
 Near the edge point on the sheet, one or several probing processes
will be executed.
 The height of the actual edge probing will be calculated out of these
preceding probing processes (surface points).
 Independently from the general setting, it is possible to separately
adapt the safety distance according to your required edge and
surface point(s).
 To do so, open the “Surface” element in CAT1000S. Optionally, you
can probe edge points by opening any geometrical element in
GEOPAK.
 In the “Measure” pull-down menu, click on the "Edge Point
Measurement" function.
The "Edge Point Measurement" dialogue window will appear.
7.5.26 Edge Point Measurement: Dialogue

The dialogue is split into "Edge Point" (left-hand side of the dialogue)
and "Surface Point" (right-hand side of the dialogue).
To enter the data into the dialogue input boxes, proceed as follows:
 Define the number of edge points to be measured in the top left
section of the dialogue.
 Determine the number of surface points. You may use 1, 2 or 3
surface points.
 Define a measurement depth. This is the distance by which the
edge point is moved towards the surface normal (for details refer to
"Figures for Edge Point Measurement").
 CAT1000S suggests values for the minimum edge distance and the
distance of the edge to the surface point. You may change these
values at any time.
The following input boxes are filled in by mouse click into the model:
 The LED symbol before "Start" is flashing. CAT1000S expects you
to define a start point.
 Click on the edge in the model where the start point of the edge
point measurement is to be located. As default end point,
CAT1000S uses the end of the edge.
 If you want to establish a different end point, click on the edge in the
model where the end point of the edge point measurement is to be
located.
 The measurement points are evenly distributed between the start
and end points.
122 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 The co-ordinates and direction of the edge points and the probing
direction of the surface are automatically established on the basis of
the CAD data. CAT1000S automatically enters the values into the
input boxes.
Input with keyboard
If you want to change the start and the end point using the keyboard, an edge
must have been picked previously.
Start and end point are projected onto the picked edge.
Further functions in the dialogue window:
When clicking the button "No projection", the edge point is not
projected onto the surface that has been defined by the preprobing.
If you wish to reverse the direction of the surface or of the edge, click
on the "Change Probing Direction" symbol.
If you want to exchange the start and end point, click the icon
"Exchange start and end point".
Click on this symbol, when you want to perform several edge-point

measurements successively. The "Edge Point Measurement" dialogue windows
will open again automatically after one measurement.
To start measurement, click on "OK".
For further information on this topic, refer to "Figures for Edge Point
Measurement").
7.5.27 Figures for Edge Point Measurement

Graphical representation for all edge measurement options
1 = Edge point; 2 = Measurement depth; 3 = Probing direction edge point
12.04.13 v3.5 123

CAT1000S
Graphical representation for the option "1 surface point"
1 = Distance edge/surface point; 2 = Probing direction surface point

For the "1 surface point" option, height correction takes place.
View from top
1 surface point
Red point = Pre-probing point

2 surface points
1 = Distance edge/surface point; 2 = minimum edge distance

In the case of two surface points, not only the height, but also the direction of
edge probing are changed.
3 surface points
1 = Distance edge / surface point; 2 = minimum edge distance

For three surface points, a lateral deflection of the sheet plate is compensated
for, too.
The distance edge to surface point must be greater than the minimum
edge distance.
The safety distance of the edge (at the left side in the dialogue must be
smaller than the minimum edge distance.
124 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Representation in the CAD model

 The distribution of edge point and surface points can be read be
read straight from the CAD graphics.
 If the values in the dialogue have been changed by manual input,
click on the "Calculate" button in order to get the changed results
displayed in the graphical representation of the CAD model.
7.5.28 Create Section and Scanning

7.5.28.1 Create Section
Open the "Create section" dialogue box by selecting "Create section" from
the "Tools" menu in the CAT1000PS menu bar or by clicking on the icon in the
toolbar.
Jobs
Create a section with a cutting plane through the CAD model in the 3D-
View. The graphic display allows you to create the sections quickly and easily
with just one mouse click.
The existing sections can be edited.
The edges of a CAD model can be used to create a section.
Save contour: You create a section. You use the section to create a contour
(GWS file).
You create a section in order to create scan commands. These scan commands
are transferred to GEOPAK.
 Scan CNC: When this option is selected, the scan is performed

along the section.
 Scan by leading contour: When this option is selected, the

GWS file is used as nominal contour. The nominal contour is
scanned.
 Scan on curve: If you want to use the Renishaw REVO

probing system (RSP 2) for scanning use this option.
Related topics
Create section with cutting plane
Redefine existing section
Create section from edge
Save contour
Save contour: Further options
Scan CNCScan CNC: Further optionsScan by leading contourScan by leading
contour: Further optionsScan on curveScan on curve: Control pointsSettings for
control pointsScan on curve: Edit and insertScan on curve: Further options
7.5.28.2 Create section with cutting plane
In CAT1000PS, open the "Create section" dialogue box by selecting "Create

section" from the "Tools" menu in the CAT1000PS menu bar or by clicking on the
icon in the toolbar.
12.04.13 v3.5 125

CAT1000S
New section
You create a section with a cutting plane through the CAD model in the 3D-View.
The graphic display allows you to create the sections quickly and easily with just
a few mouse clicks.
Click "Create section with cutting plane".

Other options in the "Mode" area

Name and element number
Name: Enter the name of the new section.
Add element number to name: If you select this button, a number (start = 1)
is added to the name and will be incremented each time the dialogue box is
restarted.
Select plane
First decide in which dimensional plane the cutting plane should be located.
Use the mouse to set the cutting plane in the 3D-View. In the 3D -
View, click on the tool.
XY plane: If you click on the XY button, the cutting plane is always located
parallel to the XY plane of the current coordinate system. In the 3D-View the
cutting plane can be moved in Z-direction with drag-and-drop. The values in the
entry fields are updated during the cutting process.
YZ plane: If you click on the YZ button, the cutting plane is always

positioned parallel to the YZ plane of the current coordinate system. In the 3D-
View the cutting plane can be moved in X-direction with drag-and-drop. The
values in the entry fields are updated during the cutting process.
ZX plane: If you click on the ZX button, the cutting plane is always located
parallel to the ZX plane of the current coordinate system. In the 3D-View the
cutting plane can be moved in Y-direction with drag-and-drop. The values in the
entry fields are updated during the cutting process.
You may also enter the values manually. Click "Calculate" to update the 3D
view.
Surface cutting view: This option creates a section that is perpendicular to

the normal of the selected face at the selected point.
Edge cutting view: This options creates a section that is perpendicular to the
selected face. The section is made along the edge nearest to the selected point.
Axis cutting view: This option creates a section that is perpendicular to the
selected cylinder axis. The selected point is projected onto the cylinder axis.
126 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
No projection
Select "No projection" to set dimensionally inclined cutting planes with the
mouse.
The cutting plane can be set in the 3D view by moving or rotating the
cutting plane with the mouse. In the 3D view, click on the tool.
You may also enter the values manually. Click "Calculate" to update the 3D-
View.
"Cutting plane" area
The "Cutting plane" area in the dialogue box contains six entry fields.
The coordinates for a point on the cutting plane are located on the left.
The three angles of the direction vector of the cutting plane (X angle, Y angle, Z
angle) are located on the right. The filling mode of the vector is defined in the
"Input characteristics" GEOPAK dialogue box (GEOPAK / File / Settings / Input
characteristics). The directional vector is displayed either as an angle or as a
cosine. Refer to topic "Input characteristics".
Create section
Click "Generate" to create the section in the 3D-View. A graphic preview is
displayed.
Click "Next" or "Finish" to create the section.
Further options
Click "Calculate" if you have manually changed the values in the entry fields.
The 3D view is refreshed.
Click "Reset dialogue values" to delete the current preview of the section in
the 3D view.
When clicking on this button, the dialogue box will open again after the
measurement.
To change the view of the cutting plane in the 3D-View, click "Cutting side".
This view allows you to visually check the dimensional position of the section or
contour. The function does not affect the calculation.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
12.04.13 v3.5 127

CAT1000S
7.5.28.3 Redefine Existing Section

icon in the toolbar.
This option allows you to redefine existing sections. Condition: The section
must have been created in advance by using the "Next" or "Finish" button.
Selecting an existing section
Use the selection tool in the 3D-View of the CAD model to select the section that
you want to redefine. Or: Open the list box at the top of the dialogue box. Select
the name of the section to be edited.
When you select sections in the CAD model, the selected section segments are
displayed in a specific colour. The selection colour is different from the section
colour. Refer to topic "Model colours".
The section segments highlighted in the selection colour are saved as a section.
The section segments highlighted in the section colour are removed from the
section you are editing.
Click "Next" or "Finish" to create the modified section.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
7.5.28.4 Create section from edge
the "Tools" menu in the CAT1000 menu bar or by clicking on the icon in the
toolbar.
Select edge
Click "Create section from edge".

The "Cutting plane" area in the dialogue box is deactivated.
Use the selection tool to select an edge or several parts of an edge. The section
is created along the edge. In the 3D-View, the selected edge is displayed in the
selection colour. Refer to: Set model colour
Create section
Click "Next" or "Finish" to create the section.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
128 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

7.5.28.5 Save contour
toolbar.
If you created a section in the "Create section" dialogue box, you can save the
section as a contour.
Steps in the "Create section" dialogue box:
 Click "Save contour" in the "Action" area.

 Click "Next".
 The "Save contour" dialogue box opens.
Steps in the "Save contour" dialogue box:
 Enter a name for the contour. Select an available section from the
pull-down menu or click on a section in the CAD model. Use this
section to create a contour.
 Decide whether a closed or an open contour shall be created.

Select this button to create a closed contour. Deselect this button to
create an open contour.
 Creating a closed contour requires a start point to be set. Click on
the selected section to set the start point.
 Creating an open contour requires a start point and an end point to
be set. Click on the selected section to set start point and end point.
 Select the pitch in the "Contour file" area. A small pitch will cause a
high number of measuring points, a large pitch will cause a smaller
number of measuring points.
 Click "Generate". The contour is displayed in the 3D-View. This is
only a graphic preview.
 Click "Finish" to create the contour.
"Contour file" area
 The contour file area displays the current contour file name with the
extension ".gws".
 Click "Save name" to define the location of your contour file.

 To save the contour file in the current part directory, select the "Use
part directory" checkbox.
 When selecting the "Additional edge point"
check box, there is an additional theoretical point at the end of each
segment of the contour. See also: Additonal Point at End of Edge
Create contour file
Click "Finish" to execute the command and create the contour file.
Further options in the "Save contour" dialogue box
The "Save contour" dialogue box contains several further options.
12.04.13 v3.5 129

CAT1000S
Related topics
Create section
7.5.28.6 Save contour: Further options
Click "Cutting plane" to display the cutting plane in the 3D-View. This view
allows you to visually check the dimensional position of the section or contour.
The function does not affect the calculation.
The contour file area displays the current contour file name with the extension
".gws".
Click "Save name" to define the location of your contour file.

To save the contour file in the current part directory, select the "Use part
directory" checkbox.
Click "Load contour in GEOPAK" to transfer the nominal contour to

GEOPAK. In GEOPAK, the nominal contour may be used for scan commands.
The 3D-View is refreshed.
the 3D-View. The values in the entry fields are reset to the status when the
dialogue box was opened.
If you click this button, the dialogue box will open again after the
measurement.
The probing direction can be changed.
Start and end point can be exchanged.
Change scanning direction: This button reverses the scanning direction.

Related topics
Create section
Save contour
130 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.5.28.7 Scan CNC

icon in the toolbar. Once a section has been created, it can be scanned (CNC).
Start
 Click "Scan CNC" in the "Action" area of the "Create section"

dialogue box.
 Click "Next".
 The "Scan CNC" dialogue box is displayed.
Requirements
The "Scanning (CNC)" function requires a scanning probing system. Example:
SP25 or MPP100.
"Scan CNC" dialogue box
 Select or deselect the button to create a closed or an open

contour.
 Select the section to be scanned. In the 3D-View, click on a section
in the CAD model or select a section from the "Name" pull-down
menu.
 To scan a closed contour, you need to set a start point. Click on the
selected section to set the start point.
 When scanning an open contour, you need to set both start point
and end point. Click on the selected section to set start point and
end point.
 The selected points can be edited in the entry fields.
 Preview: In the 3D-View, click "Generate" for a graphic preview of
the "Scan CNC" command.
 After selecting the first point, probing direction and scanning
direction are indicated in the 3D-View by arrows. The green arrow
indicates the scanning direction. The purple arrow indicates the
probing direction.
Probing direction and scanning direction

"Contour file" area (nominal contour)
Nominal contours can also be saved as a GWS file. Click "Save contour".
".gws".
12.04.13 v3.5 131

CAT1000S
Pitch: A small pitch will cause a high number of measuring points, a large pitch
will cause a smaller number of measuring points.
Click "Load contour in GEOPAK" to transfer the nominal contour to

GEOPAK. In GEOPAK, the nominal contour can be used for scan commands.
When selecting the "Additional edge point" check box,
there is an additional theoretical point at the end of each segment of the contour.
See also: Additonal Point at End of Edge
"Actual contour" area
In the "Actual contour" area you define the name and memory number of the
actual contour as well as the CNC parameters.
Safety dist.: The safety distance is the distance between the theoretical probing
point on the workpiece surface and the point at which the KMG switches from
movement speed to measuring speed.
Deflection: Measuring probes use a so-called deflection to ensure a reliable
contact to the workpiece. The control ensures that the deflection at each point of
the workpiece does not exceed the threshold set in the dialogue box.
Scan. speed: "Scanning speed" is the speed at which the CMM moves while
scanning.
Creating a scan command
Click "Finish".
The CNC scan command is created and transferred to GEOPAK.
Other options in the "Scan CNC" dialogue box
The "Scan CNC" dialogue box contains several further options.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC: Other options
Scan by leading contour
Scan by leading contour: Further options
Scan on curve
Scan on curve: Control points
Settings for control points
Scan on curve: Edit and insert
Scan on curve: Further options
7.5.28.8 Scan CNC: Further options
132 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Click "Cutting plane" to display the cutting plane in the 3D view. This view
measurement.
The probing direction can be adjusted.
During the scan you can use the "Clamp axis" function. Refer to the
GEOPAK topic "Clamp axis with MPP".
When scanning an open contour you can use the "Ignore axis" function.
Refer to the GEOPAK topic "Open contour".
You can select the "Probe compensation" function.
Contours can be saved and exported using the "Loop counter".
Select "Element finished" to finish the element after the measurement.
After saving a nominal contour as a GWS file, you can click on the "Load
countour in GEOPAK" button. Click "Load contour in GEOPAK" to submit
the nominal contour to GEOPAK. In GEOPAK, the nominal contour may be used
for scan commands.
Click "Load contour in GEOPAK" to submit the nominal contour to GEOPAK.

In GEOPAK, the nominal contour may be used for scan commands. Only in
this case you can create the "Tolerance contour" command in the "Scan CNC"
dialogue box.
To compare nominal and actual contour you can click on "Tolerance

contour". After closing the "Scan CNC" dialogue box in CAT1000PS by selecting
"Finish", the "Tolerance contour" dialogue box opens in GEOPAK. See also:
"Contours: General Information".
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
12.04.13 v3.5 133

CAT1000S

Scan CNC
Scan on curve
7.5.28.9 Scan by leading contour
toolbar.
The "Scanning by leading contour" dialogue box is displayed after the "Create
section" dialogue box. The "Scan by leading contour" dialogue box creates a
contour file and the scan command "Scan by leading contour" that is transferred
to GEOPAK.
Start
 Click "Scan by leading contour" in the "Action" area of the

"Create section" dialogue box.
 Click "Next".
 The "Scan by leading contour" dialogue box is displayed.
Requirements
The "Scan by leading contour" function requires a scanning probing system.
Example: SP25 or MPP100.
"Scan by leading contour" dialogue box
 Select or deselect the button to create a closed or an open

contour.
 Select the section from which you want to derive the contour file.
This contour file will be scanned at the end of the process. In the
3D-View, click on a section in the CAD model or select a section
from the "Name" pull-down menu.
selected section to set the start point.
end point.
 Preview: Click "Generate" to create a graphic preview of the
"Scanning by leading contour" command in the 3D-View.
 "Edge offset" checkbox: An edge offset may be entered when
creating open contours. The value applies to all active contour
segments.
134 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

direction are indicated in the 3D-View by arrows. The green arrow
probing direction.

"Contour file" area
".gws".

actual contour as well as the CNC parameters.
Safety dist.: "Safety distance" is the distance between the theoretical probing
point on the workpiece surface and the point at which the KMG switches from
movement speed to measuring speed.
Meas. len.: The measuring length limits the search path in probing direction, thus
avoiding an interference with the probing shaft. Please refer to: "Enter Z-Offset".
Click "Finish".
The "Scan by leading contour" command is created and transferred to GEOPAK.
Further options in the "Scanning by leading contour" dialogue box
The "Scanning by leading contour" dialogue box contains several further options.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
Scan CNC: Further options
12.04.13 v3.5 135

CAT1000S
Scan on curve
7.5.28.10 Scan by leading contour: Further options

Further options
measurement.
You may select the "Probe compensation" function.

contour". After closing the "Scan by leading contour" dialogue box in CAT1000PS
by selecting "Finish", the "Tolerance contour" dialogue box opens in GEOPAK.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
Scan on curve
136 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

7.5.28.11 Scan on curve
toolbar.
The "Scanning on curve" dialogue box opens after the "Create section" dialogue
box.
Requirements
The function "Scanning to curve" requires a REVO probing system (RSP
2).
Job
Create a scan command for a REVO probing system in the "Scanning on curve"
dialogue box. When you close the "Scanning on curve" dialogue box with
"Finish", the scan command is transferred to GEOPAK.
The result is a movement along a created section. All five axes of the REVO
probing system are used during the movement. The probe scans along the
section and always remains in contact with the workpiece surface.
Depending on the workpiece properties, the REVO probing system dynamically
adjusts the A or B angle without interrupting the surface scan. Scanning pitch and
scanning speed may also vary during movement. The surface scan is not
interrupted.
Start
 Click "Scan on curve" in the "Action" area of the "Create

section" dialogue box.
 Click "Next".
 The "Scan on curve" dialogue box is displayed.
"Scan on curve" dialogue box
 Select or deselect the corresponding button to create a closed

or an open contour.
 Select the section to be scanned. In the 3D-View, click on a section
in the CAD model or select a section from the "Name" pull-down
menu.
selected section to set the start point. The start point is the first
control point (CP). Refer to topic "Control points".
end point. The start point is the first checkpoint. The end point is the
last checkpoint.
12.04.13 v3.5 137

CAT1000S

direction are indicated by arrows in the 3D-View. The green arrow
probing direction.

Generate
Click "Generate" to create the scanning path of the "Scan on curve" command
with the control points (CPs). The scanning path is also displayed in the 3D-View.
The "Finish" button is activated only after clicking "Generate". Click "Finish" to
finish your work in the "Scan on curve" dialogue box (see below).
"Contour file" area (nominal contour)
The contour file area displays the current contour file (nominal contour) name
with the extension ".gws".

actual contour
Deviation: Enter the permissible deviation.
Tips
Pre-scan simulation: A simulation of the movement paths and the scan can
be started before the actual scanning takes place. Click "Start simulation".
Use the SpaceNavigator when using "Scanning on curve". Refer to:

"SpaceNavigator and "Scanning on curve"".
Click "Finish".
The "Scanning on curve" command is created and transferred to GEOPAK.
Two contours are transferred to GEOPAK: The GWS file (nominal contour) and
the contour to be measured (actual contour). The list of results and the part
program list contain three rows:
 Contour (Theoretical Element)
 Move in five axes
 Contour (actual contour that is being scanned/measured)
138 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
7.5.28.12 Scanning on curve: Control Points (CP)

Control points are created to control the REVO probing system. Probe position,
scanning speed and scanning pitch are defined.
Scanning parameters are defined at the control points.
Auto CP
"Auto CP" checkbox: This option is set by default.
When "Auto CP" and "Closed contour" are selected: The parameters of the first
control point and the parameters from the "Settings for control points" dialogue
box are used to create the control points for the path of a closed contour.
When "Auto CP" is selected and "Closed contour" is deselected: The parameters
of the first control point and the last control point as well as the parameters from
the "Settings for control points" dialogue box are used to create the control points
for the path of an open contour.
Manual creation of control points
When you deselect the "Auto CP" checkbox, the control point parameters in the
control point list are used to create the contour path.
Control point list
The control point list includes all current control points. The
control point list is linked to the control point display in the 3D-View. When you
select a control point in the list, the control point is highlighted in the 3D-View.
You can select a control point from the list and delete it by using the "Delete"
button.
Load CP
You can load a GWS file to edit the control points contained in it. For example,
you can reposition the control points or define additional control points.
12.04.13 v3.5 139

CAT1000S
Note
When loading a GWS file and the corresponding control points: The current
workpiece coordinate system must be identical with the one you used to create
the GWS file.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
Scan on curve
7.5.28.13 Settings for control points

The movement path of the REVO probing system can be optimised by changing
the parameters in the "Settings for control points" dialogue box.
Start
The "Settings for control points" dialogue box is displayed after the "Scanning on
curve" dialogue box.

Parameters
Control point spacing
140 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Curvature angle for new control point: The angles of the calculated measurement
point (surface normal) are continuously compared to the angle value you have
entered. The measurement points are calculated based on the minimum scan
pitch. Once the defined angle is reached, a control point is set. control points are
always set on calculated measurement points.
Probe orientation
Lean: The angle from the normal of the scan plane.
Lead: The angle from the surface tangent in the scan direction.
Scan speed
The minimum scan speed applies to the point of the tightest curvature.
The maximum scan speed applies to the point of the least curvature.
Scan pitch
The minimum scan pitch applies to the point of the tightest curvature.
The maximum scan pitch applies to the point of the least curvature.
Examples
Probe orientation: Lean and lead are 0 degree.
12.04.13 v3.5 141

CAT1000S
Probe orientation: Lean: The angle of the scan surface normal relative to
the probe orientation.
142 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Probe orientation: Lead: The angle of the surface tangent in scan direction,
relative to the probe orientation.
Scan pitch: Fig. 1
12.04.13 v3.5 143

CAT1000S
Scan pitch: Fig. 2: The minimum pitch is reduced as compared to Fig. 1.

Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
Scan on curve
7.5.28.14 Scan on curve: Edit and insert

Edit
Click on the "Edit" LED button to edit the parameters of a selected control point in
the control point list.
 For example, you may change angle A and angle B.
 Click "Apply" to save the new parameter for the selected control
point.
 The probe display in the 3D-View is refreshed.
Insert
Click on the "Insert" LED button to insert a new control point.
 Click on the current section. A control point will be inserted at this
point. When you click on a point that is not on the path between
start point and end point, the point is ignored. The new control point
will be added to the control point list at the correct position.
 In the control point list the new control point is highlighted. In
addition, the "Insert" button is activated. The values of the inserted
highlighted control point are displayed in the entry fields. However,
they cannot be edited.
144 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 The values for Angle A and Angle B of the inserted new point are
set to match the defined lean and lead angle. Scan speed and scan
pitch of the new point are set to the defined maximum values.
Example for editing:
Editing a control point.

 You have highlighted a control point in the control point list (point 2).
 The selected control point is displayed in red in the 3D-View (current
highlighting colour; see "Set model colour").
 The probe is shown at the control point.
 The probe angles can be adjusted with the entry fields. The probe
orientation in the 3D-View changes simultaneously.
 Click "Apply" to accept the changes of the selected control point.
 The selected control point then displays at the new position in the
3D-View.
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
Scan on curve
12.04.13 v3.5 145

CAT1000S

7.5.28.15 Scan on curve: Further options

General options
To change the view of the cutting plane in the 3D-View, click "Side of cutting
plane". This view allows you to visually check the dimensional position of the
section or contour. The function does not affect the calculation.
measurement.
Change scan direction: This button reverses the scan direction.
The probe direction can be mirrored at the scan plane.

Option in "Actual contour" area
You may select the "Probe compensation" function.

contour". After closing the "Scan on curve" dialogue box in CAT1000PS by
selecting "Finish", the "Tolerance contour" dialogue box opens in GEOPAK. See
also:
"Contours: General Information".
Related topics
Create section
Save contour
Scan CNC
146 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

Scan on curve
7.5.28.16 Additional Point at End of Edge (CAT1000S)

You can use the function "Additional edge point" if you want to make a contour
comparison and if there are points of discontinuity on the contour to be
measured. Points of discontinuity often exist in complex CAD models.
You create a contour with CAT1000S. Contour comparison takes place in
GEOPAK. The following examples illustrate the advantages of an additional edge
point.
Additional edge point
The "Additional edge point" check box is not

selected.
The points are distributed on the contour according to the pitch.
The "Additional edge point" check box is selected.

The points are distributed on the contour according to the pitch.
There are two additional points at the edges of the CAD model segments.
12.04.13 v3.5 147

CAT1000S
Actual contour without "Additional edge point" function
S 1 = CAD segment 1
S 2 = CAD segment 2
1 to 4 = contour points
C = actual contour without an additional edge point
The points are distributed on the contour according to the pitch. At the end of
segment 1 there is a point of discontinuity. The GEOPAK best fit algorithm
calculates the actual contour (C) for contour comparison based on the measured
points. The point of discontinuity cannot be taken into account by the GEOPAK
best fit algorithm. Consequently the contour comparison results in an incorrect
evaluation.
Theoretical contour with "Additional edge point" function
S 1 = CAD segment 1
S 2 = CAD segment 2
5 = additional edge point
148 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
1 to 4 = contour points
C = theoretical contour with an additional edge point
The points are distributed on the contour according to the pitch. There is an
additional edge point at the end of segment 1 (point of discontinuity). The
theoretical contour is conform to the complexity of the real workpiece. The point
of discontinuity is taken into account during contour comparison in GEOPAK.
Consequently the contour comparison results in a correct evaluation.
7.5.29 Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface
You can only use this function if you have installed both programs
CAT1000S and CAT1000P.
Start
In CAT1000S / CAT1000P you get to the dialogue "Intersection cylinder /
freeform surface" via the menu bar / Measure / Intersection cylinder – freeform
surface.
Task
Select a cylinder you have created with CAT1000P and a freeform surface.
The theoretical axis of the cylinder (of the CAD-model) and the axis of the
cylinder that has actually been measured are intersecting with the freeform
surface.
This results in
• an intersection point created by the intersection of the
theoretical cylinder axis with the freeform surface and
• an intersection point created by the intersection of the
measured cylinder axis with the freeform surface.
The deviation (position tolerance) of both intersection points is calculated.
Steps in the dialogue
 In the list box "Measured cylinder", select a cylinder that you have
previously measured with CAT1000P.
 The LED-symbol underneath "Surface" flashes.
 In the 3D-view, click on a freeform surface of the CAD-model.
 Enter the name of the freeform surface in the input box "Surface" if
there is no name yet.
 Under "Intersection of measured element" you can enter a name for
the intersection point.
 Under "Pos-Tol", enter the position tolerance.
 Confirm with "OK".
CAT1000S and GEOPAK
The command "Intersection of the cylinder axis with the freeform surface" is sent
by CAT1000S to GEOPAK and is stored in the part program.
The intersection is calculated in CAT1000S. The result is sent to GEOPAK. The
result is stored in GEOPAK as an element Point.
The command "Position tolerance" for this point is sent to GEOPAK. The point is
tolerated in GEOPAK. The nominal values (nominal data) are calculated from the
intersection of the theoretical cylinder with the freeform surface.
12.04.13 v3.5 149

CAT1000S
All commands that are sent to GEOPAK are temporarily stored in the commands
list in CAT1000S.
The buttons "Loop counter" are active when a loop is open in GEOPAK.
7.5.30 Measurement Procedure

Conditions
The CAD data are loaded and the windows are set up.
 Start the GEOPAK (single mode) via the menu bar / Measurement /
Single Mode.
 GEOPAK is displayed on top of the screen.
 You operate GEOPAK as usual. In each case, you must arrange or
call the co-ordinate system.
You click on the "Surface" icon and input in the following window, if
possible, a "Dialoguing" name and the storage number.
In the "Measurement Mode" window, enter the corresponding values (see details
of "Surface Measure Mode". There, the "Automatic Point Probing" is also
described.
Hint
Of course, it is possible to probe measurement points directly via the
joystick-box.
See also
See further details of topic "Windows and Measurement Points".
7.5.31 Information about Measurement Data

As soon as measurement data are available, you have the possibility to find more
information in the graphics.
 Click on this symbol.
 Then you point with the new mouse cursor (see left) on a
random measurement point and click on the right mouse key.
 Define Windows conventions yourself (menu bar / Settings /
Settings measurement point display).
 With the mouse cursor you can – as with the magnifier

symbol – draw a square around a section with measurement points.
The measurement points within this square are then selected.
 After selecting the points you can remove or add point highlights by
using the mouse functions and the shift key.
 With these selected points you have further options via the context
menu (see above).
 In the “Table of measurement points” the selected points are
represented in “red”.
150 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 Out of the context menu you can also highlight points. You will
always use this method when, for example, you want to delete one
or more groups of points.
 You can also highlight the measurement points in the table by
clicking on the appropriate line (column “Index”).
 By clicking on this symbol you leave the information mode.
7.5.32 Info Selected Measurement Point

As soon as measurement points are available in 3D-view, you have the possibility
to get further information for a measurement point or to change or complement
the information for a measurement point.
 Click the symbol "Pick meas. points with mouse".
 Then click with the new mouse pointer (ill. left) on any one of
the measurement points. This measurement point is now shown in
another color, depending on your previous settings (see Define
Model Colours).
 Click with the right mouse key on the selected measurement point.
The context menu is shown.
 In the pop-up menu, select the menu item "Info selected meas.
point". You get to the window "Info selected meas. point".
 To leave the information mode, click this symbol.
7.5.32.1 Dialogue "Info Selected Measurement Point"

Label
The label can be used for DMIS output and for user-defined info windows.
For detailed information about the topic "Info windows", refer to the manual
"UM_User_Def_Info_Win_g.pdf" (German) or UM_User_Def_Info_Win_e.pdf
(English). These documents are contained on the MCOSMOS-CD.
Restrict to name
Here, you can assign the measurement point to a certain surface / edge. Read
also the topic "Restrict Comparison".
Comment line
The comment line can be used for the user-defined info windows.
For detailed information about the topic "Info windows", refer to the manual
"UM_User_Def_Info_Win_g.pdf" (German) or UM_User_Def_Info_Win_e.pdf
(English). These documents are contained on the MCOSMOS-CD.
Your changes in the dialogue "Info selected measurement point" have

no effects on the part program.
12.04.13 v3.5 151

CAT1000S
7.5.33 Info. Selected Meas. Point (Table)

In the "Info. selected meas. point" dialogue box, you can define the column width
of the measurement points table.
Start
 On the "Settings" menu, click "Info. selected meas. point".
 The "Info. selected meas. point" dialogue box appears.
"Info. selected meas. point" dialogue box

Change column width
 To determine the column width, point to the vertical line of the
column heading frame. Left-click and move the line to the desired
column width.
 When you have determined the column width, click "OK".
 You can reset the values to the default values at any time. To select
the default values, click "Default" and then click "OK".
7.5.34 Probe Change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P

7.5.34.1 Probe Change in CAT1000PS
Task
In CAT1000S / CAT1000P as from version 2.3 you can perform a probe change.
Up to now, probe changes have only been possible in GEOPAK.
Technical prerequisites
CAT1000S / CAT1000P supports the change between different angles of a
swiveling probe.
A probe tree with own probe tip pointing towards the swiveling probe is displayed.
Preparation
Before you can work with the functions "Manual probe change" or "Automatic
probe change" in CAT1000S / CAT1000P,
• any and all probe data must have been defined in GEOPAK,
• the probes must have been gaged in GEOPAK, and
• the move box must have been defined.
152 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
For this, please read also the help topics

"Management of Probe Data" in GEOPAK and
"Dialogue: Settings for Machine Move".
Advantages of a probe change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P
 Before moving the CMM you can perform a visual check of the CMM
movement with a probe change. This visual check helps you to
detect and prevent potential collisions in the graphic representation.
 No switching between CAT1000S / CAT1000P and GEOPAK is
required.
Two options
Manual mode
You can define a probe change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P in the dialog "Probe
change". For information about this topic please refer to
Manual Probe Change
Automatic mode
For some elements you can carry out the probe change automatically.
For more information about this topic please refer to
Automatic Probe Change
Further related topics:
Dialog window "Probe Change"
Measurement Tasks with Automatic Probe Change
Probe Change: Background
Probe Change: 3D-View
7.5.34.2 Manual Probe Change

Introduction
In case of limited space (e.g. combination of big work piece and small CMM
table) an automatic probe change is often not possible.
 Click on the symbol in the symbol bar.

 The dialogue window “Probe change” is opened.
You can also open the dialogue window “Probe change” via the menu bar. In this
case you proceed as follows:
 Activate the function “Probe change” in the menu “Measurement”.
 The dialogue window “Probe change” is opened.
CAT1000P element measurement and probe change
You can open the dialogue window “Probe change” also while a CAT1000P
dialogue is already opened for an element measurement.
In this case the button “OK” of the CAT1000P dialogue for element measurement
is deactivated until the dialogue window “Probe change” has been closed again.
The command “Probe change” is added to the measurement commands of the
CAT1000P dialogue for element measurement.
12.04.13 v3.5 153

CAT1000S
The commands are executed as soon as you click on the OK-button in the
CAT1000P dialogue for element measurement.
For more information about this topic, please refer to "Dialogue Window Probe
Change".
Related topics
Probe Change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P (Introduction)
7.5.34.3 Automatic Probe Change

For general information about the topic "Probe change" in CAT1000S /
CAT1000P please refer to "Probe Change in CAT1000S / CAT1000P:
Introduction".
Activating the automatic probe change
The automatic probe change can at any time be activated or deactivated

using this button.
You can choose the setting that the automatic probe change is activated
immediately upon program start. For this, proceed as follows:
 Open the dialogue "Settings for measurement" via the menu
"Settings".
 Click the "Avoidance Path Generation" tab.
 Activate the automatic probe change by clicking on the checkmark
button "Presetting for the automatic probe change".
 The function "Automatic probe change" is now active.
 The probe is now automatically changed by CAT1000S /
CAT1000P. The probe change always takes place when the
direction of the current probe must be changed for the next
measurement task.
 The commands "Probe change" are automatically added to the
move.
In the dialogue window "Settings for measurement", you can furthermore define
that the probe change is executed on safety position.
Hint
You should avtivate the three options to avoid collisions.
Button “Automatic probe change”
If you notice during a measurement that you want to deactivate the function
“Automatic probe change” temporarily, then click on this symbol.
For more information about this topic please refer to the following topic:
"Measurement Tasks with Automatic Probe Change"
Related Topics
Button "Automatic probe change"
Manual Probe Change
Dialogue "Probe Change"
154 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

7.5.34.4 Dialogue "Probe Change"

Dialogue "Probe change"
If you decide on a manual probe change, you select the required probe via the list
in the dialogue "Probe change".
After you have activated the dialogue "probe change" CAT1000 creates the
movement path using the pre-defined options (read also: Settings for
measurement: Avoidance path).
This movement path is displayed in the 3D-view.
If you confirm this movement path after a visual control, CAT1000 transfers these
commands to GEOPAK.
How to proceed in the dialogue window "Probe change"
 In the dialogue "Probe change" you highlight the required probe in
the list.
 Confirm with "OK".
Related topics
Manual Probe Change
7.5.34.5 Measurement Tasks with Automatic Probe Change

An automatic probe change is possible for the following measurement tasks:
Grid measurement
The system automatically selects the probe whose angle is the most similar to
the direction of the surface normal of the next grid point.
Circle
the direction of the surface normal of the circle.
Cylinder
the direction of the cylinder axes.
Cone
the direction of the cone axes.
Please note
In any case you must have previously defined the required probes in
GEOPAK.
For the elements line, plane and sphere, an automatic probe change is not
possible.
12.04.13 v3.5 155

CAT1000S
When you confirm the dialogue for grid measurement, for circle measurement, for
cylinder measurement or for cone measurement in CAT1000S / CAT1000P, the
probe change is immediately executed.
An alert message is given before the probe change is executed. An alert
message of GEOPAK that a probe change is taking place, is not displayed.
For more detailed information about this topic please refer to "Probe Change in
CAT1000S / CAT1000P: Background"
Related topics
Manual Probe Change
Dialogue Window “Probe Change"
7.5.34.6 Probe Change: Background

Definition: Swivelling range (rotating sphere)
The swivelling range of the probe (rotating sphere) is determined using the length
from the probe tip to the centre of the rotation. The swivelling range is
represented in the 3D-view as a transparent partial sphere.
Activating the options “Probe change above the clearance height” and “Set
clearance height according to direction of selected probe” has the following
effects:
 The command “Move CMM relatively” in direction of the former
clearance height is transferred to GEOPAK so that the swivelling
range of the probe touches the former clearance height.
 Is the clearance height changed by the probe change, the command
“Move CMM relatively” in direction of the new clearance height is
transferred so that the swivelling range of the probe lies minimally
above the new clearance height.
 Now the probe is changed.
 The direction of the clearance height is then defined on the basis of
the direction of the changed-in probe nearest to the main axes.
On the basis of the used move box the value of the clearance height
is determined. The move box is a box that encloses the work piece.
(see also "Move Machine").
7.5.34.6.1 Special cases

 When the tracer is positioned with an angle of 45° to the main axes,
CAT1000S / CAT1000P uses the axes in the sequence Z, Y, X.
 Has the new probe almost the opposite direction of the old probe,
the following procedure is performed:
• A CMM movement around the work piece is performed.
• If one side of the move box is not permitted the opposite side of
the move box is used.
• Are several possibilities available, the values of the move box
are used in the sequence X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, Z Min, Z
Max.
• The probe is changed in the middle of the move, e.g. in the
position X Max - X Min / 2.
156 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
In case that the clearance height can not be automatically established, this has
the following effects:
 An error message is displayed: “Clearance height can not
automatically be set”. You confirm with “OK”.
 No probe change is executed and the CMM does not move to
clearance height.
 If you want to continue the measurement nevertheless, confirm the
CAT1000P dialogue that you have just opened.
Avoid error message
You can avoid the occurrence of the error message “Clearance height can not
automatically be set” in many cases.
All “Min” and “Max” checkmark buttons of the three levels in the dialogue window
“Settings for Moving Machine” are activated in the standard setting.
However, this setting is not always useful.
In many cases you can avoid the occurrence of an error message by partially
deactivating the “Min” and “Max” checkmark buttons of the three levels in the
dialogue window “Settings for Moving Machine”.
For this, please refer to the help topic
"Dialogue: Settings for Moving Machine").
Example:
Is the work piece positioned on the table of the CMM in a way that the XY-level of
the work piece corresponds to the XY-level of the CMM, you have to deactivate
the minimum value for Z.
Is the option “Probe change above clearance height” deactivated, this has the
following effects:
The probe change is performed without prior movement of the CMM.
In this case please make sure for yourself that no collision can occur.
Related topics
Manual Probe Change
Dialogue window “Probe Change"
7.5.34.7 Probe Change: 3D-View

You can have the swivelling range (rotating sphere) displayed in any transparent
colour.
For this please refer to "Settings for Probe Display".
The definition for “Swivelling range” you find under "Probe Change: Background".
The probe change is displayed in the 3D-view as follows:
 The move to the probe change is represented like the moves in
CAT1000P.
 The 3D-view displays the possible swivelling range transparently.
The swivelling range is the possible range within which the
swivelling during probe change takes place.
 Furthermore the new probe is displayed after the rotation.
12.04.13 v3.5 157

CAT1000S
Related topics
Manual Probe Change
Dialogue Window “Probe Change"
7.5.35 Sweep-Scan in CAT1000

7.5.35.1 Sweep Scan in CAT1000
The "Sweep Scan" CAT1000 dialogue is reached via the CAT1000 menu
bar / Measure / Sweep Scan or by clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
If the "Sweep Scan" icon is not displayed in the toolbar, configure the
CAT1000 toolbar. Read the topic "Configuring user interface" for this.
Task
You can scan surfaces or adjacent surfaces using the special "Sweep
Scan" scanning method. The probing system undulates over the area to be
scanned for this scanning method.
Requirements
Your CMM must be configured as follows so that you can work with this dialogue:
 Renishaw Revo probing system with RSP2
 UCC2 CMM controller
 UCC Server (Renishaw I++ Server)
Specify scan patch
The patch of the scanning process is defined by at least two zones (cross
sections). You can expand the scanning patch by adding another patch (cross
section) to an already defined scanning patch.
Limit point 1
Start point
Limit point 2
158 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
End point
Hint
You specify the individual cross sections of the scan patches using points
on the CAD model which you pick by mouse click in learn mode.
The collision check is activated up to the first point. The collision check is
not activated for the sweep scanning.
Process
 The LED icon before "Limit point 1" flashes.
 You click on the CAD model to specify the "Limit point 1".
 The LED icon before "Start point" flashes.
 You click on the CAD model to specify the "Start point".
 The LED icon before "Limit point 2" flashes.
 You click on the CAD model to specify the "Limit point 2".
 With these three points, you have now created the complete start
patch. This start patch is displayed in the window in the middle of
the "Sweep Scanning" dialogue.
 You now proceed analogously to create the end patch. This end
patch is displayed in the window in the middle of the "Sweep
Scanning" dialogue.
 You can create further end patches by repeating the work
operations described above. All patches (start patch and end patch /
patches are displayed in the window in the middle of the "Sweep
Scanning" dialogue. If you create several "end patches", these are
numbered.
 Change probing direction: You can change the probing

direction during the creation of a patch. The direction of the
complete movement path is reversed.
Edit patch
You can edit the patches (start patch and end patch / patches after you have
created them. Select the desired patch in the list and activate the "Edit" check
box for this.
Correcting probe angle: In the 3D-View, you can check whether the probe angles
are ideal and so that there is no risk of collision. If necessary, you can change the
probe angles A and B using the arrow buttons.
Change probing direction: You can change the probing direction while
editing a patch. The direction of the complete movement path is reversed.
Click on "Apply" when you have finished making changes.
Further options
Reset dialogue values: Click on "Reset dialogue values" to discard all

changes.
The dialogue will restart after finish for a new element if you activate this
button.
12.04.13 v3.5 159

CAT1000S
Auto Add (insert): This function is activated as standard. If this option is

deactivated, you must append additional patches to the existing patches
separately using the "Add" button.
Use middle point: If you activate this option, the starting point is automatically
placed in the center of both limit points.
Generate
You can click on the "Generate" button if you have defined a starting patch and
one or more ending patches.
The movement path is now displayed using a green line. This is a contour.
You can change the name, the pitch (in model units), the point spacing and the
scanning speed in the bottom area of the dialogue.
Confirm dialogue
Click on "OK" when you have entered the required data in the dialogue. A
contour is generated and transmitted to GEOPAK. The scanning starts. The
sweep scanning command is transmitted to GEOPAK and inserted in the part
program.
Settings
You reach the "Settings for Sweep Scan" dialogue by clicking on the "Settings"
button.
Other topics:
SpaceNavigator and Sweep Scan
Dialogue "Settings for Sweep Scan"
7.5.35.2 Sweep Scan in CAT1000 / Settings

Start
The "Settings for sweep scan" dialogue is reached via the Settings button on the
"Sweep scan" dialogue.
The "Sweep Scan" CAT1000 dialogue is reached via the CAT1000 menu
bar / Measure / Sweep Scan or by clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
Read the topic "Sweep Scan in CAT1000" before you read the topic "Sweep
Scan in CAT1000 / Settings".
Settings for Sweep Scan
You enter the angle from the surface tangent in scan direction (Lead) under
"Probe Orientation".
Other topics:
SpaceNavigator and Sweep Scan
Sweep Scan in CAT1000
7.5.36 Change probe by angle (CAT1000)

7.5.36.1 Change probe by angle (CAT1000)
Start
You reach the "Change probe by angle" dialogue using the CAT1000 menu
bar / "Measure" / "Change probe by angle" or by clicking on the icon.
If the "Change probe by angle" icon is not displayed in the toolbar, configure
the CAT1000 toolbar. Read the topic "Configuring user interface" for this.
160 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Purpose
In this dialogue, you change the probe position by entering the probe angle or
using the direction vector in space. Thus, you can select the ideal probe positions
for the measurement at a specified point of the workpiece.
Example: You want to measure a feature for a complex workpiece. A probe
change is necessary for the probing path to the feature. The "Change probe by
angle" dialogue and the graphical display in the 3D-View simplify this task.
Process
 You input the parameters in the dialogue.
 Confirm with "OK". The probe is swivelled into the starting position.
The "Change probe by angle" part program command is transmitted
to GEOPAK from CAT1000.
 If you use "Move machine after probe change": you specify the
target position. The probe is swivelled into the starting position. The
machine moves to the target position. The "Change probe by angle"
part program command and the "Move machine" part program
command are transmitted from CAT1000 to GEOPAK.
Options
You have two options for "Change probe by angle":
 Swivel by probe angle. The angles refer directly to the A and B
angles of the probe head.
 Swivel by probing direction. The swivelling is performed by direction
vector in the space here. The vector refers to the co-ordinate
system of the workpiece.
You specify the display of the vector in the GEOPAK dialogue "Input
characteristics". Read the topic "Input characteristics" for this.
Example: The co-ordinate system is rotated in a loop for the

measurement of a turbine blade in order to perform the same tasks
for all blades of the turbine. In doing so, the probe is automatically
swivelled in the correct direction because the direction vector is
transmitted to the current co-ordinate system.
Probe
The properties of the probe can be found under "Probe (Change probe by angle /
CAT1000)".
Probe angle
Activate the selection button in order to use "Probe angle".

 Input the A angle.
 Input the B angle.
 Confirm with "OK".
 If you have not defined this probe the dialogue "Define probe" is
opened. Define the probe.
 The probe swivels in the 3D-View.
 The "Change probe by angle" part program command is transmitted
to GEOPAK from CAT1000.
 The probe of your CMM swivels.
12.04.13 v3.5 161

CAT1000S
Hint
Examples for probes which you can use in the "Change probe by angle" dialogue
can be found under "Overview of the probes (Change probe by angle /
CAT1000)"
Probing direction
Activate the selection button in order to use "Probe direction".

Input the direction vector. You specify the display of the vector in the GEOPAK
dialogue "Input characteristics" (GEOPAK / File / Settings / Input characteristics).
The direction vector is displayed either as angle or as cosine. Read the topic
"Input characteristics" for this.
Confirm with "OK".
The probe swivels in the 3D-View. The "Change probe by angle" part program
command is transmitted to GEOPAK from CAT1000. The probe of your CMM
swivels.
Change probing direction: The probing direction is reversed and the probe
angles are reversed.
Selection mode
You can also specify the data in the "Change probe by angle" dialogue using
mouse clicks on the CAD model. Select the desired "selection mode" in advance.
The input fields under "Probe angle" or "Probe direction" are filled in
automatically when you click on the CAD model.
Pick surface point: The probe position is determined based on the surface
normal of the point clicked on.
Pick edge: The probe position is determined based on the direction of the
selected edge.
Pick new circle: The probe position is determined based on the normal of
the circular plane.
Change probing direction: The probing direction is calculated from the

surface normal of the surface of the CAD model. This is the surface on which the
selected point is located. You can reverse this. The probe angles are reversed.
Move machine after probe change
Input a target position. The machine moves to the target position after the
probe change.
The virtual CMM applies the current position of machine in the dialogue
when you activate the "Position of machine" button.
Start simulation
Start the simulation if you want to check the probe change in the 3D-View.
Other buttons
Calculate: You can update the 3D-View using the "Calculate" button if you
have changed parameters in the input fields.
The dialogue will restart after finish for a new element if you activate this
button.
162 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
SpaceNavigator
You can use the "SpaceNavigator" control unit in this dialogue. Read the topic
SpaceNavigator and "Change probe by angle" for this.
See also:
Probes (Change probe by angle (CAT1000)
Overview of the probes (Change probe by angle /(CAT1000)
7.5.36.2 Probes (Change probe by angle / CAT1000)

Rigid probes and star probes cannot be used for "Change probe by angle".
For example, you can use the "Change probe by angle" dialogue for the following
probes. Note the respective special features of the probes:
 PH9/10
 REVO
 PHS1
There are two types of probes which you can use for "Change probe by angle".
There are probes which can be swivelled to any angle after the probe head has
been calibrated. Example for these probes: REVO in combination with RSP2.
There are probes where each angle position must be recalibrated and numbered.
Examples for these probes: PH9/10 and REVO in combination with RSP3.
If you use, e.g. the PH9/10, the "Define probe" dialogue will be displayed if you
have selected a probe in the "Change probe by angle" dialogue which has not yet
been defined.
Note
If you use the PH9 or PH10 and the I++ Server, the "Define probe"
dialogue will not be displayed. The probes must have been defined
previously. Read the topic "I++" for this.
See also:
Change probe by angle (CAT1000)
Overview of the probes (Change probe by angle /(CAT1000)
7.5.36.3 Overview of the probes (Change probe by angle / CAT1000)

The probe head which you are currently using limits the input range in degrees
for the A angle and the B angle.
PH9/10
from to Pitch
Angle A 0.0 105.0 7.5
Angle B -180.0 180.0 7.5
REVO
from to Pitch
Angle A -0.5 120 infinitely variable
Angle B no limit no limit infinitely variable
PHS1
from to Pitch
Angle A -184.0 184.0 infinitely variable
Angle B -184.0 184.0 infinitely variable
See also:
Change probe by angle (CAT1000)
12.04.13 v3.5 163

CAT1000S
Probes (Change probe by angle / CAT1000)
7.5.37 Move in five axes (CAT1000)

7.5.37.1 Move in five axes (CAT1000)
The "Move in five axes" CAT1000 dialogue is reached via the CAT1000
menu bar / Measure / Move in five axes or by clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
If the "Move in five axes" icon is not displayed in the toolbar, configure the
toolbar. Read the topic "Configuring toolbar" for this.
Requirements
Your CMM must be configured as follows so that you can work with this dialogue:
 Renishaw Revo probing system with RSP2
 UCC2 CMM controller
 UCC Server (Renishaw I++ Server)
Purpose
In contrast to moving the three machine axes and two probe head axes (e.g.
PH10) at separate times, you can move in five axes with rotating/swivelling probe
heads (e.g. with the Renishaw Revo probing system).
This means that movement in the three machine axes and in the two swivel head
axes is done simultaneously while moving to the target position. The advantage
as compared with older index probing heads is that movement is not first in the
machine axes and then the probing head afterwards. Instead the traversing
movements take place simultaneously. Therefore you save time due to the
concurrency.
See the topic "Move Machine(CAT1000)" for information about the principles.
Input
Either you input the co-ordinates of the target position and the A angle (-5 to 120
degrees) and the B angle (-180 to 180 degrees)
or you input the co-ordinates of the target position and the probing direction.
The machine control decides whether to rotate left or right for swivelling the
B angle. You must also ensure that the ranges of both rotation directions
are not blocked by obstacles.
Probing direction
Activate the selection button in order to use "Probing direction".

Input the direction vector. The vector is relative to the part coordinate system
while the probe angles are relative to the probe head. The probe is swivelled in
the range using this direction vector. You specify the display of the vector in the
GEOPAK dialogue "Input characteristics" (GEOPAK / File / Settings / Input
characteristics). The direction vector is displayed either as angle or as cosine.
Read the topic "Input characteristics" for this.
Confirm with "OK".
The probe swivels in the 3D-View. The "Move in five axes" part program
command is transmitted to GEOPAK from CAT1000. The probe of your CMM
swivels.
164 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Hint
Start the simulation if you want to check the probe change in the 3D-
View.
Other topics:
Moving in five axes - options (CAT1000)
CAT1000: SpaceNavigator and Moving in five axes
7.5.37.2 Move in five axes - options (CAT1000)
The "Move in five axes" CAT1000 dialogue is reached via the CAT1000
menu bar / Measure / Move in five axes or by clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
Options
Recalculate point: Click on this button if you have changed values in the
dialogue manually. The target position is recalculated and displayed in the 3D-
View.
"Recalculate and show": Activate this function, if the movement path from
the current machine position to the intermediate position is to be updated
"Recalculate and show" button deactivated: You can input data if you
deactivate this button. The input fields in the dialogue are updated. However, the
3D-View remains unchanged.
Example: If you use the collision check, the continuous updating would require a
lot of computing time. Therefore, it is recommended to deactivate the
"Recalculate and display" button in this case.
The dialogue will restart after finish for a new element if you click on this
button.
The current machine position is applied when you click on the "Position of
machine" button.
CMM in target position. You switch between start and target position with
this button.
Other topics:
Moving in five axes (CAT1000)
CAT1000: SpaceNavigator and Moving in five axes
7.5.38 Avoiding Collisions

7.5.38.1 Avoiding Collisions (CAT1000PS)
To avoid collisions, CAT1000 offers the following options:
 For information about the collision check in CAT1000, refer to
"Collision Check (CAT1000)".
 For information about the clearance height in CAT1000, refer to
"Clearance Height (CAT1000PS)".
Tips
 Specify correct CNC parameters.
 Specify intermediate positions or activate the collision check.
12.04.13 v3.5 165

CAT1000S
7.5.39 Change Probe Tree in CAT1000

Features in CAT1000
The "Change probe tree" function in CAT1000 basically corresponds to the same
function in GEOPAK. When using the "Change probe tree" function in CAT1000,
however, you should be aware of the following points:
 CAT1000 does not offer a preview of the movement path in 3D
view.
 Collision control will not take place.
 The probe tree change must be confirmed in GEOPAK.
Task
Changing of the probe tree is done automatically. If you dispose of a manual rack
you have to follow several steps. For more detailed information refer to " Manual
rack ".
The automatic change of probe tree will be realized from where the probe tree is
situated at the moment you want to change it. The probe tree takes the direct
way to the port. This direct way will only be selected if in the "CMM
SystemManager" in the "MachineBuilder" the "Disable inline safety position"
check box is checked. To avoid collisions ensure free access to the probe tree.
Special attention has to be paid to the warning messages.
 To start the probe tree change choose Probe / Change configuration
from the menu bar. Enter the number of the probe configuration and
confirm.
 In single / learn mode, you get the message "Attention: Probe
Configuration has Changed". Now you have a chance to check
whether the rack can be reached without collision; otherwise, you
can correct the actual position by the joysticks. Do not forget to
define these positions for the repeat mode by pressing the "GOTO
button" of the joystick box.
 After the probe tree has been changed, you get the window for the
selection of the actual probe; the number of the configuration is
written in the headline. Then, proceed as for the probe selection.
If you have worked, before, with an indexable probe, you get an additional
message "Attention: Probe will move!". Make sure that the probe can be
rotated without collision (see above).
Additional information
If the probe configuration has not been calibrated yet, you get the error message
"Probe # 1 not Defined". After you confirm it, you get the window for "Probe Data
Management" (the number of the configuration appears in the headline). General
rule: all probes have a common reference probe. This is "Probe no. 1" of "Probe
tree no.1". This probe must be calibrated first. For more detailed information refer
to the Probe Data Management.
The probe tree no. corresponds to the port no. of the rack.
Numbering for two racks
If you dispose of two racks of the same type (e.g. two SCR200), the ports in the
respective rack must be exactly specified. In the first rack numbering starts with
number 01 and in the second rack numbering starts with number 11.
166 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Ancient kind of counting

The following counting can still be used because of the compatibility with
GEOPAK 3 in connection with your part programs from this version:
If you use a second rack the probe tree number is the sum of the port number of
the second rack and the number of ports of the first rack. Example: The first rack
has six ports and in rack 2 you use tree number 2, then the calculation is as
follows: 6+2=8.
If the rack has not been determined yet, you get an error message.
For more detailed information refer to " Combination of Racks / Introduction ".
7.6 Data Evaluation

7.6.1 Select Element
Dialogue “Select element”
To get to the dialogue “Select element” use the menu bar “Highlight” /
“Measurement points of an element”.
Task
The function “Select element” simplifies the selection of a certain element.
 Each freeform surface element has a name that you assign before
you create the freeform surface.
 This name is displayed next to the number of the element and the
name of the element type in the dialogue “Select element”.
 These different plane names simplify the selection of a certain
freeform surface.
Application examples
You can use the function “Select element”,
 when you want to blind out measurement points (e.g. before a
printout) or
 when you want to perform a best fit.
For more information please also refer to the help topic "Best Fit in CAT1000S".
Example “Select element” for best fit
You want to select a freeform surface in order to perform a best fit. Please
proceed as follows:
 You can recognise the desired freeform surface element number or
by the name of the element “Freeform surface”.
 You select all elements “Freeform surface” that are not be used.
 Those freeform surfaces you do not want to use for the best fit, you
highlight in the list of the dialogue "Select element” (“Shift” key and
mouse clicks).
 You confirm with “OK”.
 In the menu “Highlight” you activate the function “Blind out
highlighted points”.
If you perform the best fit now, the blinded-out points are not used.
12.04.13 v3.5 167

CAT1000S
Line in dialogue “Select element”

A line in the list in the dialogue “Select element” looks like this (example element
freeform surfaces):
Number of the element and name of the element type (in brackets); name of the
freeform surface.
7.6.2 Define Co-ordinate System

If you have parts where the datum definition depends on regular elements, you
can define your co-ordinate system in GEOPAK, as usual. Then, CAT1000S
automatically executes the alignment.
If you have parts that you have measured in the car co-ordinate system, we
recommend the following procedure:
 To "Search Model Points", click on the symbol.
 The mouse pointer is represented in this mode as hair cross

with the letter " i ".
 Click on the position that you want to measure.
 The program indicates a grey point with the X, Y and Z-coordinates.
 Open with the right mouse button near the point a context menu,
click on the "Info. Selected Model Point" function and come to the
corresponding window.
 Input the number and the name under which you want to find the
point in GEOPAK.
 Click on the "Define as Element for GEOPAK" icon.

Repeat the last three steps for all points. You do not have to close the window in
between.
RPS Alignment in GEOPAK
 Now, change to GEOPAK and
 measure these points with the real part.
 Call the "RPS Alignment" (see details of "Alignment with RPS.
 Instead of typing the nominal values, click in the "RPS

Alignment" window on the icon shown to the left.
 In the "Select Element" window, choose the corresponding point
from CAT1000S and confirm.
For the rest, proceed as described under "Alignment with RPS" in the GEOPAK
documentation.
7.6.3 Shift / Rotate CAD Model
This function is not learnable. This means: If surface measurement points

have already been measured, this function is deactivated.
If you want to shift and rotate the CAD model

 select “File / Shift / Rotate Model” via the menu bar.
168 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 In the following window, you input in the text fields next to the X, Y
and Z axes the value(s) by which shifting shall be realized.
 In the text field besides the “Rotation”, you input the

angle and click on the axis (see icons) around which rotation shall
be realized.
If you want to shift and rotate and enter the corresponding values in one
process into the window, first shift and then rotate.
If you want to rotate firstand shift then, you must become active twice.
 First, you only rotate and confirm.

 Call the window once again, shift and confirm.
 You will get other values as described above.
Shift and Rotate in CAT1000S and GEOPAK
Use this function to move and rotate the model – and not the GEOPAK co-
ordinate system. After the start of GEOPAK you will also need to align the co-
ordinate system in GEOPAK.
Hint
Pay attention to the label!
Example: If you shift the model by +5 mm in Z-direction, you have to shift
the co-ordinate system in GEOPAK in Z-direction by –5 mm.
Don’t directly shift the co-ordinate system by the theoretic value in

GEOPAK, but re-measure the origin.
Example: You want to shift the origin of the model from one bore to an other one.
Supposed the distance between the bores is 10 mm in X-direction, then continue
as follows:
 Shift the model in CAT1000S by 10 mm in X-direction.
 In GEOPAK, you measure the second bore and place the origin in
the measured bore (the measured circle).
If you proceed in an other way, there will be an error, which is as big as the
distance at the part varies from the CAD model.
7.6.4 Comparison with Measurement Data

CAT1000S knows two types of measurement data:
 Measurement values that are used for the evaluation of the surface
form (deviation).
 Values to measure borders.
 Furthermore, your protocol can get position tolerances of GEOPAK.
12.04.13 v3.5 169

CAT1000S
When starting CAT1000S, first of all, surface points are expected. For
changing to measurement of borders, click on the "Border Section” icon (picture
to the left).
With the "Surface Measurement" icon (picture to the left), you can change
again to surface measurement.
It is also possible to transmit the position tolerances from GEOPAK to

CAT1000S. Click on the icon (see vertical outline pointer to the left) in the
"Nominal Actual Comparison: Element Circle" dialogue window. The values are
considered in the protocol and can then be used for calculations (e.g. best fit).
See details of the topic " Further Options of Nominal Actual Comparison
7.6.4.1 Transmit Measurement Results

There are several options to transmit the measurement data for the comparison
in CAT1000S.
 GEOPAK single mode as online measurement
 GEOPAK repeat mode, also online measurement
 Data from an ASCII file (archived data). It is possible to
automatically archive measurement data for CAT1000S out of
GEOPAK. You can execute this function via the "Output / Archive
Measurement Data (CAT1000S)".
 Data of the last GEOPAK measurement for the relearn mode
7.6.5 Best Fit

Background
The best fit calculations take a lot of time. The point cloud as a whole is shifted
and / or rotated until the optimal state will be achieved.
 For the criterion for the „optimal" state we take the Gauss criterion.
 This means that the sum of the squared distances comes to a
minimum.
 The deviations are the distances of the actual points to the ideal
surface.
Process
The process moves on step by step:
After each step, the assignment of the actual points to the individual surfaces is
redefined.
The steps are executed until the achieved improvements fall below a certain limit.
Dialogue "Best Fit"
In CAT1000S
To activate the dialogue "Best fit" use the menu bar / Measure / Best fit" or
click this icon.
In GEOPAK / Learn mode
Activate the dialogue "Best fit for surface" via the menu bar / Tolerance /
Best fit for surface or click this icon.
170 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Options in the Dialogue "Best Fit"

You can determine for the best fit
• whether CAT1000S can shift and rotate in all directions (this will
result in the smallest deviations), or
• whether only defined axes are allowed.
If only the rotation is allowed, you can also type in the point around which the
rotation takes place.
This point is called the reference point.
This is especially useful if the origin (this is the point of rotation) is located far
from the actual part. This is mainly true for parts, which are defined in a RPS (car
co-ordinate system).
The results of the best fit are displayed in the graphic protocol and in the
standard protocol.
Confirm best fit
If you activate the check box for "Confirm best fit calculation", the dialogue
"Accept best fit results" is shown after the best fit.
In this dialogue you can either accept or cancel the results of the best fit.
 If you accept the best fit results, the results of the current best fit are
stored.
 If you cancel the best fit results, the current best fit is not stored and
the results of the best fit executed before the last best fit are
restored.
The option "Confirm best fit" is stored in the GEOPAK CMM learn mode.
See further details under "Normal or Extended Precision".
7.6.6 Dialogue "Accept Best Fit Results"

In the dialogue "Accept best fit results" you can either accept or cancel the best fit
results.
 If you accept the results of the best fit, these results are stored.
 If you cancel the results of the best fit, the current calculation is not
stored and the results of the best fit executed before the last best fit
are restored.
For detailed information about the topic "Best fit in CAT1000S", read the following
topics:
"Best Fit".
"Normal or Extended Precision".
7.6.7 Normal or Extended Precision

As each step requires some time, we distinguish between a "Normal" best fit,
and a best fit with "Extended Precision".
 The "Normal" best fit is interrupted as soon as an improvement of
1mm of negative deviation is reached.
 At best fit with extended precision, the calculations are repeated as
long as no improvement can be achieved any more.
Change settings
With administrator's access rights, you can change these settings by
 changing to the PartManager,
12.04.13 v3.5 171

CAT1000S
 clicking on "Settings / Defaults for Programs".

 Clicking in the dialogue window "Settings" on the button "CAT1000S
/ CAT1000P".
 The dialogue window "CAT1000S Settings" opens.
 Activate in the section "Settings for best fit" either the function "Best
fit with higher accuracy" or "Normal best fit".
You must know:
 The results (shift and rotation) are always given related to the origin.
 After a best fit, the actual co-ordinate system has changed. This
change is also effective in GEOPAK.
If you only rotate, and if you have entered a point of rotation, the result may
look as if both, a shift and a rotationhad taken place. The reason for this
is that: the results are recalculated respecting the origin. This is necessary,
as otherwise the results are not comparable.
7.6.8 Reset Best Fit Results

Start
To get to the function "Reset best fit results" go to the menu bar and the menu
"Measurement".
Task
When starting the function "Reset best fit results" the corresponding dialogue
opens.
If you confirm "Reset best fit results" with "Yes", all best fit results for the whole
measurement are reset.
If you have executed other best fits before, all results are reset.
The reset of the best fit results has effects on
 the result window and
 all outputs that can be printed, e.g. protocol output and graphic
report.
The function "Reset best fit results" does not have the effect that the best
fit is completely cancelled.
Only the results of the last best fit (shift and rotate values) are deleted. The
changed co-ordinate system in GEOPAK remains. Also the shifts of the
measurement points already performed remain unchanged.
7.6.9 Move/Rotate Measurement Points

This topic is relevant to CAT1000S only.
This function is not learnable.
172 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Task
If a bestfit does not lead to the desired result, use the function "Move/rotate
measurement points".
Example
 Execute a bestfit after a measurement.
 After the bestfit, only one measurement point is outside of tolerance.
 However, all points should be within the tolerance range.
 To achieve this, use the function "Move/rotate measurement points".
Dialogue
To get to the dialogue "Move/rotate measurement points", proceed via the

menu bar / Measurement / Move/rotate measurement points.
 In the subsequent dialogue, enter the value(s) of the desired
movement into the text boxes next to the axis X, Y and Z.
 In the text box next to "Rotate" enter the angle and

click the corresponding axis (see symbols) around which the
rotation shall take place.
If you want to move and rotate and if you enter both corresponding values
in the window in one go, the system always executes the movement first
and then the rotation.
So if you wish to rotate first and move afterwards, you will need to proceed
in two steps.
 First, only rotate and confirm.

 Second, call up the window again, move and confirm.
7.6.10 Tolerance & Recalculate
In the "Tolerance & Recalc" dialogue box you can change the tolerances
for free form surface, the position tolerances and the distance along the probing
direction.
12.04.13 v3.5 173

CAT1000S
Sheet thickness: You can enter a "Sheet thickness" for sheet metal parts.
With sheet metal parts it happens, for example, that the form of the "lower side" is
indicated, probing however takes only place on the "upper side". In this case
enter the sheet thickness. The sheet thickness will then be compensated in the
tolerance comparisons.
If the upper side of a sheet metal part is defined by the CAD data, however, the
compression mould of the lower side is to be measured, enter the sheet
thickness and select the "Form modeling" check box. The effect is the same as if
you had entered a (not permitted) negative sheet thickness.
7.6.11 Tolerance Comparison Contour in CAT1000

7.6.11.1 Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S)
Use the "Tolerance comparison contour" function to check the deviation of an
actual contour to a nominal contour.
In CAT1000S, you can use the function "Create section" to create a section on
the CAD model. This section is used as nominal contour for the "Tolerance
comparison contour" in GEOPAK.
The results of the "Tolerance comparison contour", that are calculated in
GEOPAK, are displayed in CAT1000S in 3D view directly on the CAD model. See
also:
Display of tolerance comparison contour
Conditions
 Nominal and actual contour have to be in the GEOPAK main
memory before the tolerance comparison is carried out.
 The contours must be available in the same projection plane.
GEOPAK obtains the nominal contour from the CAD model in
CAT1000S.
How to open the "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box in
CAT1000S
 Open the "Evaluate GD&T Wizard" dialogue box (CAT1000S

menu bar / Tools / Evaluate GD&T Wizard). Or click the button on
the toolbar.
 Click the "Contour" button in the "Evaluate GD&T Wizard"

dialogue box.
 The "Tolerance comparison contour" button in the "Evaluate

GD&T wizard" dialogue box is now available.
 Click the "Tolerance comparison contour" button in the

"Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box.
 The "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box appears.
174 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
"Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box in CAT1000S

How to define the nominal and actual contour
 Select the nominal contour from the text box.
 Select the actual contour from the text box.
Further work steps

 Pitch
 Comparison (direction of vector)
 Best fit
 Width of tolerance
 Offset
 Scale for error display
Further options in the "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box
If you click the "Display tolerance comparison contour in 3D view" button, the
"Tolerance comparison contour" is displayed in 3D view in CAT1000S and in
GEOPAK. See also:
Display of tolerance comparison contour
If you select the "Automatic projection plane" button, the scanned contour
points are projected on the nearest main plane.
12.04.13 v3.5 175

CAT1000S
If you do not select the "Automatic projection plane" button, a projection does not
take place.
If you want to use loops for the tolerance comparison contour, see also:
Loops
Contours in tree view in CAT1000S
Each measured contour, for which a tolerance comparison has been carried out
in the "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box, is listed in tree view in
CAT1000S. See also:
Tree view and "Tolerance comparison contour" in CAT1000S
Protocols
For the contours in CAT1000S The ProtocolDesigner offers special templates.
See:
ProtocolDesigner
Example for a ProtocolDesigner template for contours in CAT1000S
7.6.11.2 Tree View and "Tolerance Comparison Contour" in CAT1000S

Note
For general information about "Tree view" in CAT1000S, see "Tree view in
CAT1000S".
176 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Tree view options for a single contour

 All contours are listed in the tree view ("Element" tab).
 Right-click a single contour if you want to change the settings for
the contour.
 A context menu with different options appears.
• Callout properties: If you select this option the callout
properties are either displayed or hidden. See also: Callout
properties
• Show callout ON/OFF: If you select this option the callout is
either displayed or hidden.
• Show comparison display ON/OFF: If you select this option,
the whisker chart of the tolerance comparison for the selected
contour is either displayed or hidden.
• 3D tolerance magnification factor: If you select this option,
the "Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box appears.
See also:
"Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box
• Cutting plane: If you select the "Cutting plane" option, the
cutting side is displayed in 3D view. This representation is an
optical control of how the section or the contour is located. It is
not possible to display several cutting planes at the same time.
• Cutting side: If you select the "Cutting side" option, the cutting
side is displayed in 3D view. This representation is an optical
control of how the section or the contour is located. This option
is only available, if you have selected Cutting plane for this
contour before.
12.04.13 v3.5 177

CAT1000S
Tree view options for several contours

 All contours are listed in the tree view ("Element" tab). The individual
contours are in the parent element contour folder.
 Right-click the parent element contour folder to change the settings
for all contours.
 A context menu with different options appears.
• Callout properties: If you select this option the callout
properties are either displayed or hidden. See also: Callout
properties
• Show callout ON/OFF: If you select this option the callout is
either displayed or hidden.
• Automatic cutting plane: If you select this option, the current
cutting plane is displayed in 3D view in CAT1000S for each new
tolerance comparison.
• Show comparison display ON/OFF: If you select this option,
all whisker charts are either displayed or hidden.
• 3D tolerance magnification factor: If you select this option,
the "Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box appears.
The magnification factor is applied to all whisker charts. See
also:
"Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box
• Cutting side: If you select the "Cutting side" option, the cutting
side is displayed in 3D view. This representation is an optical
control of how the section or the contour is located. This option
is only available, if you have selected Cutting plane for this
contour before.
Limitations when working withh callouts
standard callouts are not supported. Therefore you have to use user defined
layouts for callouts of contour tolerance comparisons. See also:
Callout Designer
178 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.6.11.3 Display of Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S)

Conditions
You have carried out a tolerance comparison for a contour in the CAT1000S
"Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box
You have selected the "Display tolerance comparison contour in 3D view"

button in the CAT1000S "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box.
You have closed the CAT1000S "Tolerance comparison contour" dialogue box
with "OK".
Graphic display of "tolerance comparison contour" in CAT1000S
The "Tolerance comparison contour" is displayed in CAT1000S on the CAD
model.
"Tolerance comparison contour" in CAT 1000S on the CAD model

Graphic display of "tolerance comparison contour" in GEOPAK
The "Tolerance comparison contour" is also displayed in GEOPAK.
12.04.13 v3.5 179

CAT1000S
"Tolerance comparison contour" in GEOPAK

Note
The colours used in the whisker chart are the colours determined in the
CAT1000 "Colours of tolerance classes" dialogue box.
7.6.11.4 Settings for Tolerance Contour (CAT1000S)
"Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box in CAT1000S

Task
In the "Settings for tolerance contour" dialogue box you can determine the
magnification factor of the whiskers in the whisker chart. The whisker chart is
displayed in 3D view on the CAD model.
7.6.11.5 Width of Tolerance

Definition and Representation of Tolerance Band
The tolerance band is defined by the upper tolerance and the lower tolerance. To
allow correct interpretation of the signs, the material side is taken into
consideration. The material side is defined by the probing vectors of the nominal
or the actual contour.
180 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
If the material side is known, the tolerance line is inside the material with a
negative sign and it is outside the material with a positive sign.
Upper tolerance limit (positive)

Lower tolerance limit (negative)
Material side
Deviation between actual and nominal contour
Definition of the material side
 If the nominal contour has probing vectors the material side is
determined by the nominal contour.
 If the nominal contour does not have probing vectors but the actual
contour, then these are used to determine the material side.
 If both contours do not have probing vectors, the material side is not
known. According to the definition, the positive tolerance line as
seen in scanning line is on the left of the nominal contour.
Definition of tolerance band by nominal contour
Click this button if you want to use the tolerance band defined by the
nominal contour. The nominal contour with the tolerance band has already been
defined with the "Tolerance band editor" or Tolerance band contour" functions.
The "Upper tol." and "Lower tol." boxes appear dimmed because they are
unavailable. Entry of the tolerance limits is not possible.
Hint
The signs of the tolerance band are interpreted in the same way as
described in the section "Definition of tolerance band".
See also the following GEOPAK topics about the topic tolerance band:
Tolerance Band Editor
Define Tolerance Band of a Contour
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour
Tolerance Band Contours
12.04.13 v3.5 181

CAT1000S
7.6.11.6 Tolerance Comparison Contour (CAT1000S): Offset

An overmeasure contour around the nominal contour is created with the offset.
Then, the calculated deviations no longer refer to the nominal contour but to the
overmeasure contour. The reference direction is not influenced by the offset.
Example
A slot is limited by the inside and outside contour. The distance between the
contours (slot width) is 52 mm. The tolerance comparison shall be used to
examine the deviation of the slot width from the nominal measurement 52 mm +-
2.025 mm.
The inside contour serves as the nominal contour, the outside contour as the
actual contour.
When carrying out the comparison with an offset (overmeasure) e.g. of 52 mm
and a tolerance of +-0.025 mm, a significant deviation is visible.
Compared with that, no deviation is visible in the graphic when applying the
onesided tolerance of 51.998 mm and 52.032 mm.
The result of the numerical evaluation shows no difference between the two
processes.
182 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.6.11.7 Scale for error display

To show the deviations from the actual contour to the nominal contour more
clearly, these are displayed with a scale factor. So, the deviations are shown in a
scale larger than the scale that shows the nominal contour.
Both scales can be seen in the printed result graphic. The scale factor results as
product of both scales.
Example: The scale for the nominal contour is 1:10 (1000 mm in DIN A4 format),
the "Scale for error display" is 300:1. This results in a scale of 30:1. So, the
lengths of the printed deviations have to be divided by 30 to obtain the actual
deviation values.
Hint
All entries under "Scale for error display" affect the representation of the
graphic, however, they do not affect the numerical result of the tolerance
comparison.
Fixed magnification
Contrary to the "Relative magnification", the scale factor for error display is set by
default and is not calculated for "Fixed magnification". When representing
different tolerance comparisons with the same scale, the deviations can be
directly compared in the graphical printouts.
Example
 The nominal contour is a circle with a diameter of 1000 mm. The
width of the tolerance band is 0,2 mm.
 Under "Width of tolerance", type 0.100 in the "Upper tol." box.
 Under "Width of tolerance", type -0.100 in the "Lower tol." box.
 Click the "Fixed magnification" button.

 Under "Scale for error display", type 300 in the "Scale" box.
 In DIN A4 format, this will be a tolerance band with a width of circa 6
mm. In the result graphic the "Scale for error display" shows a scale
factor of 300:1.
7.7 Results: Representation and Output

7.7.1 Results Window
Display Results Window
To display the results window in CAT1000S, use the menu "Window" / "Results
window".
The results window contains some summarised information about …
 Shift and turn values of the best fit, in case that a best fit has been
performed.
 The number of measurement points in total.
 The number of shown measurement points.
 The maximum / minimum deviation and the mean value of the
deviations.
Deviations
Deviations of surfaces, borders, positions and distances are displayed.
12.04.13 v3.5 183

CAT1000S
The box behind "Max." shows the biggest deviation. Behind it in brackets you find
the number of the point with the biggest deviation.
In the box behind "Mean" you find the mean value.
In the box behind "Min." you find the smallest deviation. Behind it in brackets you
find the number of the point with the smallest deviation.
Number of Measurement Points (only for Surfaces / Edges)
Sometimes the number of the measurement points in total and the number of the
valid measurement points differ. This is connected with the fact that
measurement points are only valid when they can be assigned to one of the
surfaces.
If a measurement point cannot be assigned to a surface, it is not valid. To be
assigned in this connection means that the distance must be smaller than the
tenfold tolerance. In practice, this tenfold tolerance has proven to be sufficient. A
bigger factor would considerably increase the calculation effort.
Hint
If this is the case despite a correct probing, in most cases the error can be
found in the co-ordinate system.
Information about how to adjust your screen you find under "Graphic Output" and
"Adjust Screen".
7.7.2 Representation of Results

Basically, you have two ways to represent your measurement results:
 A numerical list,
 a graphics, which can also contain numerical information (see
details of "Graphical Output").
You can determine yourself whether you want to have the output vertically
("portrait") or horizontally ("landscape") separately for both protocol types via
"Settings for Graphical Protocol", respectively "Settings / Settings for List of
Results".
The List
You get the list via the "Output / Print List with Meas. Results" menu.
The list always contains
 the co-ordinates of the measurement points,
 the co-ordinates of the corresponding surface points,
 the single deviations, and
 the total deviation.
Furthermore, each point is marked which type of point it is: either surface point or
border point. The mark consists of one character, which we call the identifier. As
the administrator, you can define these identifiers through abbreviations such as
e.g. "C" comp. with borders. These abbreviations are pre-defined in the
PartManager by Mitutoyo. With the rights assigned through the administrator, you
can change – depending on the speech area - these identifiers.
Change Protocol Identifier
 Change to the PartManager and select the "Settings" menu bar.
 Call the following functions: Defaults for Programs / CMM /
CAT1000S.
184 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 You come to the "Settings for CAT1000S" window. Here, you can
also determine the best fit (see details of "Best Fit").
Furthermore, see the "Specifications" subject.
7.7.3 Specifications
CAT1000S offers further possibilities to arrange the protocol. Select the
"Settings" menu and the "Settings for List" function.
 Via this icon, select a folder where, e.g. the logo of your
company has been prepared as a bitmap. Normally, in this folder,
the logo of your company has been prepared as a bitmap.
• In this folder, select the logo bitmap and click "Open".
• If you confirm by "OK" in the "Specific List Options" window,
your logo is printed in the header of the printout.
• If you are not sure, whether you have selected the

bitmap you really wanted, you can check the bitmap by clicking
on the icon shown on the left. Your logo is displayed on the
screen on top left until you move the list or confirm it with "OK".
 If you click on the "Head Data" check box, the head data, which you
have defined in the PartManager for your part, is printed.
List of Results
With this function (Menu Bar / Output / List of Results), you call the text editor,
which you have pre-defined in the PartManager. The measured data are
transmitted to this editor, and you can modify the data, add comments, etc.
before storing or printing the list.
You can also transfer the file to "Excel”.
7.7.4 Error Report

Sometimes you only need a protocol of those values, which need to be reworked
or require a setting of machine parameters, because they are out of tolerance. If
you want such a protocol (either a graphical or a numerical list), proceed as
follows:
 Via the "Mark" pull-down menu, you call the "Mark Points within
Tolerance Limits" function.
 CAT1000S marks all points, which are located within their tolerance
limits.
 Via the "Menu Bar / Mark / Hide Marked Points", these points are
invisible.
 Now, you can activate the graphical or numerical protocol as
required (see topics "Graphical Output" and "Graphical Protocol ")
This setting is also stored for the repeat mode, this means via the "Output / Learn
Protocol for Repeat Mode" functions.
12.04.13 v3.5 185

CAT1000S
Hint
If there are no actual data for the protocol (e.g. if you have decided to print only
the values out of tolerance, and all values are within tolerance limits), you can
select one of the two options:
 To print only the model or
 no protocol.
Define this in the PartManager under "Settings / Defaults for Programs / CMM /
CAT1000S".
CAT1000S offers one more important function in the "Recover Hidden Points"
window. You get this window via the "Menu Bar / Mark / Activate Marked Points".
(< >) Using the two-way-arrow, you can exchange the status of the points: all
hidden points are visible, and all visible points are hidden. You can, e.g. delete
the marked points in one step (as a group).
Hint
In the same way, you can also use all other possibilities of the "Marked
Item" menu in order to have a clear protocol.
7.7.5 Edit Graphic Report

This function is used to determine the callouts which are to be displayed in the
graphic window and the information they contain. The displayed information is
determined by means of the selected callout design.
 In CAT1000 click this icon.

 Or choose "Output/Edit graphic report..." from the menu bar.
 The "Edit graphic report" dialogue box appears.
"Edit graphic report" dialogue box
186 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Callout for surface points

You can choose between five different preset user-defined callouts.
 Check the "Open callouts for surface points" check box to have
these callouts displayed in the graphic window.
 Click one of the radio buttons to choose a callout.
 When you click "User defined" you have to choose a callout design
from the drop-down list.
 Click "OK" to confirm. All callouts for surface points appear in the
selected design in the graphic window.
Callout design for elements and tolerances
You can choose between a standard design and different user-defined callout
designs. The standard design is set as default.
 Check the "Open callouts for elements and tolerances" check box to
have these callouts displayed in the graphic window.
 Choose a callout design from the drop-down list.
 Check the "As default" check box so as to open the selected design
by default.
 Click "OK" to confirm. All callouts for elements and tolerances
appear in the selected design in the graphic window.
Visibility test
 Check the "Visibility test" check box and CAT1000 checks if surface
points or measured elements in the graphic window are covered by
the model.
 If this is the case these callouts are blanked.
Related topics
Callouts
Change callout design
Elements-list
Callout Designer
7.7.6 Changing Callout Design

The "Change callout design" function allows you to change the design of selected
callouts. All other callouts remain unchanged.
 Click a callout to highlight it.
 In CAT1000PS click this icon.

 Or choose "Output/Edit callout" from the menu bar.
 On the submenu, click "Change callout design...".
 The "Change Callout Design" dialogue box appears.
12.04.13 v3.5 187

CAT1000S
"Change Callout Design" dialogue box

Callout for surface points
The "Callout for surface points" group box is active for surface points as well as
for distance tolerances and position tolerances if these are transferred to
CAT1000S.
 Click one of the radio buttons to choose a callout.
 When you click "User defined" you have to choose a callout design
 Click "OK" to confirm. The highlighted callout appears in the
Callout design name
The "Callout design name" group box is active if callouts for prismatic elements
and tolerances have to be changed.
 Choose a callout design from the drop-down list.
 Check the "As default" check box so as to use the selected design
by default for further elements.
 Click "OK" to confirm and the highlighted callout appears in the
Related topics
Callouts
Edit graphic report
Elements-list
Callout Designer
7.7.7 Elements-List
The elements-list ("Element" tab) is part of the "Tree view" in CAT1000. In this
elements-list all prismatic elements and contours which contain measurement
points have a tree view.
Opening the Elements-List
 In CAT1000 choose "Window/Elements-List" from the menu bar.
188 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 The "Tree views" dialogue box with the "Element" tab appears.
"Tree views" dialogue box with "Element" tab

The "Element" tab displays the element tree including the element types (point,
line, circle etc.). The measured elements appear below the respective element
types.
Note
You can move the "Tree views" dialogue box to any position and dock it to
different positions of the CAT1000 main window.
Within the "Element" tab the following possibilities are available:
 Click one of the measured elements and this element is highlighted
in colour in the graphic window.
 When checking the "Zoom to fit entity" check box the selected
element is enlarged.
 Right-click one of the measured elements and a context menu
appears in which you have further edit possibilities:
• Click the "Callout box Properties..." command. A dialogue box
appears to make the changes on the selected callout. For more
detailed information refer to "Callout properties" and "Standard
callout properties".
• Click the "Show Callout ON/OFF" command to show or to blank
the corresponding callout.
• Click the "Element Information" command to have additional
information about the selected element displayed in the Info text
box of the "Tree views".
Related topics
Callouts
12.04.13 v3.5 189

CAT1000S
Callout Designer
"Tree views" dialogue box in CAT1000: Options
7.7.8 Standard Callout Properties

In the "Standard callout properties" dialogue box you determine the information
that is to be displayed in the standard callout for the selected element.
Condition
The standard callout design is currently used for the selected element. For more
detailed information refer to "Change callout design" and "Edit graphic report".
 In the "Tree views" dialogue box in the "Element" tab right-click one
of the measured elements.
 Choose "Callout properties..." from the context menu.
 The "Standard callout properties" dialogue box appears.
"Standard callout properties" dialogue box

"Standard callout properties" dialogue box
 The preview callout window displays the current callout.
 From the "Columns" group box choose the columns that are to be
displayed in the callout by checking/unchecking the relevant check
boxes. The changes appear in the preview callout window.
 The "Available" group box displays all information available for the
relevant element as rows for the callout.
 Choose an information and click the "Add" button or double-click the
relevant information to add it as a row to the callout.
 The information appears in the "Shown" group box and is added to
the callout as an additional row in the preview callout window.
 Use the "Remove" button to remove "Rows" from the callout.
190 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 If you want to move a row, highlight this row in the

"Shown" group box and either click the "Up" or "Down" button.
 Check the "Element row" and "Title row" check boxes to have the
element and the title displayed in the callout. The changes appear in
the preview callout window.
 Check the "Save as default" check box in order to have the callout
for this element opened with these properties.
 Click "OK" to confirm and the "Standard callout properties" dialogue
box is closed. The modified callout appears in the CAT1000 graphic
window.
Related topics
Callout properties
Callouts
Callout Designer
7.7.9 Callout Properties

In the "Callout properties" dialogue box you determine the information that is to
be displayed in the callout for the selected element.
Condition
The user-defined callout is currently used for the selected element. For more
detailed information refer to "Change callout design" and "Edit graphic report".
 In the "Tree views" dialogue box in the "Element" tab right-click one
of the measured elements.
 Choose "Callout properties..." from the context menu.
 The "Callout properties" dialogue box appears.
12.04.13 v3.5 191

CAT1000S
"Tolerance callout properties" dialogue box

"Callout properties" dialogue box
 The preview callout window displays the current callout.
 The "Available" group box displays all information available for the
relevant element as rows for the callout.
 Choose an information and click the "Add" button or double-click the
relevant information to add it as row to the callout.
 The information appears in the "Shown" group box and is added to
the callout as an additional row in the preview callout window.
 Use the "Remove" button to remove rows from the callout.
 If you want to move a row, highlight this row in the

"Shown" group box and either click the "Up" or "Down" button.
 Click "OK" to confirm and the "Callout properties" dialogue box is
closed. The modified callout appears in the CAT1000 graphic
window.
Related topics
Callout properties
Callouts
Callout Designer
7.7.10 Graphical Output

The "Graphical Output" option will be replaced by version 2.2 with the possibilities
described in the topics "Protocoldesigner in CAT1000S", "Protocol Output" and
"Layout for Protocol".
192 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
You should distinguish between the "Graphic Output" and the "Graphic Protocol”
that can be edited by the user (see details of "Graphic Protocol" ). The graphic
output is used, to keep hold of the actual value you see at the moment on your
screen and/or to print it out. So you can have that what you see always as a
paper document or store it as a graphics file (Bitmap).
 Click via the "Menu Bar / Measurement / Store View for Repeat
Mode" and come to the window mentioned just before.
 Input your drawing no. or also comments here.
 After you have confirmed, the model (actual screen) is printed.
Settings for Graphics
The dialogue window, in which you can predefine special settings for the graphics
is displayed via the menu bar with "Settings / Graphics / Represented
Information". Via option buttons, you can determine how you want to represent
the results.
 Only colours
 Deviations in the plane (total deviation),
 Deviation of the single co-ordinates,
 with numbers of measurement points,
 with or without lines,
Edit Lines
You must know: The colours of the lines correspond to the classes of
the histogram. The line length is in a direct proportion to the deviation.
7.7.11 Callout Designer

7.7.11.1 Callout Designer: Introduction
Use the callout designer in CAT1000 to create user defined layouts for callouts of
prismatic elements and tolerance comparisons as well as of surface points.
Starting the command
 In CAT1000 click this icon.

 Or choose "Tools/Callout Designer..." from the menu bar.
 The "Callout Designer" dialogue box appears.
12.04.13 v3.5 193

CAT1000S
"Callout Designer" dialogue box

In the dialogue box on the left you will find the preview callout window and the
"Callout design", "Callout type" and "Surface point callout name" group boxes.
In the dialogue box on the right you will find the "General Settings", "Table
Properties" and "Cell Properties" tabs. Use these tabs to create the callout layout.
Click the "Apply" button to save the changes in the preview callout window. If the
preview has already been updated this button is deactivated.
Click the "Exit" button to save all changes and to exit the callout designer.
Related topics
Callouts
Standard callout properties
Callout properties
7.7.11.2 Callout Design

In the "Callout design" group box you can create a new design or delete an
existing design for the callouts of prismatic elements and tolerance comparisons.
Access the group box as described in the "Callout Designer".
 Choose an existing callout design from the drop-down list.
 The layout appears in the preview callout window.
 Click "Delete" to delete the selected design.
 Click "Save as..." to save the current design with a new name.
 The "Enter new design name" dialogue box appears.
"Enter new design name" dialogue box
194 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 Type a design name and click "OK" to confirm. The new design
name appears in the drop-down list.
Note
Several callout types may exist for each callout design. For more detailed
information refer to "Callout type".
Related topics
Surface point callout name
7.7.11.3 Callout Type

In the "Callout Type" group box you choose an element type for the current
callout design. Several callout types can be assigned to each callout design.
 From the drop-down list choose a callout type, e.g. circle, line, ball
etc.
 Click "Save layout..." to save the layout.
Related topics
Callout design
Surface point callout name
7.7.11.4 Surface Point Callout Name

In the "Surface point callout name" group box you can create a new design or
change an existing design for the callouts of surface points.
 Check the "Surface point" check box.
Note
When checking the "Surface point" check box the "Callout design" and the
"Callout name" group boxes are deactivated.
 Choose an existing callout name from the drop-down list.
 Click "Save" to save the changes of the current callout.
 Click "Save as..." to assign a new callout name.
 The "Enter new callout name" dialogue box appears.
"Enter new callout name" dialogue box

 Type a new callout name and click "OK" to confirm. The new callout
name appears in the drop-down list.
Related topics
Callout design
Callout type
12.04.13 v3.5 195

CAT1000S
7.7.11.5 General Settings

In the "General Settings" tab you determine the callout size, the number of tables
and the background colour.
Access the "General Settings" tab as described in the "Callout Designer".
 Click the "General Settings" tab.
"General Settings" tab

 Use the "Width" and "Height" spin buttons in the "Window size"
group box to determine the size of the callout.
 Enter the number of tables to be contained in the callout into the
"No. of tables" spin button.
 From the drop-down list choose a background colour for

the callout.
 Check the "Use white background colour for print out" check box if
the background is not to be printed.
Note
All changes made are displayed in the preview callout window. If that is
not the case click the "Apply" button.
 Change to the "Table Properties" tab to determine the table layout.
7.7.11.6 Table Properties

Use the "Table Properties" tab to format tables.
Access the "Table Properties" tab as described in the "Callout Designer".
 Click the "Table Properties" tab.
196 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
"Table Properties" tab

 From the "Table" drop-down list choose the table that you want to
format.
 Enter the number of rows and columns into the "No. of rows" and
"No. of cols" spin buttons.
 Use the "X" and "Y" spin buttons in the "Top left position" group box
to determine the position of the table.
 In the "Column width" group box determine the width of the
individual columns.
• In the "Column no." drop-down list choose the column to be
edited.
• Enter the column width in % into the "Width" spin button.
The column width of the last column cannot be

changed directly in the "Width" spin button as this
column is used to fill up the sum of all column
widths to 100%. If thereby the value of the last
column is below 0% the error message "Sum of
column widths cannot be more than 100%" is
displayed.
 Check/uncheck the check boxes in the "Frame lines" group box to

add or to delete table frames.
 Click one of the radio buttons to format the frame lines.
12.04.13 v3.5 197

CAT1000S
 In the "Alignment" group box you determine the horizontal alignment

of the cell content. The default setting is text on the left and
numbers on the right.
 In the "Font" group box you determine the font of the table text.
Therefore the following options are available.
• In the "Name" drop-down list you choose the font.
• In the "Size" text box you determine the font size.
• Click one of the "Style" radio buttons to determine the font style.
Note
All changes made are displayed in the preview callout window. If that is
 Change to the "Cell properties" tab to define data categories.
7.7.11.7 Cell Properties

Use the "Cell properties" tab to define the data categories for the cells. A list with
predefined keywords allows you to access the data available in CAT1000.
Access the "Cell properties" tab as described in the "Callout Designer".
 Click the "Cell Properties" tab.
"Cell properties" tab

 You determine the cells by typing the row and the column into the
relevant drop-down list, e.g. row 1 and column 1 for the top left cell.
 In the "Keywords" list box double-click a keyword which you want to
copy to the selected cell.
198 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Note
The keywords in the list box depend on the "Callout type". Depending on
the selected type different keywords are offered. This applies accordingly
to callouts for "Surface points".
For a list with all keywords including description refer to "Keywords".
 The selected keyword is entered into the upper text box and can be
edited there.
 Repeat this procedure for all further cells.
Note
The changes made are displayed in the preview callout window. If that is
 Click the "Exit" button to save all changes and to exit the callout
designer.
 The message "Do you want to save your changes?" appears.
 Click "Yes" to exit the callout designer and to save all changes.
 Click "No" to exit the callout designer without saving the changes.
7.7.11.8 Keywords
So-called keywords are used for the individual cells of the callouts in order to
access the data from CAT1000. In the table below you will find all keywords
including description.
Keyword Description
ActCrd1 Actual value of the first co-ordinate with position tolerances or
concentricity, dependent on the projection plane.
ActCrd2 Actual value of the second co-ordinate with position tolerances or
ActCrd3 Actual value of the third co-ordinate with position tolerances or
Actual Actual
Angle Angle
CadX X co-ordinate of CAD point
CadY Y co-ordinate of CAD point
CadZ Z co-ordinate of CAD point
Comment Comment line
DevStr Deviation string (e.g. ------|----**-- ->)
DevX Deviation in X
DevY Deviation in Y
DevZ Deviation in Z
Diameter Diameter or small diameter of ellipse
DirX X component of direction vector
DirY Y component of direction vector
DirZ Z component of direction vector
DistToMM Distance to maximum material size
S
Dist Distance
ElemNo Memory number
ElemTyp Element type
12.04.13 v3.5 199

CAT1000S
Keyword Description
ElemUser Element name
Name
FeatName Feature name
Label Label
Length Length
LocX X co-ordinate
LocY Y co-ordinate
LocZ Z co-ordinate
LocTyp Location type
LowerTol Lower tolerance
MaxDev Maximum deviation
MaxDiff Max. diff.
MCActLab Datum label for toleranced element
el
MCFstRefI MMC to reference element 1 applied
ndicator
MCFstRef Datum label for reference element 1
Label
McIndicato MMC was used
r
MeasX Measured point X
MeasY Measured point Y
MeasZ Measured point Z
MemNo Memory number
MinDev Minimum deviation
MMCLabel MMC label
MMCRefL MMC label which was applied to the MMC
abel
MMSLabel Maximum material size
Mode Measurement mode
MorMinPnt The Result can be "True" or "False" and indicates whether a form
deviation is present. If the Result is "False" the values of MinDev,
MaxDev and MaxDiff are zero.
Nominal Nominal value
NomTol Nominal tolerance
NoofPnts Number of points
OutOfSpe Value out of specification
c
OutOfTol Value out of specification
PntNoMax Point number of maximum deviation
Dev
PntNoMin Point number of minimum deviation
Dev
PointNo Point number
PosNo Position number
200 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Keyword Description
ProbeDia Probe diameter for one point
m
ProjPlane Projection plane with the tolerance "Position". Possible output: XY,
XZ, YZ.
Radius Radius or small radius of ellipse
RefCrd1 Reference value of the first co-ordinate of position tolerance or
RefCrd2 Reference value of the second co-ordinate of position tolerance or
RefCrd3 Reference value of the third co-ordinate of position tolerance or
RefName Number of the reference element (reference e.g. parallelism)
RefNo Number of the reference element (reference e.g. parallelism)
Spread Spread
StdDeviati Std. dev.
on
TolLbl Comment on the tolerance comparison
TollLower Returns the state of a one-side tolerance comparison
State
TolName Name of the tolerance comparison
TolState Returns the state of the tolerance comparison
TolTypGD Tolerance symbol
TFont
TolUpperS Returns the state of a one-side tolerance comparison
tate
TxtActA Text for "Actual value of the first co-ordinate with position tolerances
or concentricity, dependent on the projection plane."
TxtActB Text for "Actual value of the second co-ordinate with position
tolerances or concentricity, dependent on the projection plane."
TxtActC Text for "Actual value of the third co-ordinate with position
tolerances or concentricity, dependent on the projection plane."
TxtActVal Text for "Actual"
TxtCadX Text for "X co-ordinate of CAD point"
TxtCadY Text for "Y co-ordinate of CAD point"
TxtCadZ Text for "Z co-ordinate of CAD point"
TxtDev Text for "Deviation"
TxtDevX Text for "Deviation in X"
TxtDevY Text for "Deviation in Y"
TxtDevZ Text for "Deviation in Z"
TxtDiamet Text for "Diameter or small diameter of ellipse"
er
TxtDirX Text for "X component of direction vector"
TxtDirY Text for "Y component of direction vector"
TxtDirZ Text for "Z component of direction vector"
TxtDistTo Text for "Distance to maximum material size"
MMS
12.04.13 v3.5 201

CAT1000S
Keyword Description
TxtElemTy Text for "Element type"
p
TxtElemUs Text for "Element name"
erName
TxtFeature Text for "Feature name "
Name
TxtLabel Text for "Label"
TxtLocX Text for "X co-ordinate"
TxtLocY Text for "Y co-ordinate"
TxtLocZ Text for "Z co-ordinate"
TxtLowerT Text for "Lower tolerance"
ol
TxtMaxDe Text for "Maximum deviation"
v
TxtMaxDiff Text for "Max. Diff."
TxtMCAct Text for "Datum label for toleranced element"
Label
TxtMcIndic Text for "MMC was used"
ator
TxtMeas Text for "Measured point"
TxtMemNo Text for "Memory number"
TxtMinDev Text for "Minimum deviation"
TxtMMCLa Text for "MMC label"
bel
TxtMMCR Text for "MMC label which was applied to the MMC"
efLabel
TxtMode Text for "Measurement mode"
TxtModeB Text for "Border measurement mode"
order
TxtModeS Text for "Surface measurement mode"
urface
TxtModeT Text for "Tolerance measurement mode"
ol
TxtMorMin Text for "The Result can be "True" or "False" and indicates whether
Pnt a form deviation is present. If the Result is "False" the values of
MinDev, MaxDev and MaxDiff are zero.
TxtNomTol Text for "Nominal tolerance"
TxtNomVa Text for "Nominal value"
l
TxtNoofPn Text for "Number of points"
ts
TxtOutOfS Text for "Value out of specification"
pec
TxtOutOfT Text for "Value out of specification"
ol
TxtPntNo Text for "Point number of maximum deviation"
MaxDev
202 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Keyword Description
TxtPntNo Text for "Point number of minimum deviation"
MinDev
TxtPointN Text for "Point number"
o
TxtPosNo Text for "Position number"
TxtProbeD Text for "Probe diameter"
iam
TxtRadius Text for "Radius or small radius of ellipse"
TxtRefCrd Text for "Reference value of the first co-ordinate of position
1 tolerance or concentricity, dependent on the projection plane."
TxtRefCrd Text for "Reference value of the second co-ordinate of position
TxtRefCrd Text for "Reference value of the third co-ordinate of position
TxtRefNo Text for "Number of the reference element (reference e.g.
parallelism)"
TxtSpread Text for "Spread"
TxtStdDevi Text for "Std. Dev."
ation
TxtTolLbl Text for "Comment on the tolerance comparison"
TxtTolLow Text for "Returns the state of a one-side tolerance comparison"
erState
TxtTolNam Text for "Name of the tolerance comparison"
e
TxtTolStat Text for "Returns the state of the tolerance comparison"
e
TxtTolUpp Text for "Returns the state of a one-side tolerance comparison"
erState
TxtUpperT Text for "Upper tolerance"
ol
UpperTol Upper tolerance
7.7.12 Callouts
In CAT1000PS you can have the measurement results and tolerance
comparisons of prismatic elements and of surface points directly displayed in
the 3D view. For this purpose the so-called callouts are available. By means of
the "Callout Designer" you can create standard callouts as well as user-defined
callouts.
Opening callouts
For surface points:
 Activate this icon.

 Click the measurement point.
 Click this icon to open the callout.
12.04.13 v3.5 203

CAT1000S
For tolerances and elements:
The icons below are active only if you use a user-defined callout design.
Generally the standard callout design is preset.
 Click this icon to open all callouts for tolerances.
 Click this icon to open all callouts for elements.
 Activate this icon in order to automatically open the callouts for

tolerances (when measuring and tolerancing new elements).
 Activate this icon in order to automatically open the callouts for

elements (when measuring new elements).
Note
For more detailed information about selection and configuration of the
callouts refer to "Edit graphic report".
Closing callouts
 Click this icon to close the callout.
 Click this icon to close all callouts.

Automatic positioning of callouts
 Click this icon.

 All current callouts are automatically positioned at the sides of the
graphic window in order to avoid overlapped callouts.
Manual positioning of callouts
Free positioning:
 Click one of the callouts.
 While holding the left mouse button drag the callout to the desired
position.
Changing positions of two callouts.
This function is only possible if both callouts have the same size.
 Click one of the two callouts.

 While holding the left mouse button drag the callout to position it
over the callout the position of which you want to change.
 The position of the two callouts is changed.
Changing type of callout
 Click this icon.
204 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 The "Change Callout Design" dialogue box appears. For more

detailed information about the individual settings refer to "Change
callout design".
Storing callouts for repeat mode
 Choose "Measure/Store view for repeat mode..." from the menu bar.
 The "Store view for repeat mode..." dialogue box appears. For more
detailed information refer to "Graphical output".
7.7.13 Layout for Protocol

This function serves to store graphic views for the protocol output.
Start
In the menu "Output", click the function "Layout for protocol".
7.7.13.1 Dialogue "Layout for protocol"

You have two options:
 When activating the radio button "View no.", you can store up to 9
views with three comments each as a standard. These views are
listed in the "List of variables" and can be activated there. In this
case, the list of measurement points is not stored.
 When activating the radio button "For table", the number of views is
unlimited. Each view is stored with the corresponding list of
measurement points and is shown in a table. These views are listed
in the activated ProtocolDesigner in the "List of variables" and in the
"List of fields" and can also be activated from there.
The ProtocolDesigner then uses these views to create templates. For this, also
refer to the topic "ProtocolDesigner in CAT1000S ".
Depending on the selected option, you need to select a template in the dialogue
"Protocol output" that supports this option. For this, also read the topic "Protocol
Output".
7.7.13.2 "Reset layout for protocol"

Start
In the menu "Output", click the function "Reset layout for protocol".
This function is only required if you have previously worked with the option "For
table".
You can use this function to delete the previously stored layouts for the protocol.
The next printout will not contain the old layouts.
See also:
"Layout for protocol: hints"
7.7.14 Layout for Protocol: Hints

Hints
If GEOPAK runs in learn mode, these layouts are stored in the part program and
the views will be automatically created in the repeat mode.
12.04.13 v3.5 205

CAT1000S
If you work offline, the views will be stored. But if you exit CAT1000S, they
are deleted.
This is why you enter a corresponding name for your views so that you can easily
find and edit the command later in the GEOPAK editor.
For further information concerning the ProtocolDesigner, please refer to your
MCOSMOS CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GENERAL", file
"UM_flex_prot_g(e).pdf.
You will also find a complete user’s manual of the “ProtocolDesigner” program
under "protocoldesigner_g(e).pdf” on our MCOSMOS CD-ROM. Click on
“Documents" and "GENERAL".
The complete online help of the ProtocolDesigner is installed on your computer
depending on the operation system e.g. under "WINNT / system32", this means
under "CMBTL800.HLP" in German and under "CMBTL801.HLP" in English.
Read also:
Layout for Protocol
7.7.15 Output of Tolerance Chart and 3D-View

Tolerance Chart Window
To call up the tolerance chart window in CAT1000S, use the menu bar / Window /
Tolerance chart window.
The tolerance chart window gives you an important overview regarding the
measured points and the tolerance classes.
Details
The classification for the tolerance chart depends on whether or not the same
tolerance applies for all measurement points.
If all measurement points have the same tolerance, the description shows the
values in millimetres.
In case of measurement points with different tolerances, the classes are
subdivided in "Percent of tolerance".
Output
You can output the tolerance chart using the flexible protocol.
For the corresponding variables, see the table of the help topic ProtocolDesigner.
3D-View
You can insert and print out the current 3D-view into a flexible protocol.
For the corresponding variables, see the table of the help topic ProtocolDesigner.
7.7.16 Protocol Output

To get to the dialogue "Protocol output" in GEOPAK (learn mode, repeat mode or
edit mode), use the menu bar / Output / Protocol output.
By means of the "Protocol Output", you can create protocols. You can select a
template and the type of output.
Hint
The template is either a layout or a print template for your protocol.
206 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Path
Enter the path to the template folder into the list box.
 Select an available template folder using the button "File

name" or use the input field to enter the path.
 You can create a new template file by saving, for example, own
templates. For this, also use the button "File name".
When creating a new template folder, this folder must be listed in the
directory "Layout". Otherwise you get an error message.
Template
 In the list box "Template", all templates of the selected directory are
listed.
After the installation of MCOSMOS is completed, the folders
GEOPAK\Mitutoyo and CAT1000S\Mitutoyo contain some examples
of templates you can use.
 If you select a template, a preview of the template will be displayed.
Number of Copies
 In the "Number of Copies" list box, you define how many copies you
want to output.
 In the list box, you see how many protocols have been
requested at last.
In which form the protocols are printed or stored is explained in the "Types of
Output".
Sort order
After you have assigned the position numbers, you can use the list box "Sort
order" to define if and how the tolerance comparisons shall be sorted.
7.7.17 ProtocolDesigner in CAT1000S

In CAT1000S proceed as follows:
 Click in the menu "Output" on the function "ProtocolDesigner".
 In the subsequent window "Open", double-click on one of the
templates (or "Open") that are available for CAT1000S.
If you want to use GEOPAK-variables in CAT1000S (or vice
versa), you get several error messages in a dialogue. For your
convenience, just click the button "OK for all" for confirmation. From
the template that will be opened despite the error messages, you
can, for example, copy and use formulas or head data. The
template itself, however, can not be used.
 The subsequent main window of the ProtocolDesigner displays,
among other things, a "List of variables" and there, under
"Variables" the folders "T3D" and "T3DView".
12.04.13 v3.5 207

CAT1000S
For some basic information about how to work with the "ProtocolDesigner" in
GEOPAK and CAT1000S, refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM / file
UM_flexprot_g.pdf (German) or UM_flexprot_e.pdf (English).
To get to this file, use the path MCOSMOS / DOCU / GENERAL.
Complete operating instructions for the complex program "ProtocolDesigner" are
also contained in your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under the title
• protocoldesigner_g.pdf (German) and
• protocoldesigner_e.pdf (English).
To get to these files, use the path MCOSMOS / DOCU / GENERAL.
The complete online help of the ProtocolDesigner is installed on your system;
depending on the operating system, for example under "Windows / system32"
and under the title "CMBTL800.HLP" in German language and under the title
"CMBTL801.HLP" in English language.
7.7.18 Data Output to External Systems

If you want to transmit the measured data to other systems, use the "Output" pull-
down menu and the function line you want. We offer the generally used formats
 DMIS
 IGES
 VDAFS
Furthermore, you can archive your data if you want to analyse them later or get a
new protocol any time afterwards (menu "Output / Archive Measured Data"). So
you can create a protocol whenever you want. (see details of topic "Comparison
with Measured Data").
7.7.19 Export HSF

Use the "Export HSF" command to save the view of the CAD models. The
command is transferred to GEOPAK.
Calling the command
 On the CAT 1000 "Output" menu, click "Export HSF...".
 The "Save as" dialogue box appears.
208 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
"Save as" dialogue box

 Choose path and name under which the HSF file is to be stored.
 Click "Save". The command is transferred to GEOPAK and is added
to the part program.
Related topics
Export CAD view with anchor points as HSF file
Export HSF (CAT1000)
7.7.20 Repeat Mode CAT1000S and GEOPAK

CAT1000S and GEOPAK work together interdependently (see topic
"Communication" and the chapter Geometrical Elements ")
 If you measure with CAT1000S, GEOPAK automatically creates a
part program.
 If you want to measure several parts with the same geometry, you
only have to repeat this part program with GEOPAK.
 If GEOPAK finds a measurement task of CAT1000S,
CAT1000S is automatically started.
Create Part Program
In GEOPAK learn mode, first of all, call the surface as an element. All
measurement points within this element are displayed in colours in
CAT1000S. Through the colour, you immediately get a statement if your part is
well probed, respectively not well at this position.
Furthermore
 All probing and intermediate positions are automatically learned.
 The actual position of your probe is displayed as a red sphere.
 All commands, e.g. probe change, probe tree change etc. are also
automatically executed in CAT1000S.
 Each part program of CAT1000S can be worked the same way you
know from GEOPAK.
12.04.13 v3.5 209

CAT1000S
Also see the subject "Learn Layout for Repeat Mode".
7.7.21 Learn Layout for Repeat Mode

You can change the display of your part on the screen (position, zoom,
measurement points, flags etc.) and learn for the repeat mode.
Proceed as follows
 In the menu bar, click the "Measurement / Store View for Repeat
Mode" function.
 In the "Description for Layout" dialogue, enter a corresponding
name into the text field
 Via the buttons, you decide whether you want to
• print a graphic
• print a list or
• print a graphic and a list.
• When you "Confirm", this step of the part program will be
learned in GEOPAK.
• You can select the same layout for the output of all parts and
must not input each time the commands, e.g. for the printing.
 You can also bring about that after restoring the layout, the part
program should stop (stop CAT1000S).
This way, you can edit the protocol.
Layout in Repeat Mode
If you have clicked on the "Stop CAT1000S" function when creating the layout in
the single mode, you can still change in the repeat mode the layout before the
printing out.
For this, click in the toolbar on the icon (to the left).
7.7.22 Export Measurement Data

Start dialogue
To get to the dialogue "Export Measurement Data" use the menu "Output" both in
CAT1000S and in the GEOPAK learning and editing mode.
Task
Current data of CAT1000S (e.g. the output of measurement results in ASCII
format like DMIS, IGESor, VDAFS) can be stored via the GEOPAK part program.
Note
This is a learnable function. If learning is required in GEOPAK, CAT1000S
must be running.
210 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.7.23 Archive Measurement Data

You cannot use this function for saving geometrical elements of GEOPAK.
Only the results are saved for the surface measurement.
Task
You can save your measurement data for later on evaluations.
Hints
 This function is learnable.
 You can use GEOPAK variables for the file name. Example: You
use the repeat counter for the repeat mode. Under "Save as" you
enter the following string: C:\cad\data@RC.asc.
 For details regarding text variables in GEOPAK, refer to the
document "UM_string_code_e.pdf".
Start
In GEOPAK: To start the function, go to the menu bar / Output / Archive
measurement data (CAT1000S).
In CAT1000S: To start the function, go to the menu bar / Measure / Measure with
external ASCII data
Time of saving
The measurement result is not calculated at the time of saving the measurement
data. If you have loaded a CAD-model, the calculation is performed on the basis
of the CAD-data. So when archiving the measurement data you need to archive
the corresponding CAD-model at the same time.
Determine measurement results with archived data
 Load an archived CAD-model or use an existing part.
 Load the corresponding archived measurement data in CAT1000S
by proceeding via the menu bar / Measurement / with ASCII-data.
 You get the measurement results
7.7.24 Print Graphic Results
Drawing number (D-No.) and comments (Comm.): Here, you can enter a drawing
number and two comments. This additional information is printed in the graphic
result.
12.04.13 v3.5 211

CAT1000S
7.8 Tools
7.8.1 Create Measurement Path (CAT1000S)
Before you can use the function "Gasket Scan" in CAT1000, you have to create a
measurement path.
Start
On the "Tools" menu of the CAT1000 menu bar, click "Create measurement
path" to open the "Measurement path" dialogue box.
"Create measurement path" dialogue box

Determine name and element number
 Under "Meas Path", type a name in the drop-down combo box.
 When you click this button, a number is added to the name

(start = 1).
Mode: Create path through points
Limitations
A path can only be created on a planar face of a CAD model.
A path can only be created on a single face of a CAD model.
The created path is not checked to make sure that the entire path lies on the face
of the CAD model. For example, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the
path does not cross a hole in the face of the CAD model.
Steps
 Click the "Create path through points" button.

 On the CAD model, click in a surface to determine the first point of
the measurement path.
 The first point of the measurement path is displayed in the 3D view.
You can define the colours of the points in the "Settings for Probe
Display" dialogue box.
212 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 The first point of the measurement path and the co-ordinates are
shown under "Path through points".
 To determine the following points of the measurement path, proceed
as described above. At least three points are necessary to create a
measurement path.
 Click the "Generate" button.
 The measurement path is created and shown in the 3D view. A
section is created.
Note
This section corresponds to the measurement path. The section is used
for the display and selection. You can use this function only for "Gasket
scan". Sections created with other dialogue boxes in CAT 1000, cannot
be used for the "Gasket Scan" function.
 Click the "Finish" button.
 The measurement path is saved as part of the CAD model. The
measurement path is shown as section in the tree view. The
dialogue box is closed.
Close path
If you want to create a path, whose start point corresponds to its
end point, click the "Close path" check box.
Edit measurement path
You can insert points into the measurement path.
 Click the "Insert" LED.
 In the CAD model, click a point on the measurement path.
 The selected point is inserted in the measurement path and is
shown under "Path through points".
You can delete points from the measurement path.
 Click the "Edit" LED.
 Select a point under "Path through points".
 The selected point is shown in the defined colour.
 Click the "Delete" button, to delete the selected point from the
measurement path.
Mode: Create path by offset
Limitations
A path can only be created on a planar face of a CAD model.
The created path is not checked to make sure that the entire path lies on the face
of the CAD model. For example, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the
path does not cross a hole in the face of the CAD model.
Steps
 Click the "Create path by offset" button.

 In the CAD model near to an edge, click in a surface to determine
the complete measurement path.
 Then, click the "Generate" button.
 The measurement path is created and is shown in the 3D view.
12.04.13 v3.5 213

CAT1000S
 The distance between the selected surface point and the edge
defines the offset distance.
 The offset distance is shown in the lower group box.
 You can modify the offset distance by changing the value in the
"Offset distance" text box.
 The measurement path is created and is shown in the 3D view.
Note
This section corresponds to the measurement path. The section is used
for the display and selection. You can use this function only for "Gasket
scan". Sections created with other dialogue boxes in CAT 1000 cannot be
used for the "Gasket Scan" function.
 Click the "Finish" button.
 The measurement path is saved as part of the CAD model. The
measurement path is shown under "Meas. path" in the tree view.
The dialogue box is closed.
Further options
Click the "Reset dialogue values" button to delete all entries made.
Collision Check
Collision detection and avoidance is only performed on the movement to the start
point of the Gasket scan. Collision detection is not performed on the scan path.
7.8.2 Gasket Scan for Surface in CAT1000S

In the "Surface (gasket)" dialogue box you create a part program command for
the measurement of a free form surface. Measurement is carried out with the
"Gasket scan" function.
With the functions "Create measurement path" and "Gasket scan" you can
measure a free form surface with a measurement path that you have determined
flexibly on the free form surface before. Complex free form surfaces can then be
measured easily.
214 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Measurement path for gasket scan

Conditions
 Before you can create a free form surface with the "Gasket
scan" function, you have to open the element free form surface in
CAT1000S. See also "Surface Measure Mode".
 Before you can create a free form surface with the "Gasket scan"
function, you must have created a measurement path. See also
"Create Measurement Path."
Notes
Each "Gasket scan" command contains a GEOPAK scan command. For
this, a theoretical contour is required. This contour is created
automatically and obtains a memory number that exceeds the highest
available "Element contour" memory number by one.
The GWS file is given the name of the measurement path and is saved in
the part directory. Each measurement path should have a clear name to
prevent that the GWS file of an earlier created measurement path is
overwritten.
The "Tip angle" option is only available if you use a Renishaw "REVO"
measuring head with a "RSP2" probe.
How to open the dialogue box
On the menu bar, click "Tools", and then click "Create gasket scan for surface" to
open the "Surface (gasket)" dialogue box.
12.04.13 v3.5 215

CAT1000S
"Surface (gasket)" dialogue box

Procedure
 Select an already existing measurement path.
 Or create a new measurement path. See also " Create

Measurement Path."
 Click the start point on the CAD model in 3D view or type the values
of the start point.
 If you do not scan a closed contour, click the end point on the CAD
model in 3D view or type the values of the end point.
 Tip angle: Determine the tip angle for the scanning of the
measurement points. This function is only available if you use a
Renishaw "REVO" measuring head with a "RSP2" probe.
 Safety distance: The safety distance is the distance between
theoretical touch point on the workpiece surface and the point, at
which the CMM changes from movement speed to measurement
speed.
 Scan pitch: A small pitch means many measurement points; a large
pitch means few measurement points.
 Scan speed: The scan speed is the speed of the CMM during
scanning.
 Deflection: To ensure a contact with the workpiece, the scanning
probes work with a so-called deflection. The control ensures that the
deflection at any position of the workpiece does not exceed the
value defined in the dialogue box.
216 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 Measurement length: The measurement length limits the search

path in probe direction. Thus, you avoid a collision with the probe
stem. See also "Z-Offset".
 Click the "Generate" button to obtain a preview of the scanning path.
 Click the "OK" button. The scan command is transferred to
GEOPAK.
Further topics about the "Surface (gasket)" dialogue box
The "Surface (gasket)" dialogue box offers further options. See also " Options in
the "Surface (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in CAT1000S."
7.8.3 Options in the "Surface (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in

CAT1000S
 If you have changed parameters in the text boxes, click the
"Calculate" button to update the 3D view.
 Click the "Reset dialogue values" button to delete all entries

made.
 Determine if you want to create a closed contour or an open

contour by selecting or deselecting the button.
 If the probe direction is not correct, you can change the probe
direction by clicking the "Change probing direction" button. See also
 If you click the "Change scanning direction" button, scanning

takes place in the opposite direction.
 You can exchange the start and end point.
 At the bottom of the dialogue box you will find further

buttons for the programming help. See also "Programming help".
7.8.4 Create Section for Nominal Contour

7.8.4.1 Create Section for Nominal Contour (CAT1000)
This dialogue box offers several possibilities to create a section. Under "Trim
section", you can define a partial section that is used as nominal contour.
In this dialogue box you can also create multi sections that can be used as
nominal contours. When you create multi sections, the "Trim section" is not
applicable.
Start
On the CAT1000 menu bar, click "Tools" and then click "Create section for
nominal contour" to open the "Create section for nominal contour" dialogue box.
12.04.13 v3.5 217

CAT1000S
"Create section for nominal contour" dialogue box

Defining name and number of section
 Under "Section", enter a name in the drop-down list box.
 When you select this button, a number is added to the name.

Selecting mode to create the sections
In CAT1000 you can choose from three modes to create a section:
Using cutting plane
 Click the "Using cutting plane" button.

 Only the group boxes that you can use in this mode are available in
the dialogue box.
 The work steps and options are described in detail in the "Using
Cutting Plane" topic.
218 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Using offset along face(s)
 Click the "Using offset along face(s)" button.

the dialogue box.
Offset along Face(s)" topic.
Using cylinder/cone slice
 Click the "Using cylinder/cone slice" button.

the dialogue box.
Cylinder/Cone Slice" topic.
Tree view
Tree view including section for nominal contour

After you have created a "Section for nominal contour", this section is listed in the
tree view. The tree view is linked to the 3D view. See also "Tree View in
CAT1000".
Closing the dialogue box and transferring the nominal contour to GEOPAK
 After you have created a section for nominal contour, click "OK".
 The dialogue box is closed.
 The nominal contour is transferred to GEOPAK.
7.8.4.2 Using Cutting Plane

Section without Projection
When you select "No projection", you can use the mouse to determine a
cutting plane that you can rotate in any axis.
Handle to move and rotate a section

You can determine the cutting plane with the handle for moving and rotating.
 Left-click the handle in the 3D view.
 Left-click the arrow (1) and hold down the mouse button to move a
cutting plane.
12.04.13 v3.5 219

CAT1000S
 Left-click one of the two circular arrows (2) and hold down the
mouse button to rotate a cutting plane around an axis.
Section in main plane
If you define a section with a main plane, you can determine the cutting planes
that are parallel to a main plane by mouse click.
Handle to move a section

You can determine the cutting plane with the handle for moving.
 Left-click the handle in the 3D view.
 Left-click the arrow (1) and hold down the mouse button to move a
cutting plane.
First determine in which plane the cutting plane is to be positioned.
When you click the XY button, the cutting plane is always parallel to the XY
plane of the current co-ordinate system. In the 3D view, use the mouse to move
the cutting plane in Z direction (drag and drop). The values in the text boxes are
updated during movement.
When you click the YZ button, the cutting plane is always parallel to the YZ
the cutting plane in X direction (drag and drop). The values in the text boxes are
When you click the ZX button, the cutting plane is always parallel to the ZX
the cutting plane in Y direction (drag and drop). The values in the text boxes are
When you select the "Surface cutting view" option, a section is created that
is perpendicular to the normal of the selected surface on the selected point.
When you select the "Edge cutting view" option, a section is created that is
perpendicular to the selected surface. The section is along the edge that is
nearest to the selected point.
When you select the "Axis cutting view" option, a section is created that is
perpendicular to the selected cylinder axis. The selected point is projected on the
cylinder axis.
"Cutting plane" group box
"Cutting plane" group box

In the dialogue box, under "Cutting plane" you will find six text boxes:
 Three of the text boxes contain the co-ordinates for a point on a
cutting plane.
220 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 Three further text boxes contain the three angles of the direction
vector of the cutting plane (angle to X, angle to Y and angle to Z).
The representation of the vector is determined in the GEOPAK
"Input Characteristics" dialogue box (GEOPAK / File / Settings /
Input characteristics). The direction vector is represented either as
angle or as cosine. See also "Input characteristics".
Trim section
Under "Trim section", you define a partial section of an already existing section.
This partial section can be used in GEOPAK as nominal contour.
 Determine a start point by clicking in an already existing section in
the 3D view.
 Click "Closed contour" if you want to use the whole section as

nominal contour.
 Otherwise determine the end point by clicking in the section in the
3D view.
 Click "Change direction" to reverse the direction.

 Click "Trim section" to finally create the processed section.
Create section
 The section is created and displayed in the 3D view.
Multi section
"Multi section" group box

In the "Using cutting plane" mode, a multi section is possible.
 Under "Multi section", in the "Number" text box, enter the number of
sections.
 Under "Multi section", in the "Increment" text box, enter the
increment between the sections. If you enter positive values, the
multi sections are created in positive axis direction. If you enter
negative values, the multi sections are created in negative axis
direction.
 You can click the "View" button for a preview of the multi section
planes.
 The sections are created and displayed in the 3D view.
Further options
Click "Calculate" if you have changed the values in the text boxes manually.
The 3D view is updated.
When you click "Reset dialogue", the current preview of the section is
deleted in the 3D view.
12.04.13 v3.5 221

CAT1000S
When you click this button, the dialogue box remains open after creation of
a section.
When you click the "Cutting side" button, the view changes to the section in
3D view. This representation is an optical control of the position of the section or
the contour. This function does not have an effect on the calculation.
When you click the "Absolute" button, the co-ordinates of the cutting plane
are displayed as absolute co-ordinates in the workpiece co-ordinate system.
When you click the "Relative" button, the co-ordinates of the cutting plane
are relative to the current position of the cutting plane.
7.8.4.3 Using Offset Along Face(s)

Create section
 In the CAD model, near the edge, click in the surface on which you
want to create the section.
Offset edges along face(s)
"Offset edges along face(s)" group box

 The distance between the selected surface point and the edge
determines the offset.
 In the "Offset distance" text box you can change the value of the
offset distance.
Multi section
In the "Using offset along faces" mode, a multi section is possible.
sections.
increment between the sections.
222 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
1 = CAD entity (edge along a surface)

2 = Sections
3 = Distance between the sections
Trim section
the 3D view.

nominal contour.
3D view.

Further options
a section.
7.8.4.4 Using Cylinder/Cone Slice

In this mode you can create sections that result from a section of the CAD model
with a cylinder or a cone.
Selecting a plane
First determine the position of the cylinder/cone.
When you click the XY button, the cylinder axis/cone axis is perpendicular to
the XY plane of the current co-ordinate system.
12.04.13 v3.5 223

CAT1000S
When you click the YZ button, the cylinder axis/cone axis is perpendicular to
the YZ plane of the current co-ordinate system.
When you click the ZX button, the cylinder axis/cone axis is perpendicular to
the ZX plane of the current co-ordinate system.
Cylinder/Cone slice
With a few mouse clicks you can create any cylinder or cone in 3D view, using
the handles. This cylinder/cone cuts the CAD model. This results in the sections
that are used for calculation. Simply click the handle and change the parameters
with "Drag and Drop".
1 = Diameter size handles

2 = Start and end point handles
3 = Length handles
Examples
The cylinder/cone slice is particularly suitable for the measurement of turbine
blades because several cuts can be created quickly and easily.
224 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
1 = Cutting cylinder
2 = Created sections
3 = Cutting cone
4 = Created sections
Match diameter
Select the "Match diameter" check box to put the start and end diameter on a
level. Example: You have created a cutting cone in the 3D view with the handle,
but you want to use a cutting cylinder. Select the "Match diameter" check box.
The current start diameter will remain. The end diameter now corresponds to the
start diameter.
Trim section
the 3D view.

nominal contour.
3D view.

12.04.13 v3.5 225

CAT1000S
Create section
Multi section
"Multi section" group box

In the "Using cylinder/cone slice" mode, a multi section is possible.
sections.
increment between the sections. If you enter positive values, the
multi sections are created in positive axis direction. If you enter
negative values, the multi sections are created in negative axis
direction.
 You can click the "View" button for a preview of the multi section
planes.
Further options
a section.
7.8.5 Scan on Curve (Guide Feature)

7.8.5.1 Scan on Curve (Guide Feature)
In the "Guide feature" dialogue box you create control points for scan on curve.
Control points are used to control the REVO probing system, thereby the probe
orientation, scan speed and scan pitch are defined. The scan parameters are
defined at the control points.
In the "Guide feature" dialogue box you create a scan command for a REVO
probing system. When you click "OK" in the "Guide feature" dialogue box, the
scan command is transferred to GEOPAK.
The result is an optimized movement path of the CMM that follows a contour. All
five axis of the REVO probing system are used during the movement. The probe
scans along the contour and always touches the surface of the part.
The optimized movement path of the CMM is made possible by the guide
features that contain the control points. In the 3D view, you can easily create
these guide features (guide point, guide line, guide curve) and change the angles
of the control points using the mouse.
226 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
Depending on the quality of the part the REVO probing system dynamically
changes the A angle or the B angle without interrupting the scanning. The scan
pitch and the scan speed can change during movement.
Conditions
 A REVO scanning probe (RSP 2) is required if you want to use the
"Guide feature" dialogue box.
 You must create one or several sections before you can work with
the "Guide feature" dialogue box.
 You must start the learn mode in GEOPAK before you can work
with the "Guide feature" dialogue box.
Start
 On the CAT1000 menu bar, click "Tools" and then click "Guide
feature".
 The "Guide feature" dialogue box appears.
12.04.13 v3.5 227

CAT1000S
"Guide feature" dialogue box

Select section
 Determine whether a closed or an open contour is to be

created. Select this button to create a closed contour. Do not select
this button to create an open contour.
 Select an existing section that you want to scan. In the 3D view,
click a section in the CAD model or select a section from the "Name"
drop-down list box.
 When you create a closed contour, you must determine a start
point. Click to specify the start point on the selected section. The
start point is the first control point.
228 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 When you scan an open contour, you must determine a start point
and an end point. Click to specify the start point and the end point
on the selected section. The start point is the first control point. The
end point is the last control point.
 The co-ordinates of the start point/end point are displayed. You can
edit a selected start point/end point in the text boxes.
 After selection of the first point, the arrows in the 3D view show the
probing direction and the scan direction. The green arrow indicates
the scan direction, the arrow coloured in magenta indicates the
probing direction.
You can change these colours in the "Settings for Probe Display"
dialogue box. On the CAT1000 menu bar, on the "Settings" menu,
click "Graphic" and then click "Settings for probe display" to open
the dialogue box.
Probing direction and scan direction

Use tilt and advance
 Select the corresponding check box if you want to use tilt and
advance.
 For details about "Tilt and advance", see also Settings for control
points
Generate
 The scanning path with the control points is created. This scanning
path is also displayed in the 3D view.
Note
Only after you click "Generate", the "OK" button is available. Click "OK"
when you have made the required entries in the "Guide feature" dialogue
box.
Guide feature
Depending on the selected section, a guide feature is automatically selected.
This guide feature is a scan path which contains the control points. The guide
feature is displayed in the 3D view.
See also
Guide point
Guide line
Guide curve
"Contour file" box (nominal contour)
 The contour file box displays the current contour file name (nominal
contour) with the extension ".gws".
12.04.13 v3.5 229

CAT1000S
 Click "Save name" to define the location of your contour file.

 Select the "Use part directory" check box to save the contour file in
the current part directory.
 Select the "Additional edge point" check box to add an additional
theoretical point to each segment of the contour. See also Additional
Point at End of Edge
"Actual contour" box
 In the actual contour box you enter the name and the memory
number of the actual contour.
 Deviation: Enter the permitted deviation.
Create scan command
 Click "OK".
 The "Guide feature" command is created and is transferred to
GEOPAK.
 Two contours are transferred to GEOPAK: the GWS file (nominal
contour) and the contour to be measured (actual contour). Three
lines are created in the result list and in the part program:
• Theoretical element contour
• Move in five axes
• Contour (the actual contour that is scanned/measured)
Further options
The "Guide feature" dialogue box provides further options. See also
Guide feature: Further options
7.8.5.2 Guide Point

In this example, a hole is to be measured with the "Scan on curve" command.
When you click "Generate" in the "Guide feature" dialogue box, CAT1000
automatically selects the guide feature point.
Note
With inner circles, CAT1000 always suggests the guide feature point.
The guide feature point contains the scan path and the control points. Use
the handles to change the angles of the control points.
230 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
The guide feature point has been moved in Z direction. As a result, the
angles of the control points have changed.
Adjust control points with the handles
Handles for the guide feature point

 In the 3D view, left-click the arrow (1) of the handles and hold down
the mouse button to move the guide feature in Z direction. Proceed
in the same way to move the guide feature in Y or in X direction.
 In the 3D view, left-click the ball (2) and hold down the mouse
button to move the guide feature to any position you like.
 After you have changed the position of the guide feature, click
"Apply".
 The angles of the control points are recalculated; the new angles of
the control points are shown in the 3D view.
Guide feature curve
In the "Guide feature" dialogue box you can also select a

different guide feature from the drop-down list.
In the following example the guide feature curve has been selected. With
complex geometries, each control point angle can be adjusted individually with
the guide feature curve. As an option you can change several control point
angles at the same time with the guide feature curve.
12.04.13 v3.5 231

CAT1000S
The guide feature curve contains the scan path and the control points. Use
The guide feature curve has been changed with the handles. As a result,
the angles of the control points have changed.
Handles for the guide feature curve

Use the circular arrow (2) to rotate the guide feature in the XY
plane.
 In the 3D view, left-click the blue dice of the handles and hold
down the mouse button. When you move the dice, the angles of all
control points are reduced/enlarged at the same time.
232 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
 In the 3D view, left-click a guide point (yellow ball) and hold

down the mouse button. A guide point is allocated to each control
point. When you move the guide point, the angle of the
corresponding control point is reduced/enlarged.
"Apply".
 The angles of the control points are recalculated; the new angles of
7.8.5.3 Guide Line

In this example, a measurement path on a plane is to be measured with the
"Scan on curve" command.
automatically selects the guide feature line.
Note
With lines, CAT1000 always suggests the guide feature line.
The guide feature line contains the scan path and the control points. Use
The guide feature line has been tilted in Y direction. The angles of all
control points have changed evenly.
12.04.13 v3.5 233

CAT1000S
Handles for the guide feature line

plane.

down the mouse button. One guide point each is allocated to the
first and to the last control point. When you move the guide point,
the angles of the corresponding control points are
reduced/enlarged.
"Apply".
Guide feature curve
In the dialogue box you can also select a different guide feature
In the following example the guide feature curve has been selected to change the
angle of a defined control point.
234 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
The guide feature curve contains the scan path and all control points. The
angle of the middle control point has been enlarged with the handles.

plane.

"Apply".
12.04.13 v3.5 235

CAT1000S
7.8.5.4 Guide Curve

In this example, a "blisk" (Blade Integrated Disk) is to be measured with the
If neither point nor line can be used, CAT1000 suggest to use the guide feature
curve.
Note
With inner circles, CAT1000 suggests to use the guide feature point.
With lines, CAT1000 suggests to use the guide feature line.
Guide feature curve
automatically selects the guide feature curve.
The guide feature curve contains the scan path and the control points. Use

plane.
236 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S

"Apply".
7.8.5.5 Guide Feature: Further Options
Click "Calculate" after you have changed the values in the text boxes. The
3D view is updated.
For a visual check of the movement path, click "Collision check". See also
Guide Feature and Collision Check.
When you click "Reset dialogue", the current preview of the 3D view is
deleted and the values in the text boxes are reset (status when the dialogue box
opens).
When you click this button, the dialogue box is restarted after measurement.
You can change the probing direction.
You can exchange the start point and end point.
When you click "Change scan direction", scanning takes place in the
opposite direction.
You can mirror the probing direction at the scan plane.

Load CP
You can load a GWS file and take over the control points contained in the GWS
file.
Note
When you load a GWS file with the corresponding control points, make
sure that the current part coordinate system is the coordinate system used
when the GWS file was created.
List of guide points
The list of guide points includes all guide points. The list is
linked with the display of the control points in the 3D view.
12.04.13 v3.5 237

CAT1000S
When you click a guide point in the list, you can change the coordinates
of this guide point in the dialogue box.
Click the arrows to change the position of the corresponding

guide point.
When you click "0. point" in the list, you can change the
angles and the scale of the guide feature. This applies only to the guide features
line and curve.
Click the arrows to change the angles and the scale of the
guide feature.
Options under "Actual contour"
You can select the "Compensation of Radius of Probe".
You can use the "Loop counter" to save and export contours.
When you select "Element finished", the element contour is finished after
measurement.
When you require a tolerance comparison of the contours, click "Tolerance

comparison contours". After you have closed the "Guide feature" dialogue box
with "OK", the "Tolerance comparison contours" dialogue box in GEOPAK
appears. See also "Contours: General".
7.8.5.6 Guide Feature and Collision Check
The collision check in the "Guide feature" dialogue box is only a visual aid
to avoid collisions. A safe movement path cannot be guaranteed by the
visual aid.
In this example, a "blisk" (Blade Integrated Disk) is to be measured with the

Collision check
In this example the collision check in the "Guide feature" dialogue box is
selected.
Guide feature curve and collision check
automatically selects the guide feature curve.
In this example, the angles of the two control points marked with a red line, would
lead to collisions.
238 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
The guide feature curve contains the scan path and the control points. The
angles of two control points (red lines in the 3D view) would lead to
collisions. Use the handles to change these angles of the control points to
obtain an avoidance path.
Avoid collision
After you have changed the angles of the control points with the handles (see
description at the end of the topic), click "Apply". You obtain an avoidance path.
The green lines between the handles and the guide feature indicate that
you obtain an avoidance path in this case. However, the collision check in
the "Guide feature" dialogue box is only a visual aid to avoid collisions. A
safe movement path cannot be guaranteed by the visual aid.
12.04.13 v3.5 239

CAT1000S

plane.

"Apply".
7.9 Coordinate System

7.9.1 Set Relation to CAD Co-ordinate System
When you have finished the alignment, this function informs the program that the
following conditions are fulfilled:
 The alignment is finished.
 The alignment is conform to the CAD co-ordinate system.
These requirements are recorded in the part program.
240 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
As long as you have not defined the "Relation to CAD co-ordinate system", the
origin of the CAD co-ordinate system is always in the origin of the GEOPAK co-
ordinate system.
Requirement
Before using the function make sure that the co-ordinate system in CAT1000PS
is conform to the GEOPAK co-ordinate system.Also refer to "Virtual alignment of
the workpiece" and "Define co-ordinate system".
Start
 In GEOPAK/CAT1000 on the "Co-ordinate system" menu, click "Set
relation to CAD co-ordinate system".
 The "Set relation to CAD co-ordinate system" dialogue box appears.
Option "Not yet defined"
Do not use this option for new part programs (from version 3.0).
This option is available to create the downward compatibility.

When you select this option, the relation between the CAD co-ordinate system
and the GEOPAK co-ordinate system is not defined.
When you select this option, the behaviour of former part programs does not
change.
Option "Defined; apply future co-ordinate system changes"
This setting is mainly used for CAT1000P.
Here you define the relation of the workpiece co-ordinate system to the CAD co-
ordinate system. When you select this option, all following changes of the
GEOPAK co-ordinate system are automatically applied to the CAD co-ordinate
system and the measurement results in CAT1000 are updated.
In GEOPAK all changes of the GEOPAK co-ordinate system are calculated with
the measured results.
In contrast, the nominal co-ordinate system in CAT1000 is calculated on the
basis of the current nominal values.
Condition for this is that the nominal data have been entered in GEOPAK.
Also refer to "Entering nominal values for the elements".
When the element measurements in CAT1000PS are programmed, the nominal
data are automatically transferred from CAT1000PS to GEOPAK.
Example
You want to move the origin of the co-ordinate system of circle 1 (in the CAD
model the origin is in circle 1) to circle 2.
 Create the co-ordinate system in GEOPAK. The origin is in circle 1.
 In GEOPAK select the option "Defined; apply future co-ordinate
system changes" to accept the changes of the co-ordinate system.
 Measure circle 2 with CAT1000. The workpiece co-ordinates of
circle 2 are (50.1; 0.02; 0.1). The CAD co-ordinates of circle 2 are
(50; 0; 0).
 In GEOPAK define the origin in circle 2.
12.04.13 v3.5 241

CAT1000S
 The co-ordinate systems in GEOPAK and CAT1000 are

synchronized. In CAT1000 click circle 2 to obtain the nominal values
of the origin (0; 0; 0). Click circle 1 to obtain the values (-50; 0; 0),
because the origin of the co-ordinate system has been moved to
circle 2 (in GEOPAK and in CAT1000).
 The measurement values of circle 1 are also automatically
converted in CAT1000 (-50.1; -0.02; -0.1).
Option "Defined; ignore future co-ordinate system changes"
Application: This option is used for the measurement of rotationally symmetric
pieces. Example: turbine blades with a CAD data set for one blade only.
This setting is mainly used for CAT1000S.
When you select this option the current co-ordinate system is saved as nominal
co-ordinate system. The nominal co-ordinate system in this context is the co-
ordinate system valid at the time, when the option "Defined; ignore future co-
ordinate system changes" has been selected.
This function informs GEOPAK that the current GEOPAK co-ordinate system is
conform to the CAD co-ordinate system. From the moment this option is selected,
all other co-ordinate systems are no longer accepted by CAT1000. This prevents
that the position of the workpiece in 3D view changes. The effect of multiple
changes of the co-ordinate system, for example in a loop, may be a slow down of
the complete program due to the permanent updates.
Working with CAT1000 is only possible in a co-ordinate system in which

the two systems correspond to each other. Even when the option "Defined;
ignore future co-ordinate system changes" is selected, this will not be
changed. The updates of the co-ordinate systems are merely suppressed.
That is why the measurement points and elements are not shown at the
place of measurement.
Example
You want to move the origin of the co-ordinate system of circle 1 (in the CAD
model the origin is in circle 1) to circle 2.
 Create the co-ordinate system in GEOPAK. The origin is in circle 1.
 In GEOPAK select the option "Defined; ignore future co-ordinate
system changes" to ignore the changes of the co-ordinate system.
 Measure circle 2 with CAT1000. The workpiece co-ordinates of
circle 2 are (50.1; 0.02; 0.1). The CAD co-ordinates of circle 2 are
(50; 0; 0).
 In GEOPAK define the origin in circle 2.
 The co-ordinate systems in GEOPAK and CAT1000 are different. In
GEOPAK the origin of the co-ordinate system is now in circle 2. In
CAT1000 the origin of the co-ordinate system is still in circle 1.
 In CAT1000 click circle 2 to obtain the nominal values (50; 0; 0).
 Click circle 1 to obtain the values (0; 0; 0), because the origin of the
co-ordinate system in CAT1000 has not been moved.
 The measurement values of circle 1 are not automatically converted
in CAT1000. The measurement values of circle 2 are shown at the
position of circle 1 in CAT1000.
242 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000S
7.10 Mark
7.10.1 Recover CAD Elements
If you have hidden or deactivated CAD elements in the "Change Entity Attributes"
dialogue box, it is possible to recover these CAD elements.
Start
 On the CAT1000 menu bar, click "Mark" and then click "Recover
deactivated elements" or "Recover hidden elements".
 The "Recover deactivated elements" dialogue box or the "Recover
hidden elements" dialogue box appears.
"Recover deactivated elements" dialogue box
"Recover hidden elements" dialogue box

Recovering entities
 All entities that you have hidden or deactivated before are listed in
the text box, each entity with the name from the CAD model.
 Left-click to select an entity and then click "OK".
 Hold the control key and left-click to select several entities. Then
click "OK".
 The selected entities are recovered and are displayed again in the
3D view in the CAD model colour.
Reducing list of entities
If you have hidden or deactivated several different entities (for example surfaces
and edges), it is possible to reduce the list of entities to make the list more
convenient.
12.04.13 v3.5 243

CAT1000S
When you click the "Hidden surfaces" button, only entities of the type
"Surface" are listed.
When you click the "Hidden edges" button, only entities of the type "edge"
are listed.
Selecting all entities
When you click the "All" button, all entities of the list are selected.
Invert selection
When you click the "Invert selection" button, all entities that are not
listed are hidden or deactivated in the CAD model in the 3D view.
Related topics
Change Entity Attributes
Tree View in CAT1000
Tree View in CAT1000: Options
244 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8 CAT1000P
8.1 General information
CAT1000P
 CAT1000P assists in the creation of a GEOPAK part program with
the aid of the CAD data of a part.
 If CAT1000P is used in association with a virtual CMM,
measurement jobs can be programmed as soon as the CAD model
is created.
Neuss, December 2010
Borsigstraße 8 - 10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone ++49 (0) 21 37-102-0
Fax ++49 (0) 21 37-86 85
E-mail: info@mitutoyo.eu
Both the program itself and this online help are protected by copyright. It is
forbidden to copy them or disseminate them either in whole or in part. The rights
are in the sole possession of the company Mitutoyo Meßgeräte GmbH.
8.2 Introduction
8.2.1 Introduction: Purpose
 CAT1000P serves to assist in the creation of a GEOPAK part
program with the aid of the CAD data of a part.
 If CAT1000P is used in association with a virtual CMM,
measurement jobs can be programmed as soon as the CAD model
is created.
Prerequisite:
 If you did not yet load a model, you first should do that (see details
of "Load Model ").
 CAT1000P can only be used in conjunction with a CNC co-ordinate
measuring machine.
8.2.2 Important features of CAT1000P

8.2.2.1 Automatic element measurement by mouse click
CAT1000P enables you to program element measurements by mouse click. No
manual input of data is required.
 You can generate an automatic element measurement inside the
CAD model by mouse click. For this, the elements to be measured
need not also be present as elements in the CAD model.
Example:
To generate a line measurement, click on two points of a surface or
an edge in the CAD model.
12.04.13 v3.5 245

CAT1000P
 An automatic element measurement requires no manual input of

data into GEOPAK.
CAT1000P supports the following elements: Point, line, circle, cone, sphere,
plane (grid), plane (circular) and cylinder.
8.2.2.2 Scanning in CAT1000P

For the elements line, plane (grid), plane (circular), circle and cylinder you can
create the commands for the automatic element measurement with Scanning.
Please also refer to "Scanning in CAT1000P".
8.2.2.3 Automatic measurement of multiple elements

The inputs from the last measurement will be automatically suggested for the
next measurement. Ideally, one click within the model will be sufficient to define
the entire measurement for the next element.
Example:
You wish to measure several identical bore holes. With the first measurement,
you define the measuring strategy. For all subsequent measurements, just click
on the relevant bore hole.
Editing in GEOPAK
For performing the element measurements, the commands for "Automatic
element measurement" are, whenever possible, transferred to GEOPAK. This
makes the generated part program in the editor clearer and easier to change.
8.2.2.4 CAT1000P and CAT1000S

 Varying purposes
CAT1000P simplifies the creation of part programs. The data for a

measurement task are used directly from the CAD model.
CAT1000S creates nominal / actual comparisons of three-

dimensional surfaces with measurement points.
Common features
The basic functions for displaying the CAD model and for operating
the 3D view are the same in CAT1000P and CAT1000S.
8.2.2.5 Interaction with GEOPAK

 Data from CAT1000P to GEOPAK
CAT1000P only works with the GEOPAK learn mode.
The CAT1000P is used to create part programs with data from the
CAD model. The part program commands for element
measurements are stored in the GEOPAK part program.
Furthermore, all commands, e.g. "Tolerate", "Measure", "Move
CMM", are performed in GEOPAK.
246 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 Data from GEOPAK to CAT1000P
Commands and data such as "change probe", "clearance height"

and "safety distance" are taken on by CAT1000P.
If an element is open in GEOPAK, this has a direct effect on the

CAT1000P dialogues. In this case, no new element is created in
CAT1000P.
8.2.3 Programstart and further steps

Load model
 Create a new part in the PartManager and start CAT1000P.
 Upon the first start, CAT1000P displays the dialogue "Load CAD
model".
 Load the required CAD model.
 Then start the GEOPAK learn mode via the menu bar, "Measure",
"Learn mode". Also refer to "Start learn mode".
Define co-ordinate system
The co-ordinate system in GEOPAK must correspond to the co-ordinate

system of the CAD model.
In case of differing co-ordinate systems, the following options are available:

 In GEOPAK you can change the alignment. See also "Define Co-
ordinate System".
 In CAT1000P you can shift and/or rotate the CAD model to match
the co-ordinate system in GEOPAK with the co-ordinate system of
the CAD model. See also "Shift/Rotate the CAD Model".
 Part alignment for the offline mode.
Now you can start working with CAT1000P. See also " Create geometric
element: Start".
8.2.4 Create geometric element: Start

With CAT1000P, you can create the following elements:

"Element point"
"Element line"
"Element circle"
"Element cone"
"Element sphere"
"Element plane / grid"
"Element plane / circular"
"Element cylinder"
Use the menu bar, "Measure", to get to the dialogues or click on the relevant
symbol in the tool bar.
12.04.13 v3.5 247

CAT1000P
8.2.5 Scanning in CAT1000P

Purpose
For the elements line, plane, circle and cylinder you can create commands for an
automatic element measurement with Scanning.
Technical prerequisite
You require a "measuring probe".
How to proceed
For information about the general work steps in the CAT1000P dialogues, refer
to:
Element line
Element plane / Grid
Element plane / circular
Element circle
Element cylinder
8.2.5.1 Option scanning: Work steps

To create commands for automatic element measurement with Scanning, please
proceed as follows (the work steps are the same for the dialogues for the
elements line, plane, circle and cylinder):
 Enter into the input field "Number of points" a value of min. "50".
 Click on the button "Scanning".

 Define the scanning speed (in millimetres per second) in the input
field (in the scanning line at the bottom of the extended dialogue).
Scan speed
Details to the optimum speed you find in your documentation for the probe
system and the CMM. If your CMM is equipped with a controller to scan known
elements, it is possible to use a scan speed of up to 100 mm/sec.
8.2.5.2 Special cases

Scanning of planes
As GEOPAK has no function "Plane (grid)", CAT1000P sends several commands
"Scan line" to GEOPAK.
Scanning of cylinders
As regards the scanning of cylinders you need to know that only whole cylinders
can be measured.
If your controller has the option "Scanning known elements", the measurement
proceeds in a spiral. Otherwise, circles lying on top of one another are measured.
Elements circle and line
In the dialogue window for the element "circle" and the element "line", the
scanning line contains an additional list box "filter". The Gauss filter is preset.
Using the downwards arrow you can select one of the three options.
 No filter
 Gauss filter
248 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 Robust spline filter

Element line
In the dialogue window for the element "line", the scanning line contains, in
addition to the list box "Filter", the input field "Critical wave length". Here, you
enter the critical wave length.
8.2.5.3 Scanning: Graphical representation

The graphical representation of the measurement points, the move and the probe
direction largely corresponds to the normal representation in CAT1000P.
Differences
 With scanning, the movement path runs through the centre points of
the measurement point spheres.
 With scanning, only a few points are represented in the 3D-view.
Example
You want to scan measure 200 points on a line. Only a few, equally distributed
points are shown.
Background
 If all points were represented, this would mean a huge computing
effort. The working sequences with CAT1000S / CAT1000P would
slow down.
 If all points were represented, the 3D-view would be confusing.
8.3 CAT1000 Windows

8.3.1 "Tree Views" Dialogue Box in CAT1000
Tree views in CAT1000

After installation the "Tree views" dialogue box appears on the left of the
CAT1000 main window.
If the "Tree views" dialogue box is blanked you can have it displayed again.
 Choose the "Window" menu from the CAT1000 menu bar.
 In the drop-down menu either click "CAD-Entity-List", "Elements-
List" or "Tolerance-List".
It is possible to move the "Tree views" dialogue box to any position (drag and
drop) and to dock it to the edges of the CAT1000 main window.
Zoom to fit entity: The "Zoom to fit selected entity" check box is checked by
default. If for example you click an edge of the CAD entity tree the position of the
camera will be changed so that the edge is visible.
12.04.13 v3.5 249

CAT1000P
"CAD" tab
The tree views are linked with the 3D view.

Each CAD entity appears in the "Tree views" dialogue box.
In this example the CAD entity "Face 4" in the "Tree views" dialogue box is
selected. At the same time "Face 4" is highlighted in the selected colour (red) and
is enlarged in the CAD model.
It is also possible to click a section in the "Tree views" dialogue box. The selected
section is highlighted in the selected colour (red) and enlarged in the CAD model.
250 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
"Element" tab

Each measured element appears in the "Tree views" dialogue box.
In this example the element "Circle" in the "Tree views" dialogue box is selected.
At the same time the element "Circle" is highlighted in the selected colour (red)
and is enlarged in the CAD model.
"Tolerance" tab

Each nominal tolerance appears in the "Tree views" dialogue box.
In this example a nominal diameter in the "Tree views" dialogue box is selected.
At the same time the corresponding tolerance frame is highlighted in the selected
colour (red) in the CAD model. The CAD entity linked with the tolerance frame is
enlarged.
Further topics
Options in the "Tree Views" dialogue box
Colour selection
Elements-list
12.04.13 v3.5 251

CAT1000P
8.3.2 "Tree Views" Dialogue Box in CAT1000: Options
Tree views in CAT1000

After installation the "Tree views" dialogue box appears on the left of the
CAT1000 main window.
If the "Tree views" dialogue box is blanked you can have it displayed again.
 Choose the "Window" menu from the CAT1000 menu bar.
 In the drop-down menu either click "CAD-Entity-List", "Elements-
List" or "Tolerance-List".
Info text box
Additional information about the selected

entities/elements/tolerances appears in the info text box in the lower part of the
"Tree views" dialogue box.
"CAD" tab
It is possible to choose several entries in the "Tree views" dialogue box by
clicking the entries with the left mouse button while holding down the Shift key or
the Control key. The selected entities are highlighted in the selected colour in the
3D view.
Choose a tool to highlight the entities in the 3D view.

It is possible to choose several entities in the 3D view by clicking the CAD model
with the left mouse button while holding down the Shift key or the Control key.
The selected entities are highlighted in the "Tree views" dialogue box.
"Element" tab
Choose the tool "Select measured element" to highlight an element in the

3D view.
This element is highlighted in the "Tree views" dialogue box.
Context menu of a CAD entity
After selection of a CAD entity it is possible to change the CAD entity attributes in
the context menu (right mouse button).
 You can change the name.
 You can change the attributes. Refer to the topic:Change attributes
 You can determine colour and transparency of the CAD entity.
 If GD&T information is linked with the selected CAD entity you can
have this information displayed in the Info text box.
252 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 If the selected CAD entity has already been measured you can have
the name and the memory number of the measured element
displayed in the Info text box.
Context menu of an element
After selection of an element it is possible to change the element properties in the
context menu (right mouse button).
 You can change the callout properties of the element. Refer to the
topics:
"Standard callout properties""Callout properties"
 You can have the element callout displayed.
 You can have the element information displayed.
Context menu of a tolerance
After selection of a tolerance it is possible to change the tolerance attributes in
the context menu (right mouse button).
 You can show or blank the tolerance frame.
 You can delete the tolerance frame.
 You can have the CAD entity name linked with the tolerance
displayed.
 You can have the GD&T information displayed. This information
appears in the Info text box of the "Tree views" dialogue box.
Further topics
"Tree views" dialogue box in CAT1000
Tolerance frame in 3D view
Colour selection
Elements-list
8.3.3 Colour and Transparency of Picked Entity

In your CAD model you can assign any colour and a transparency value to an
entity.
Starting the dialogue
 In CAT1000, in the "Tree view " right-click an entity.
 The shortcut menu appears.
 In the shortcut menu, use the left mouse button and click "Colour
and transparency...".
 The "Picked entity colour and transparency" dialogue box appears.
"Picked entity colour and transparency" dialogue box
12.04.13 v3.5 253

CAT1000P
Selecting a colour
 If you want to change the colour of the selected entity, use the left
mouse button and click the "Colour" button.
 The "Colour" Windows dialogue box appears.
 In the "Colour" Windows dialogue box follow the Windows
conventions and confirm.
 The selected entity is represented in the chosen colour.
Defining the transparency
 If you want to change the transparency of the selected entity, use
the left mouse button and click the "Transparency" slider.
 Press and hold the left mouse button to move the slider.
If the slider is on the left, the entity is not represented transparently. Move the
slider to the right to increase the transparency. If the slider is at the rightmost
position, the entity is represented fully transparent.
8.4 General Preparation

8.4.1 Feature Control Frames (CAT1000)
8.4.1.1 Feature Control Frames in the 3D-View (CAT1000P)
Hint
This topic is only relevant for CAT1000P.
Task
CAT1000P provides the possibility to link GD&T information with entities of the
CAD model in the 3D-View. This tolerance information is displayed as a 2D or 3D
feature control frame in the 3D-View.
In most cases, the CAD model does not contain any GD&T information. The
"Define GD&T Wizard" can then be used to create GD&T information and to link
this GD&T information with CAD entities.
3D Feature Control Frame

Formats
GD&T information can be applied in CAT1000P from Q-DAS, WEPROM, PMI
(Product Manufacturing Information).
254 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Feature Control Frames

Featue control frames are small flags which are displayed in the 3D-View in
CAT1000P. Each feature control frame contains GD&T information and is linked
to a specified entity of the CAD model.
2D Feature Control Frame or 3D Feature Control Frame
The feature control frames are displayed as 2D feature control frames if you click
on the "GD&T 2D Control Frame" check box in the "General Graphic Settings"
dialogue. Otherwise, 3D feature control frames are displayed. You reach the
"General Graphic Settings" dialogue using the menu bar / the "Settings" menu /
the "Graphic" entry / the "General Settings" entry.
Positioning 2D Feature Control Frames
You can change the position of the 2D feature control frame in the 3D-View.
 Click on the feature control frame.
 Drag the feature control frame with the left mouse button pressed.
Tolerance Tree and Feature Control Frame / Tolerance Information
If you click on a tolerance in the tolerance tree in CAT1000P with the right mouse
button, a context menu is opened. The entries in the tolerance tree are linked to
the tolerances of the CAD model.
The context menu provides the following options:
 Show feature control frame
 Delete feature control frame
 Display CAD entity name
 Display GD&T information (tolerance information)
Hint
The CAD entity name or the GD&T information (tolerance information) is
displayed in the information window in the lower area of the tolerance
tree.
Other topics:
Define GD&T Wizard
Evaluate GD&T Wizard
8.4.2 Define GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)

8.4.2.1 Define GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)
Note
This topic is relevant for CAT1000P only.
Task
You dispose of a CAD model without tolerance information. Using the Define
GD&T Wizard it is possible to assign a nominal tolerance or a datum to a CAD
entity of your CAD model.
Start
Load a CAD model first.
To start the "Define GD&T Wizard" choose "Tools" / "Define GD&T" from the
CAT1000P menu bar or click the icon in the toolbar.
12.04.13 v3.5 255

CAT1000P
Example 1 (without datum)

You wish to define the tolerance for the diameter of a cylinder.
 Click the "Element Cylinder" button.
 Click the desired tolerance button. In this example choose

"Diameter".
 CAT1000P suggests a tolerance width which you can change.
 You can also make use of the tolerance table.

 In the 3D view click the desired cylindrical surface of the CAD
model.
 The feature control frame is displayed. You can change the
representation of the feature control frame. Refer to the topic
"Feature control frame".
Example 2 (with datum)
You wish to define the parallelism of two planes.
Steps in the "Nominal datum definition" dialogue box
 Click the "Datum Definition" button. The "Nominal datum

definition" dialogue box is displayed.
 In the "Nominal datum definition" dialogue box determine the
reference plane.
 In the reference element toolbar click the "Plane" button.

 In the 3D view click the desired plane of the CAD model.
 In the "Nominal datum definition" dialogue box click "OK" to confirm.
Steps in the "Define GD&T Wizard" dialogue box
 Click the "Element Plane" button.

"Parallelism".
 CAT1000P suggests a tolerance which you can change.
 In the Datum list box choose the number of datums. In this example
choose "1".
 In the Datum selection field choose the reference plane which you
have determined in the "Nominal datum definition" dialogue box.
Number of datums
256 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Datum selection field

 In the 3D view click the desired plane of the CAD model.
 The feature control frame is displayed. You can change the
representation of the feature control frame. Refer to the topic
"Feature control frame".
Note
If you wish to define other tolerances proceed in the same way.
Further options
If you wish to define several tolerances or datums one after another click the
"Repeat Tolerance" button.
In many cases you can make use of the Maximum Material Condition
(MMC) to enlarge a given tolerance zone. Refer to the topic "Maximum Material
Condition (MMC)".
8.4.2.2 Nominal Datum Definition (CAT1000P)

Note
This topic is relevant for CAT1000P only.
In the "Nominal datum definition" dialogue box determine the reference
element/elements.
In the reference element toolbar click the corresponding element.
In the 3D view click the desired element of the CAD model.
Click "OK" to confirm.
8.4.3 GD&T Wizard (CAT1000P)

8.4.3.1 GD&T Wizard (CAT1000PS)
Task
You have measured some elements and wish to tolerance some characteristics
of these elements in CAT1000PS. Using the GD&T wizard you can create
tolerance commands and transfer them to GEOPAK. GEOPAK is responsible for
the evaluation (nominal actual comparison). After evaluation the deviation
appears in the GEOPAK list of results. It is also possible to make the results
appear in the 3D view as callouts.
Start
To start the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box choose Tools / GD&T
wizard from the CAT1000PS menu bar or click the icon in the toolbar.
12.04.13 v3.5 257

CAT1000P
Example 1 (without datum)

You have measured a cylinder and you wish to tolerance the diameter of the
cylinder.
 Click the "Element cylinder" button.

 In the dialogue box choose a cylinder in the "Actual element" group
box. Two options are available: In the 3D view in the CAD model
click the measured cylinder or choose the measured cylinder from
the list.

"Diameter".
 If the nominal tolerances already exist in the CAD model these
tolerances are used. If not, CAT1000PS makes a suggestion for a
tolerance width that you can change.
 You can also use the tolerance table.

 The tolerance command is added to the part program. Calculation of
the evaluation takes place and the result of the tolerance
comparison appears in the CAT1000PS 3D view and in the
GEOPAK list of results.
Example 2 (with datum)
You have measured two planes and you wish to tolerance the parallelism of the
planes.
Steps in the "Datum Definition" dialogue box
 Click the "Datum Definition" button. The "Datum Definition"

dialogue box appears.
 In the "Datum Definition" dialogue box specify the reference plane.
 Click the "Plane" button in the "Reference element" group box.

 Choose the first plane which serves as datum. You have two
options: In the 3D view in the CAD model click the desired plane or
choose the desired measured plane from the list.
 In some cases it is possible to use the Maximum Material Condition
(MMC). Check the "Allow MMC bonus" check box. Refer also to the
following topics "Maximum Material Condition (MMC)" and "GD&T
wizard and MMC".
Steps in the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box
 Click the "Element plane" button.

 Choose the desired plane in the "Nominal element" group box of the
"Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box. You have two options: In the
3D view in the CAD model click the measured plane or choose the
measured plane from the list.

"Parallelism".
258 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 If the nominal tolerances already exist in the CAD model these

tolerances are used. If not, CAT1000PS makes a suggestion for a
tolerance width that you can change.
 In the "Nominal element" group box it is in some cases possible to
specify additional data about the nominal element.
 The tolerance command is added to the part program. Calculation of
the evaluation takes place and the result of the tolerance
comparison appears in the CAT1000PS 3D view and in the
GEOPAK list of results.
Note
To tolerance other elements proceed in the same way.
Nominal element
"Nominal element" group box in the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box
Depending on the tolerance that you choose supplementary information is
possibly required in the "Nominal element" group box.
Refer also to "Nominal element in the GD&T wizard"
Further options
The GD&T wizard offers numerous further options:
Further tolerance options (CAT1000PS)
Datum definition
Scaling of tolerance diagrams
Absolute tolerance: When clicking this button the absolute tolerance is

calculated and is output.
Loop counter
Repeat tolerance: When clicking this button the "Evaluate GD&T wizard
(CAT1000PS)" dialogue box is started again after measurement.
12.04.13 v3.5 259

CAT1000P
8.4.3.2 Nominal Element in the GD&T Wizard (CAT1000PS)

Start
In the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box you will find the "Nominal
element" group box. To open the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box choose
Tools / Evaluate GD&T from the CAT1000PS menu bar or click the icon in the
toolbar.
Nominal element
"Nominal element" group box in the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box
Depending on the tolerance that you select additional information in the "Nominal
element" group box is possibly required.
Tolerance zone orientation
For orientation tolerances (perpendicularity, parallelism, angularity) and the
position tolerance it is in some cases necessary to specify the orientation of the
tolerance zone.
In some cases you have to specify the plane in which the actual
element is positioned.
Predefined position (nominal location)
For a position tolerance the predefined position (nominal location) of the element
is required. This predefined position (nominal location) can be transferred from
the element.
Predefined position (nominal location)

Bounding of the tolerance zone (start and end point)
Example: For a position tolerance of a cylinder two bounding planes are required
to determine the start point and end point of the axis of the actual cylinder. Start
point and end point of the actual cylinder are automatically entered into the text
boxes (rounded, depending on the CAT1000 settings).
260 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Text boxes for start point and end point

Bounding of the tolerance zone (reference length or angle)
For an orientation tolerance you have to enter a reference length.
For an angularity tolerance you have to enter an angle.
8.4.3.3 Datum Definition (CAT1000PS)

In the "Datum definition" dialogue box determine the reference element(s).
Click the desired element button in the "Reference element" group box.
In the 3D view click the desired element of the CAD model or choose the element
from the list in the "Reference element" group box.
Click "OK" to confirm.
Note
In some cases it is possible to use the Maximum Material Condition
(MMC). Check the "Allow MMC bonus" check box. Refer also to the
following topics:
Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
GD&T wizard and MMC
8.4.3.4 Scaling of Tolerance Diagrams (CAT1000PS)

Scale by circularity
In the "Evaluate GD&T wizard" dialogue box you can use the icons
(see pictures) for a graphic display. For scaling you can choose between three
options in the "Form tolerance diagram settings" dialogue box.
Scale by actual tolerance
When choosing this option you can reproduce the exact run of the circle in the
diagram (see picture below).
In this diagram it is however not possible to find out if the points are within the
tolerance width. This is due to the fact that here the points with the minimum and
maximum distance determine the green range.
Note
This can be applied accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout
tolerances and parallelism.
All points are always within the green range even if the required circularity is not
given. The circularity can be found in the list of results, in the report or in the file
output.
12.04.13 v3.5 261

CAT1000P
Scale by tolerance zone
In the case of maximum or minimum deviations the run of the form can
possibly not be reproduced. You have to choose the "Scale by actual
tolerance" option then.
Using this option you make sure that the green range actually corresponds to the
tolerance zone. You already enter the width of the tolerance zone in the
"Circularity" dialogue box. In the diagram you can see if the circle is within the
circularity tolerance (see picture below). You can see that the values of the points
P1 and P40 are the same as in the picture above "Scale by actual circularity".
Note
This can be applied accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout
tolerances and parallelism.
Scale by nominal value with upper and lower tolerance
If you wish to know if the circle is within the form tolerance despite the form error
it is possible to scale by nominal value and by tolerance limits (upper / lower
tolerance). This means that compared to the above picture there is an additional
blue circle for this option. This is the circle with the nominal diameter.
The green range results from the values that you have entered for nominal
tolerance and upper and lower tolerance.
It may occur that one or several points are outside the green range (siehe picture
above), the required circularity is however still given. This detail can be found in
the list of results or in the report and in the file output.
Note
This can be applied accordingly to straightness and flatness but not to the
runout tolerances and parallelism.
262 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Scale by straightness/flatness
Contrary to "Scale by circularity" it is here not possible to query the dimensional
tolerance. It is however possible to enter an upper and a lower tolerance. The
upper tolerance is the one outside the material and the lower tolerance is the one
inside the material.
8.4.3.5 Further Tolerance Options (CAT1000PS)
Click this button in the "Evaluate GD&T wizard (CAT1000PS)" dialog box to
carry out further actions after the Nominal Actual Comparison. The "Further
tolerance options" dialog box appears.
Note
It depends on the selected tolerance which of the buttons (options) are
active in this dialog box. All buttons (options) are described below.
The following options are available:
 When you click this button the part program is aborted in case
the value exceeds the upper tolerance limit.
the value falls below the lower tolerance limit.
the value either exceeds the upper tolerance limit or falls below the
lower tolerance limit.
 Actual co-ordinate system: When you click this button the

currently valid co-ordinate system is used.
 Co-ordinate system of the origin: When you click this button the
co-ordinate system valid during measurement of the element is
used.
 When you click this button the characteristic is transferred to

your statistical program. First you have to give the feature a name.
Once the first character for the name is entered the "Report to
statistical program" button (see picture) is activated. The feature
name can also be entered for the report only.
Additional information
 Feature name: Enter the name of the feature here.
Note
 Position number: You can use the position number for example if
you carry out the measurement for an initial sample inspection. In
the Mitutoyo initial sample inspection report the features are sorted
according to this position number before printing them. This allows
the measurement in any order.
12.04.13 v3.5 263

CAT1000P
 Position label: You can use the position label if you wish to use
alphanumeric characters instead of numbers for the allocation of
position numbers (e.g. PKN1, PKN2, PKN3, etc.). In the Mitutoyo
initial sample inspection report the features are sorted according to
this position label before printing them.
 Feature label: You can use this additional feature label e.g. for a
grid of a larger drawing so that it will be easier to find the feature.
 Datum label: The datum label is used for the MMC. Here it is
sometimes specified in the drawing that the MMC can also be
applied to a reference element (e.g. 'A'). When the use of the MMC
is possible, you also have the possibility to enter this datum label.
During input you obtain a list of the already defined datums.
8.4.3.6 GD&T Wizard and MMC (CAT1000PS)

When you specify references by means of the GD&T wizard in CAT1000P it is in
some cases possible to use the "Maximum Material Condition (MMC).
 Check the "Allow MMC bonus" check box.
 The "Nominal value", "Upper tolerance" and "Lower tolerance" list
boxes are active now.
Reference elements circle, cylinder and sphere
When selecting a circle, a cylinder or a sphere as reference element it is possible
to specify a diameter tolerance.
Reference elements plane and line
When selecting a plane or line as reference element it is possible to specify a
distance tolerance.
See also:Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
8.5 Scanning in CAT1000P

8.5.1 Scanning in CAT1000P
For the elements line, circle , plane (grid), and cylinder it is possible to create
Scanning commands in CAT1000P. After creation the commands are transferred
to GEOPAK. In GEOPAK the commands are executed.
Steps
 In the element dialog click the Scanning button.

 In the element dialog click the Scanning tab to input the Scanning
parameters.
Method
From the drop down list "Method" choose one of three scanning methods:
 "Automatic best": Choosing this method means that the best
scanning method supported by the CMM control is used.
 "Standard scan": Choosing this method means that the part program
command "CNC scanning" is used. The work piece will be scanned
with the speed entered in the "Scan speed" input field.
 "High speed scan": Choosing this method means that the nominal
data of the element will be used for the high speed scanning.
264 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Automatic change to standard scanning speed
The "Standard scan in the case of an error" button is only active when
clearance height in CAT1000 is activated.
If you choose the "Standard scan in the case of an error" button and the errors
E361 or E362 occur, there will be a change from high speed scanning to
standard scanning. In this case the clearance height must be set. The CMM
drives over the clearance height to the start point to repeat the element
measurement using the standard scanning method. The errors E361 or E362
occur when the probe is outside the defined range, this means that the probe is
either to close to the workpiece or to far from the workpiece.
Pitch
If you activate the button "Pitch" the "Pitch" input field is activated and the
"No. of pts." input field (top of the dialogue) is deactivated. You determine the
number of measurement points for the element either by entering the number of
points or by entering the pitch. The pitch defines the distance of the individual
measurement points on the given length of the element.
Hint
It is possible that the actual number or pitch of the measured points differs
from the preset number or pitch.
Scanning speed
Enter the scanning speed in the adjacent input field. For the optimum scanning
speed refer to your records regarding the probing system and the CMM.
Filter
You can choose one of three filters from the drop-down menu. Read the
GEOPAK topic Filter contour for further information.
Expected deviation
You can input the expected deviation by clicking the button "Expected
deviation".
During scanning the probe always moves within a defined range. This is ensured
by setting a certain value for the deflection of the probe. The value of the
expected deviation results from the manufacturing process of the workpiece. That
means if you enter the maximum expected deviation between nominal geometry
and measurement point into the "Exp. deviation" input field, the optimal deflection
for your workpiece will be calculated.
Hint
If the "Exp. deviation" function is not activated the deflection of the CNC
parameters is used.
Setting the approach and after-run for scanning
During scanning, errors may occur in the start and end area. You can use the
input fields "Run in" and "Run out" to define an area in which no scanning takes
place. While moving within the area "Run in", the probe is not yet scanning. While
moving in the area "Run out", the probe is not scanning while it is moved away
from the scanning area. The selected measurement range is expanded by the
run in and the run out. Your measurement task should consider this to avoid a
collision while the probe is moving.
12.04.13 v3.5 265

CAT1000P
Hint
For scanning circles, surfaces or cylinders enter angles for run in and run
out.
For scanning lines, enter the value as a length.
For the scanning of cylinder it is assumed that you know that only solid
cylinders can be measured. Provided your controller has the "Scanning of
Known Elements" option, measurement will take place in spiral form.
Otherwise, superimposed circles will be measured.
8.6 Head Touch(PH20/REVO)

During head touch the measurement points can be measured only by moving the
probe head in two axes. This method allows a faster measurement of elements.
PH20 and REVO require an I++ server (Renishaw UCC server).
Consequently the settings for the probe, like speed or acceleration, are
made in the GEOPAK "Set I++ property" dialog box.
 Click this button to activate the "Head touch" combo box.

 Select one of the following touch modes from the list:
• "Fixed quill" - the measurement points are measured without
movement of the CMM.
• "All axes" - the measurement points are measured by
movement of the CMM and of the probe head (5 axis
measurement).
The "Stylus angle" and "Read actual angles" combo boxes are available
only if "All axes" is selected.
 If the current stylus angle is known, type the value in the "Stylus
angle" combo box.
is not known.
Note
The stylus angle is the angle in part co-ordinates where the measurement
starts. When probing in the XY plane, it is the angle to the Z axis (A
angle).
266 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Stylus angle during head touch

For small bores that are measured with head touch, there is a risk of
collision of the stylus tip with the edge of the bore. If this problem occurs,
the selected touch mode "Fixed quill" (head touch) is abandoned and
measurement is carried out with CMM probing. For more information, see
"Behavior of the UCC Server in Certain Measurement Situations".
Depending on the geometry of the system, it is possible that the bore is
measured with a combination of head touch and CMM probing. For more
information, see "PH20 I++ Integrators Guide – V 8.0".
Note
For the elements "Cylinder" (only outer cylinder), "Plane (grid)" and "Line"
the touch mode "All axes" is available.
For "Plane measurement (circular)" the touch mode "Fixed quill" is
available.
8.7 Element Line

8.7.1 Element Line: Introduction
Measurement points (first measurement point displayed in yellow, last

measurement point displayed in red), movement path (green) and probing
direction (blue arrows).
On the "Measure" menu, click "Line" to open the "Element Line" dialogue box.
Or click this button on the tool bar.

Objective
The objective of the dialogue is to create the part program commands for
measuring the element line.
12.04.13 v3.5 267

CAT1000P
Line measurement with head touch

The movement method "Scanning" is not available for head touch.
For more information, see "Head touch (PH20/REVO)".
Extend and reduce dialogue
The "Element line" dialogue box can be extended or reduced with

these buttons.
If you want to create a new part program, the element dialogue box offers
the data of the last part program. The data of the extended dialogue box
are also valid when you work with the reduced dialogue box.
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element cylinder" dialogue
box:
 First define the position of the lines. See also "Defining the position
of the line".
 Then enter the general data for the element. See also "General
inputs (line)".
 If you want to scan the line, enter the scanning parameters.

See also "Scanning with CAT1000P".
Following the data input you can
 check the measurement points (see "Check measurement points")
and
 edit the data (see "Edit the elements").
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element cylinder
is created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
measurement of the element.
For general help information when working with the dialogue box, see "Help
when working with the dialogue window".
Note
You can delete the data entered in the dialogue box at any time.
For this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in dialogue box).
The element created is stored in the GEOPAK part program as "Automatic

element measurement" if the following conditions are fulfilled:
The created element is positioned in one of the co-ordinate planes.
No measurement point is removed by the function "Check points".
No measurement point is removed by the collision control.
8.7.2 Help when working with the dialogue window

 Interaction between dialogue window and CAD model
268 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
• The 3D view and the dialogue window are interactive. This

means that by clicking in the model, the corresponding values
are shown in the dialogue window.
• Similarly, keyboard inputs made in the dialogue window directly
influence the 3D view.
 At the bottom of the dialogue window, you can see the Status line.
• On the left hand side of the status line, you can read which step
the CAT1000P expects to be the next. In most cases, this will
be to click on the 3D view for the purpose of entering data in the
input field of the dialogue window.
• The right-hand side of the status line displays the valid
measurement points followed by the total possible number of
measurement points in brackets.
 The flashing LED symbol indicates the input fields in which data will
be entered as a result of the next mouse click within the model.
 As soon as you have activated a dialogue window for

measuring an element, the cursor in the 3D view takes on the form
of crosshairs, with an 'i' displayed in one corner.
 In most cases, the 3D view

of your CAD model needs to be altered so that you can place your
mouse clicks on the correct position within the model. To facilitate
this, the following functions are available: Move, Turn, Centre,
Animation and Zoom. Refer to "Zoom".
After you have used one of the buttons to change the 3D

view it is necessary to click again on that same button to deactivate
the function.
Alternatively, just press the Ctrl-key and use the right or left or both
mouse keys at the same time to turn, shift and zoom. When you
release the Ctrl-key you return to the normal dialogue sequence.
8.7.3 General inputs (line)

The general inputs are stored for your next measurement. This means that you
will normally make these inputs for an element only once.
 Enter the name of the element in the middle section of the dialogue.
 CAT1000P suggests the next free memory number in the input field
"Memory".
 The input fields "Name" and "Memory" are displayed as inactive
when an element has already been opened in GEOPAK.
 In the input field "Number of points", define the number of points to
be measured.
 Left to the entry "Number of points" you find the button "Automatic
tolerance". For this read the topic "Programming help".
12.04.13 v3.5 269

CAT1000P
 In the middle section of the dialogue

window, select the desired type of calculation using the symbols.
See also "Type of calculation".
 In the middle section of the dialogue

window you find further symbols for the programming help (refer to
"Programming help").
 Two possibilities are availabe for the calculation of the

line. You can decide whether to calculate the geometrical element
line with the projected origin or with the centroid.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element line".
8.7.4 Programming help

The purpose of the programming help is to assist you when taking
measurements.
Automatic tolerance
 You have the option to subject properties of elements to an
automatic tolerance comparison in GEOPAK, following the
measurement.
 If the symbol is activated, the "Tolerance comparison" dialogue
window will open automatically immediately after the element is
finished. This dialogue window contains the nominal values
associated with the element. These are taken directly from the
model.
 This means that it is not necessary to perform the complex process
of reading the data from the drawing and entering it manually into
the dialogue window.
Loop counter
By incrementing the memory number by 1, the loop counter is taken into account
– however under the condition that you are within a loop in GEOPAK. If not, the
function is deactivated.
Automatic element finished

After the commands for element measurement have been transferred from
CAT1000P to GEOPAK, the command "Element finished" is transferred to
GEOPAK.
If a clearance height has been defined in GEOPAK and the display of the
advanced movement path is activated, the movement path will be displayed
again.
270 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
The dialogue is restarted after the measurement
8.7.5 Defining the position of the line

We recommend the following procedure for the option "Select complete edge":
 Select "Select complete edge" from the list box.
 Click near the edge of a surface within the CAD model. This should
be the surface in which the measurement points will be situated.
 The LED symbol for "Start point" flashes.
 Click on a point in the CAD model. This point defines the position of
the start point on the edge.
 The LED symbol for "End point" flashes.
the end point on the edge.
 The LED symbol for "Measurement height" flashes.
 Click on a point in the CAD model. This point defines the
measurement height.
 CAT1000P automatically writes the values for the start and end
point into the input field.
Measurement height
 The generated line is parallel to the activated edge (relative
measurement height) or it is parallel to one of the co-ordinate axes
(absolute measurement height). Refer to "Measurement height".
 Start and end point are dependent on the measurement height
setting (absolute or relative measurement height) as well as on the
edge offset. Refer to "Measurement height" and "Minimum edge
distance".
In the case of the element line, the options "Edge point" and "Plane point" are
used.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element line".
If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The element line has been created.
The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for measuring the element.
8.7.6 Measurement height

Define the measurement height in the line for measurement height (in the
extended dialogue for the elements).
Use this symbol to activate or deactivate the measurement height function.

CAT1000 offers two input modes for the measurement height:
 absolute measurement height and
 relative measurement height.
For the elements line, circle, cone, cylinder, you can choose between absolute
and relative measurement height. For the element plane you enter the relative
height.
12.04.13 v3.5 271

CAT1000P
8.7.6.1 Absolute measurement height

When you define an absolute measurement height, the reference point is always
the zero point of the CAD model.
The height is given as a value along the axis selected in the dialogue. You can
select the X, Y or Z axis.
When defining the axis of the measurement height, make sure to choose an
axis that is relevant to the selected element. Examples: You intend to measure a
circle which is positioned in the XY plane. In this case, you will select the Z axis
for the measurement height. You intend to measure a cylinder along the Z axis.
Therefore you will also select the Z axis for the measurement height. You intend
to measure a cone along the Z axis. So you will also select the Z axis for the
measurement height. The following applies for the element line: The direction of
the line must not correspond to the direction of the axis which indicates the
height. Example: You intend to measure a line along the Z axis. To indicate the
height, you may not select the Z axis.
Relative measurement height
When you define a relative measurement height, the reference point is always
the selected edge of the CAD model.
The height is given relative to the edge which was used to select the element.
Starting from this edge, the measurement points are moved by the entered
measurement height in direction of the surface you clicked on.
Entering the relative height is a much more flexible option.
 In this case you need not define an axis.
 You can also use this method when the elements are in a slanted
position.
8.7.7 Edge points

If you have selected the "Edge point" option, define the start and end point by
clicking on edge points. The line produced by clicking on the edge points either
runs parallel to one edge (relative measurement height) or one co-ordinate axis
(absolute measurement height). See also "Measurement height".
8.7.7.1 Edge point: Start

If you have activated "Edge point", you will see the instruction "Pick new start
point on edge" in the status line. Additionally, a flashing LED symbol indicates
which input fields of the dialogue require data.
Proceed as follows:
 Click on a surface near an edge.
 The edge point which is the "Start point" is identified in the model as
a sphere symbol.
 At the same time the co-ordinates of the start point are entered in
the dialogue window.
 The LED symbol for the "End point" flashes.
8.7.7.2 Edge point: End

The LED symbol for "End point" flashes. The status line shows the input
instruction "Move end point along measurement line".
CAT1000P expects you to define the end point by a mouse click into the CAD
model.
272 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
How to proceed:
 Click on the same edge you have clicked on before to define the
start point.
 The start point is no longer shown. With the aid of the measurement
height, the points to be measured are now calculated and displayed
together with their probing direction.
 The co-ordinates for the end point are entered into the input fields.
Note
The current measurement height is the same as the one entered for the last
measurement.
8.7.7.3 Measurement height

With an activated measurement height, the LED symbol for "Measurement
height" flashes. The status line shows the input instruction "Define the
measurement height".
Define the measurement height with a mouse click.
After entering the data, you can
 check the measurement points (refer to "Check measurement
points") and
 edit the data (refer to "Edit the elements").
8.7.8 Surface points

If you have selected the "Surface point" option, you can define start and end point
of a surface freely.
Note
If you intend to work with surface points, do not activate the measurement
height.
The line created by means of surface points must not necessarily run parallel to
an edge (relative measurement height) or to a co-ordinate axis (absolute
measurement height). Refer also to "Measurement height".
To define start and end point, click on the surface points.
The sequence of work steps corresponds to the procedure for the option "Edge
points".
After entering the data you can
 check the measurement points (refer to "Control of the
measurement points") and
 edit the data (refer to "Edit the elements").
8.7.9 Check measurement points

Before beginning the measurement, we recommend that you check the
distribution of the measurement points on the CAD model. It is particularly
important to check the probing direction.
8.7.9.1 Probing direction

The probing direction is calculated from the surface normal of the CAD model.
This is the surface upon which the points to be measured are located.
12.04.13 v3.5 273

CAT1000P
You can check the probing direction by means of the graphic.

Graphical check
Correct CAD model

The arrows meet the surface at right angles and point towards the surface.
The movement paths are represented as arrows between the measurement
points.
The measurement points are scalable. The movement paths, however, are
always displayed in the actual position in the model.
Errors in the CAD model

The arrows are not visible because the surface normal of the CAD model is
wrong.
For the elements point, line and plane (grid and circle), the following
applies:
In case of a wrong probing direction, you can reverse the probing

direction by clicking on the symbol "Change probing direction" (for detailed
information, see "Change probing direction").
Also refer to "Settings for probe display" and "Minimum edge distance".
274 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
For the elements circle, cone, sphere and cylinder the following applies:
In case of a wrong probing direction, you reverse the probing direction by clicking
on the symbol for the outside or the inside element.
After checking the data you can
 continue editing the data (refer to "Edit the elements") or
 end the creation of the element by clicking "OK".
8.7.10 Settings for probe display

To get to the dialogue "Settings for probe display", use the menu bar, "Settings,
Graphic".
Colour settings
Under “Colour settings” you define the colour for the first and the last
measurement point and the colours for “Move machine”, “Probing direction” and
“Rotating sphere”. Proceed as follows:
 Click in the colour bar.
 The Windows dialogue window "Colour" opens.
The intermediate points between the two end points are displayed using an
automatic colour transition scale.
Colours for removed points
Under "Colours for removed points" you define the colours for points that are not
measurable.
Proceed as follows:
 Click into the colour bar.
 The Windows dialogue "Colour" opens.
Magnification factor
The diameter of the measurement points in the 3D view is equivalent to the probe
diameter multiplied by the magnification factor. If the magnification factor is 1, the
probe will be displayed in its normal size.
Arrow head size / probe diameter as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the ratio of the length of the arrow head size
to the probe diameter as a percentage.
Leader size / probe diameter as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the ratio of the leader size to the probe
diameter as a percentage.
Probe point intrusion as a percentage
In this input field, you can determine the percentage proportion of the probe that
lies submerged within the work piece.
Note
In the following case, the display with probe point intrusion in the CAD
model is important – should the surface normal of the CAD model be
incorrect, there will still be a part of the probe point displayed in 3D view.
Without a representation of the intrusion, you would not be able to see
any points in the model.
12.04.13 v3.5 275

CAT1000P
Show
To view immediately all the settings in the 3D view, click on the "Show" button.
Show advanced movement path
See details under "Show advanced movement path"
8.7.11 Minimum edge distance

To get to the "Minimum edge distance" dialogue window, use the "Settings" menu
in the menu bar.
Minimum edge distance
You define the minimum edge distance in the input field. Any points that are
positioned nearer to an edge than the required minimum edge distance will be
deactivated in the course of the next check. Refer to "Check measurement
points".
Edge offset
Enter the edge offset in the lower input field of the dialogue "Minimum edge
distance". This distance needs to be defined only once and is subsequently
automatically used.
Background
 To allow a correct measurement, the probe may not be pointed
directly at an edge. It is possible that there are defects in the
material.
 The edge offset is
the distance of the outermost measurement point and the start point of a selected
edge and
the distance between the opposite outermost measurement point and the end
point of a selected edge.
Edge offset on the example of the "Element line".
276 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
1 = Edge offset
2 = Selected edge
3 = Start point of the selected edge
4 = End point of the selected edge
5 = First measurement point
6 = Last measurement point
8.8 Edit: Circle

8.8.1 Element Circle: Introduction
Measurement points (first measurement point yellow, last measurement point

red), movement path (green) and probing direction (blue arrows).
Opening the dialogue box On the "Measure" menu, click "Circle" to open the
"Element circle" dialogue box. Or click this button on the tool bar.
Objective
The objective of the dialogue is to create the part program commands to measure
the element circle.
Multiple circle measurement To measure many similar circles (for example hole
plate), you can use the function "Multiple circle measurement" that has been
specifically developed for this purpose. This will reduce the number of required
work steps significantly. See also "Multiple Circle Measurement". Circle
measurement with head touch The movement methods "Circular path", "Slot
width" and "Scanning" are not available for head touch.
The movement method "Thread pitch" is only available if "All axes" is selected as
touch mode. For more information, see "Head touch (PH20/REVO)". Circle
measurement with thread pitch For more information, see "Circle measurement
with thread pitch".
12.04.13 v3.5 277

CAT1000P
Extend and reduce dialogue box
The "Element circle" dialogue box can be extended or reduced

with these buttons.
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element circle" dialogue
box:
 First define the position of the circle. See also "Defining the position
of the circle".
 Then enter the general data of the element. See also "General
inputs (circle)".
 If you want to scan the circle, enter the scanning parameters. See
also "Scanning in CAT1000P".
and
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element circle is
created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
For general information about help when working with the dialogue box, see
"Help when working with the dialogue window".
Note
You can delete the data entered in the dialogue box at any time. For
this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in dialogue box).

The element created is positioned in one of the co-ordinate planes.
No measurement point is removed by the collision check.
8.8.2 General inputs (circle)

 CAT1000 suggests the next free memory number in the input field
"Memory".
 The input fields "Name" and "Memory" are displayed as passive
278 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P

be measured.
tolerance". For this read the topic "Programming Help".

 In the middle section of the dialogue window

you find further symbols for the programming help (refer to

circle. You can decide whether to calculate the geometrical element
circle with the projected origin or with the centroid.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element Circle".
8.8.3 Defining the position of the circle

We suggest the following work sequence:
 In the list box choose the option "Select complete edge".
 Click within the CAD model near the edge of a circle.
 The LED symbol for "Start angle" flashes.
the start angle.
 The LED symbol for "End angle" flashes.
the end angle.
 The LED symbol for "Measurement height" flashes.
Measurement height
 Click on a point within the CAD model. This point defines the
measurement height. For detailed information refer also to the topic
"Measurement height".
 CAT1000 automatically writes the value of the circle diameter into
the input field "Diameter".
 Depending on the point you have clicked, either the symbol for the
inside circle or for the outside circle is represented as active.
Furthermore, the start and end angles are written into the input
fields.
 Next to the symbols for the inside circle or outside circle, the co-
ordinates for the circle centre are shown.
12.04.13 v3.5 279

CAT1000P
8.8.3.1 Projection
As a rule
As a rule, the program calculates a plane from the measurement

points, followed by a check as to which basic plane is next to this calculated
plane. The points are projected into this plane (automatic projection plane).
The circle is calculated.
Problem cases
If the circle is positioned with its measurement points in an inclined position, the
automatic projection may be performed into the wrong plane.
In this case, deactivate the function "Automatic projection plane".
Set value of 3rd axis to zero: Activate this symbol for measuring circles
in different heights without a 3D-component, e.g. for the distance measurement.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element circle". If the inputs are
correct, confirm with "OK". The element circle has been created. The commands
are transferred to GEOPAK for measuring the element.
8.8.4 Circle Measurement and Thread Pitch

If you want to measure the position of a thread hole, click on the button
"Thread Pitch" and input the thread pitch.
If the button "Thread Pitch" is not activated, the CMM will drive on the same
height. That would falsify the position (see pictures below). If you have input the
thread pitch, the probing always takes place under the same conditions. This
way, a good position determination is possible.
Without thread pitch
With thread pitch

For the circle measurement with thread pitch the movement of the 3rd axis
depends on different parameters
 Clockwise or counter clockwise selection
 Sign of the thread pitch
280 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
The table below shows how an automatic circle measurement with a selected
thread pitch works in the XY plane.
Sign of thread pitch value Clockwise or Counter Movement of 3rd
clockwise axis
Positive Counter clockwise Z value increases
Positive Clockwise Z value decreases
Negative Counter clockwise Z value decreases
Negative Clockwise Z value increases
8.9 Element Cone

8.9.1 Element Cone: Introduction

measurement point in red), movement path (green) and probing direction
(blue arrows).
On the "Measure" menu, click "Cone" to open the "Element cone" dialogue box.

Objective
measuring the element cone.
Cone measurement with head touch
For more information, see "Head Touch (PH20/REVO)".
You can either extend or reduce the dialogue "Element cone"

using these buttons.
12.04.13 v3.5 281

CAT1000P
Work steps
We recommend the following sequence for the inputs in the "Element cone"
dialogue box:
 First define the position of the cone. See also "Defining the position
of a cone".
inputs (cone)".
and
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element cone is
created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
Note
You can delete the entered data in the dialogue box at any time.
For this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in the dialogue).
8.9.2 General inputs (cone)

"Memory".
be measured.
 In the input field "Number of circles", define the number of circles to
be measured.
 For the "Element cone", always the calculation type "Gauss" is
applied.
282 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P

To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element cone".
8.9.3 Defining the position of the cone

 From the list box, select the option "Select complete edge".
 Click within the CAD model on a surface near the edge of the circle
which forms a boundary with the required cone.
 Click on a point within the CAD model. This point defines the start
angle.
 The LED symbol for "End angle" flashes.
 Click on a point within a CAD model. This point defines the end
angle.
 The LED symbol for "Height 1" flashes.
 Define the measurement height (refer to "Measurement height").
• Define the first measurement height with a mouse click into
the CAD model (upper circle of the cone). The first
measurement height is written into the input field. The diameter
of the upper circle of the cone is written into the input field at the
bottom of the dialogue window.
• Then define the second measurement height with a mouse
click into the CAD model (lower circle of the cone). The second
measurement height is written into the input field. The diameter
of the lower circle of the cone is written into the input field at the
bottom of the dialogue window.
 Depending on the point you have clicked on, either the symbol for
the inside cone or for the outside cone is shown as active.
Furthermore, start angle and end angle are written into the input
fields.
 Next to the symbols for inside cone and outside cone, the co-
ordinates of the centre point of the circle on height 1 are displayed.
To make further entries, go back to the topic "Element cone".
If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The element circle has been created.
The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for measuring the element.
12.04.13 v3.5 283

CAT1000P
8.10 Element Sphere

8.10.1 Element Sphere: Introduction

Opening the dialogue box On the "Measure" menu, click "Sphere" to open the
"Element Sphere" dialogue box. Or click the button on the tool bar.
Objective
measuring the element sphere.
Sphere measurement with head touch
The "Element sphere" dialogue box can be extended or reduced

with these buttons.
the data of the last part program. The data of the extended dialogue are
also valid when you work with the reduced dialogue box.
284 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element sphere" dialogue
box:
 First define the position of the lines. See also "Defining the position
of the sphere".
inputs (sphere)".
After the data input you can
and
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element sphere is
created. The commands are transformed to GEOAK for
Note
For this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in the dialogue).
8.10.2 General Inputs (Sphere)

 CAT1000 suggests the next free memory number in the input field
"Memory".
be measured.
 In the input field "Number of circles", define the number of circles to
be measured.
 Left to the entry "Number of points" you find the button "Automatic
tolerance". For this read the topic "Programming help"

window, select the required type of calculation using the relevant
symbols. Also refer to "Type of calculation".
 In the middle section of the dialogue window you find further
symbols for the programming help (refer to "Programming help").
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element sphere".
8.10.3 Defining the position of the sphere

 The LED symbol for "Select sphere" flashes.
12.04.13 v3.5 285

CAT1000P
 In the CAD model, click on the surface of the sphere near the edge
of a circle which is forming the boundary of the required sphere.
 CAT1000 automatically writes the values of the centre point of the
selected sphere into the input fields. Furthermore, the diameter of
the selected sphere is written into the input field. These input fields
are located at the bottom of the extended dialogue next to the
symbols for inside and outside sphere.
 Depending on the point on which you have clicked, either the
symbol for the outside sphere or the inside sphere is displayed as
active. Furthermore, the start and end angles are entered into the
input fields (for detailed information refer to "Angle").
 Click into the CAD model to define the zenith angle (for detailed
information refer to "Zenith angle").
 To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element sphere".
 If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The element sphere has
been created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
measuring the element.
8.11 Element Plane (Grid)

8.11.1 Element Plane (Grid): Introduction

On the "Measure" menu, click "Plane (grid)" to open the "Element plane (grid)"
dialogue box.

Objective
measuring the element plane.
Plane measurement (grid) with head touch
The movement method "Scanning" is not available for head touch.
286 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
The "Element plane (grid)" dialogue box can be extended or

reduced with these buttons.
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element plane (grid)"
dialogue box:
 First define the position of the plane. See also " Defining the position
of the plane (grid)".
 Then enter the general data for the element. See also " General
inputs (plane / grid)".
 If you want to scan the plane, enter the scanning parameters.

See also "Scanning with CAT1000".
After the data input you can
and
 edit the data (see "Edit the Elements").
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element plane is
created. The commands are transformed to GEOAK for
Note
For this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in the dialogue
box).
8.11.2 General inputs (plane)

"Memory".
 In the input field "Number of lines" define the number of lines to be
measured.
 In the input field "Number of points ", define the number of points to
be measured.
12.04.13 v3.5 287

CAT1000P

See also "Type of Calculation".


plane. You can decide whether to calculate the geometrical element
plane with the projected origin or with the centroid.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element plane (grid)".
8.11.3 Defining the position of the plane (grid)

 In the list box click on the button "Select complete edge".
 The LED symbol for "Select complete edge" flashes.
 Click in the CAD model on a surface near to an edge to define the
first line to be measured. This is the surface on which the
measurement points shall be positioned.
 The lines you have defined in the input field "Number of lines" will be
equally distributed between the first line (measurement height 1)
and the last line (measurement height 2).
The measurement points you have defined in the input field
"Number of points per line" will be equally distributed between the
start and the end point of each line.
 The LED symbol for "start point" flashes.
 Determine the start and the end point with a mouse click.
 Start and end points of the individual lines depend on the relevant
measurement height and the edge offset. Refer to the topic
"Defining the measurement height" and "Minimum edge distance".
 At the same time, the data for the start and end point of the first line
to be measured are entered into the input fields at the bottom of the
extended dialogue window.
 The LED symbol for measurement height flashes.
 Now you define the measurement height 1 and measurement height
2 with a mouse click into the CAD model. Refer to "Defining the
measurement height".
For more information about this topic, refer to the topic "Terms".
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element plane".
If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The element line is created. The
commands are transformed to GEOAK for measuring the element.
288 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.11.4 Defining the measurement height (plane)

Height 1
 Click on the LED symbol for "Height 1" to define the measurement
height 1.
 The measurement height 1 is the distance between the first line to
be measured and the reference line (edge).
Height 2
 Click on the LED symbol for "Height 2" to define the measurement
height 2.
 The measurement height 2 is the distance between the last line to
be measured and the edge positioned opposite the reference line at
the level of the point you clicked on.
For explanations about this topic, refer to "Terms".
8.11.5 Terms used in the dialogue "Element plane"

The reference line is located on the edge which you have selected by clicking
with the mouse on the surface in the vicinity of the edge.
The first line to be measured is parallel (at the distance height 1) to the reference
line. If height 1 = 0, the reference line coincides with the first line to be measured.
Height 1 represents the shift of the reference line towards the opposite edge.
The final line to be measured is parallel (at distance height 2) to the edge situated
opposite and parallel to the edge clicked on. If height 2 = 0, the last line to be
measured is located on the edge opposite and parallel to the edge clicked on.
Height 2represents the shift of the last line to be measured towards the edge
which lies opposite the reference line at the level of the point clicked on. The shift
in height 2 runs towards the reference line.
Illustration of heights 1 and 2:
12.04.13 v3.5 289

CAT1000P
1 = Height 1
2 = Height 2
3 = This is where you clicked within the model
4 = Measurement point 1
5 = Reference line
6 = Opposite edge
8.12 Element Plane (Circle)

8.12.1 Element Plane (Circular): Introduction
On the "Measure" menu, click "Plane (Circular)" to open the "Element plane
(circular)" dialogue box.

Objective
the element plane.
290 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Plane measurement (circular) with head touch

The movement methods "Circular path", "Slot width" and "Scanning" are not
available for head touch.
The "Element plane (circular)" dialogue box can be extended or

reduced with these buttons.
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element plane (circular)"
dialogue box:
 First define the position of the plane. See also "Defining the position
of the plane (circular)".
inputs (plane / circular)".
 If you want to scan the plane, enter the scanning parameters.

See also "Scanning in CAT1000".
and
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element plane is
created. The commands are transferred to GEOAK for
measurement of the elements.
Note
You can delete the entered data in the dialogue box at any time. For
this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in the dialogue box).

8.12.2 General inputs (plane / circular)

12.04.13 v3.5 291

CAT1000P
"Memory".
be measured.



plane. You can decide whether to calculate the geometrical element
plane with the projected origin or with the centroid.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element plane (circular)".
8.12.3 Determine the Position of the Plane (Circular)

CAT1000P offers two options to determine a plane by circle measurement.
Option "Select complete edge"
 From the list box, select the option "Select complete edge".
 The LED symbol for "Select complete edge" flashes.
 In the CAD model, click in an area near the circle edge. The
measurement points are to be positioned in this area.
 The circle is displayed in 3D view.
 In the text boxes of the enhanced dialogue box enter the co-
ordinates of the centre of the circle, in which the measurement
points are positioned.
 You can change the number of measurement points. Click the

"Calculate" button afterwards.
 The circle with the new number of measurement points is displayed
in 3D view.
 The circle diameter depends on the diameter of the circle that is
calculated with the selected circle edge. The circle diameter also
depends on the minimum edge distance.
 To change the start angle and end angle, click in the CAD model.
292 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 To change the diameter of the circle that contains the measurement

points, click in the CAD model.
 If the entries are correct, click "OK". The element plane is created.
The command is transferred to GEOPAK for the element
measurement.
Note
The diameter of the circle, in which the measurement points are
positioned, is calculated automatically from the diameter of the circle that
has been calculated with the selected circle edge and the minimum edge
distance.
The minimum edge distance is added to the radius, for example, if the
measurement points are to be positioned on a bolt.
The minimum edge distance is subtracted from the radius, for example, if
the measurement points are to be positioned on a surface that surrounds
a hole.
Option "Select circle centre"
 From the list box, select the option "Select circle centre".
 The LED symbol for "Select circle centre" flashes.
 In the CAD model click a point on a surface. The measurement
points are to be positioned in this area. The point that you click is
the centre of the circle.
 The circle is displayed in 3D view.
 In the text boxes of the enhanced dialogue box the co-ordinates of
the centre of the circle in which the measurement points are
positioned are entered by CAT1000 automatically.
 You can change the number of measurement points. Click the

"Calculate" button afterwards.
 The circle with the new number of measurement points is displayed
in 3D view.
 To change the start angle and end angle, click in the CAD model.
 To change the diameter of the circle that contains the measurement
points, click in the CAD model.
 If the entries are correct, click "OK". The element plane is created.
The command is transferred to GEOPAK for the element
measurement.
Slot width and circular path
When the function "Slot width" is activated, the diameter is automatically

determined so that the measurement points are in the middle of the slot.
The function "Circular path" in the enhanced dialogue box is automatically

deactivated when the function "Slot width" is activated and vice versa.
See also:
Element Plane (Circular)
12.04.13 v3.5 293

CAT1000P
8.13 Element Plane (Gasket)

8.13.1 Element Plane (Gasket) in CAT1000P
In the "Element plane (gasket)" dialogue box you create a part program
command for the measurement of a plane. Measurement is carried out with the
"Gasket scan" function.
The element plane in CAT1000P can be created with a grid measurement or a
circular measurement. The functions "Create measurement path" and "Gasket
scan" are an additional possibility to create a plane in CAT1000P.
You can use the functions "Create measurement path" and "Gasket scan" to
measure an element plane with a measurement path that you have determined
flexibly on the plane before. Complex workpiece planes can then be measured
easily. The same also applies to free form surfaces.
The element plane measured is used for the tolerance comparison flatness.
Measurement path for gasket scan

Condition
 Before you can create an element plane with the "Gasket scan"
function, you must have created a measurement path.
 See also " Create Measurement Path."
Notes
Each "Gasket scan" command contains a GEOPAK scan command. For
this, a theoretical contour is required. This contour is created
automatically and obtains a memory number that exceeds the highest
available "Element contour" memory number by one.
The GWS file is given the name of the measurement path and is saved in
the part directory. Each measurement path should have a clear name to
prevent that the GWS file of an earlier created measurement path is
overwritten.
The "Tip angle" option is only available if you use a Renishaw "REVO"
measuring head with a "RSP2" probe.
294 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
How to open the dialogue box

On the menu bar, click "Measure", and then click "Plane (gasket)" to open the
"Element plane (gasket)" dialogue box.
"Element plane (gasket)" dialogue box

Procedure
 Select an already existing measurement path.
 Or create a new measurement path. See also " Create

Measurement Path."
 Click the start point on the CAD model in 3D view or type the values
of the start point.
 If you do not scan a closed contour, click the end point on the CAD
model in 3D view or type the values of the end point.
 Tip angle: Determine the tip angle for the scanning of the
measurement points. This function is only available if you use a
Renishaw "REVO" measuring head with a "RSP2" probe.
12.04.13 v3.5 295

CAT1000P
 Safety distance: The safety distance is the distance between

theoretical touch point on the workpiece surface and the point, at
which the CMM changes from movement speed to measurement
speed.
 Scan pitch: A small pitch means many measurement points; a large
pitch means few measurement points.
 Scan speed: The scan speed is the speed of the CMM during
scanning.
 Deflection: To ensure a contact with the workpiece, the scanning
probes work with a so-called deflection. The control ensures that the
deflection at any position of the workpiece does not exceed the
value defined in the dialogue box.
 Measurement length: The measurement length limits the search
path in probe direction. Thus, you avoid a collision with the probe
stem. See also "Z-Offset".
 At the bottom of the dialogue box you determine the name and the
memory number of the element plane.
 Click the "Generate" button to obtain a preview of the scanning path.
 Click the "OK" button. The scan command is transferred to
GEOPAK.
Further topics about the "Element plane (gasket)" dialogue box
The "Element plane (gasket)" dialogue box offers further options. See also "
Options in the "Element Plane (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in CAT1000P."
8.13.2 Options in the "Element Plane (Gasket)" Dialogue Box in

CAT1000P
 If you have changed parameters in the text boxes, click the
"Calculate" button to update the 3D view.
 Click the "Collision check" button to start collision check. See

also "Collision Check (CAT1000P)."
 Click the "Reset dialogue values" button to delete all entries

made.
 Determine if you want to create a closed contour or an open

contour by selecting or deselecting the button.
 If the probe direction is not correct, you can change the probe
direction by clicking the "Change probing direction" button. See also
 If you click the "Change scanning direction" button, scanning

takes place in the opposite direction.
 You can exchange the start and end point.
 If you click the "Automatic tolerance" button, tolerance

comparison of the element plane is automatically carried out in
GEOPAK after measurement.
296 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 At the bottom of the dialogue box

select the type of calculation by selecting the buttons. See also
"Type of Calculation".
 There are two possibilities to calculate the plane. The

geometrical element plane can either be calculated with the
"projected origin" calculation method or with the "centroid"
calculation method.
 At the bottom of the dialogue box you will find further

buttons for the programming help. See also "Programming Help".
8.14 Element Cylinder

8.14.1 Element Cylinder: Introduction
Measurement points (first measurement point yellow, last measurement point

red), movement path (green) and probing direction (blue arrows). Setting:
Measure circle.
On the "Measure" menu, click "Cylinder" to open the "Element cylinder" dialogue
box.

Objective
the element cylinder.
Cylinder measurement with head touch
The movement methods "Circular path", "Slot width" and "Scanning" are not
available for head touch.
The movement method "Thread pitch" is only available if "All axes" is selected as
touch mode.
12.04.13 v3.5 297

CAT1000P

The "Element cylinder" dialogue box can be extended or reduced

with these buttons.
Work steps
The following order is recommended for inputs in the "Element cylinder" dialogue
box:
 First define the position of the cylinder. See also "Defining the
position of the cylinder".
inputs (cylinder)".
 If you want to scan the cylinder, enter the scanning

parameters. See also "Scanning in CAT1000P".
and
 If the inputs are correct, click "OK" to confirm. The element cylinder
is created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
Note
You can delete the data entered in the dialogue box at any time. For
this, click the "Reset dialogue values" button (top left in dialogue box).

While creating the element you have used the movement method "Circle
measurement".
298 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.14.2 General inputs (cylinder)

"Memory".
be measured.
 In the input field "Number of circles", define the number of circles to
be measured.

See also "Type of Calculation".


cylinder. You can decide whether to calculate the geometrical
element cylinder with the projected origin or with the centroid.
To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element cylinder".
8.14.3 Defining the position of the cylinder

 Select the option "Select complete edge" from the list box.
 Click in the CAD model on the surface near to the circle edge that
borders the required cylinder.
 CAT1000P writes the values of the centre point of the selected
circle into the input fields. Furthermore, the diameter is entered.
These input fields are located in the lower part of the extended
dialogue next to the symbols for outside cylinder and inside
cylinder.
 Depending on the point you clicked on, the symbol either for the
outside cylinder or the inside cylinder is represented as active.
Furthermore, the start and end angles are written into the input
fields (in the top part of the extended dialogue).
 Click in the CAD model on a point. This point defines the start angle.
 The LED symbol for end angle flashes.
12.04.13 v3.5 299

CAT1000P
 Click in the CAD model on a point. This point defines the end angle.
 The LED symbol for measurement height 1 flashes.
Measurement height
 Click in the CAD model on a point. this point defines the
measurement height 1 (upper circle of the cylinder).
 The LED symbol for measurement height 2 flashes.
 Click in the CAD model on a point. This point defines the
measurement height 2 (lower circle of the cylinder).
 For detailed information, refer to the topic "Measurement height".
 To make further inputs, go back to the topic "Element cylinder".
 If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The element cylinder has
been created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for
measuring the element.
8.15 Hole Shapes in CAT1000P

8.15.1 Hole Shapes in CAT1000P: Introduction
Start Dialogue
To get to the dialogue "Hole shape element" in the program CAT1000P, proceed
via the menu bar / Measure / Hole shape element.
Or click the symbol in the toolbar.

Task
Create part program commands with CAT1000P. GEOPAK measures the "Hole
shape element".
You can measure the following hole shape elements with the dialogue "Hole
shape element":
 Square
 Rectangle
 Triangle
 Trapezoid
 Hexagon
 Slot
 Drop
For measuring an inclined circle, read the topic "Inclined Circle in CAT1000P".
Work Steps
We suggest the following sequence of inputs in the dialogue "Hole shape
element":
 Prepare the measurement in the dialogue "Hole shape element".
Read the topic " Hole Shape Element: Preparation".
 Then define a plane by clicking into the CAD model. In the CAD
model, click the plane near to the edge that limits the required hole
shape element.
300 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 The program CAT1000P automatically detects the type of the hole

shape element. The element type is shown in the dialogue (in the
centre of the dialogue).
 If the inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The desired hole shape
element has been created. The commands are transferred to
GEOPAK for measuring the element.
8.15.2 Hole Shape Element: Preparation

Preparing the work steps
We suggest the following sequence of inputs in the dialogue "Hole shape
element":
 On the left side of the dialogue, you define the method for creating
the plane.
• You define if you want to create a plane by measuring
• or if you want to use a memory recall
• or if you want to create a plane as a theoretical element

plane.
 In the upper part of the dialogue (below "Plane") you enter the name
of the element "Plane".
 In the input field "Memory", CAT1000P suggests the number of the
next available memory.
 In the input field "Points per side", you enter the number of the
points to be measured on the plane, i.e.
• the points per side of the element to be measured
• on the plane near the edge.
 In the input field "Distance to edge" you can adapt the distance.
You can also change the distance by clicking into the 3D-view after
first having clicked the LED symbol "distance to edge".
 In the middle part of the dialogue, enter the name of the hole shape
element.
 In the input field "Memory", CAT1000P suggests the number of the
 In the input field "Number of points", the program CAT1000P
displays the number of the points to be measured for the hole shape
element.
 In the input field "Measurement depth" you can change the
measurement depth in order to position the points on the plate
edge.
 In the input field "Corner offset" you can change the distance of the
measurement points of the hole shape element to the next edge.
You can also change the distance by clicking into the 3D-view after
first having clicked the LED symbol in front of "Edge distance".
12.04.13 v3.5 301

CAT1000P
Further options
In the middle part of the dialogue window, select the

required kind of calculation using the symbols. See also "Kind of Calculation".
Calculate
If you have manually changed data in the input fields of the dialogue,
subsequently click "Calculate".
The points in 3D-view are updated.
You can change the data inputs in the dialogue at any time by clicking
the button "Reset dialogue values".
Change probing direction. For this, refer to the topic "Change Probing
Direction":
The programming helps (additional buttons) in the dialogue "Hole shape element"
are described in the help topic "Hole Shape Element: Programming Helps".
8.15.3 Hole Shape Element: Programming Helps

The programming helps offer support for your measurement tasks.
Automatic Tolerance
 You can opt for an automatic tolerance comparison of properties of
elements in GEOPAK after the measurement.
 If the corresponding symbol is active, the dialogue "Tolerance
comparison" opens immediately after you have completed the
element. This dialogue contains the nominal values for the element.
These are taken directly from the model.
 So you need no longer read out these data from the drawing and
enter these data manually into the dialogues.
Loop counter
If the memory number is incremented by 1, the loop counter registers this
incremented value if you are in a loop in GEOPAK. Otherwise, this function is
inactive.
The dialogue will restart after finish for a new element.
8.16 Inclined Circle

8.16.1 Inclined Circle in CAT1000: Introduction
Start Dialogue In CAT1000P you get to the dialogue "Element inclined circle" via
the menu bar / Measure / Inclined circle, or by clicking the symbol in the toolbar.
302 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Task
You create part program commands with CAT1000P. GEOPAK measures the
element "Inclined circle".
Work steps
We suggest the following sequence of inputs in the dialogue "Element inclined
circle":
 First prepare the measurement in the dialogue "Element inclined
circle". For the, read the topic "Element Inclined Circle: Preparation".
 Then define a plane by clicking into the CAD-model. Click in the
CAD-model on the plane near the edge that limits the desired
element "Inclined circle".
 Click the button "Open circle dialogue" to define the circle. For this,
read the help topic "Element Circle".
 If your inputs are correct, confirm with "OK". The desired element
"Inclined circle" has been created. The commands are transferred to
GEOPAK for element measurement.
8.16.2 Element Inclined Circle: Preparation

Preparatory work steps
We suggest the following sequence of inputs in the dialogue "Element inclined
circle":
 On the left side of the dialogue, you define the method for creating
the plane.
• You define if you want to create a plane by measuring
• or if you want to use a memory recall
• or if you want to create a plane as a theoretical element

plane.
 In the middle part of the dialogue you enter the name of the element
"Plane".
 In the input field "Memory", CAT1000 suggests the number of the
 In the input field "Number of points", you enter the number of points
to be measured on the plane. These are the points on the plane
near to the edge of the element "Inclined circle".
 In the input field "Distance to edge" you can change the distance of
the measurement points to the edge.
Further options
In the middle part of the dialogue window, select the

required kind of calculation using the symbols. See also "Kind of Calculation".
If you have manually changed data in the input fields of the dialogue,
subsequently click "Calculate".
12.04.13 v3.5 303

CAT1000P
The points in 3D-view are now updated and CAT1000 checks all inputs as to their
consistency.
You can delete the data inputs in the dialogue at any time by clicking the
button "Reset dialogue values".
The programming helps (additional buttons) in the dialogue "Element inclined
circle" are described in the help topic "Element Inclined Circle: Programming
Helps".
8.16.3 Element Inclined Circle: Programming Helps

The programming helps provide support for performing your measurement tasks.
If the memory number is incremented by 1, the loop counter registers this

incremented value if you are in a loop in GEOPAK. Otherwise, this function is
inactive.
The dialogue will restart after finish for a new element.
8.17 Edit Elements

8.17.1 Edit Elements (General)
8.17.1.1 Edit the Elements: Overview
 After you have created the element, you can edit the data.
 You can edit data either by clicking with the mouse within the 3D
view or by making keyboard entries in the dialogue window.
 The 3D view and the dialogue window are interactive. In other
words, when you click on the 3D view of the CAD model the
corresponding values automatically appear in the dialogue window.
 Similarly, dialogue inputs made using the keyboard have a direct
effect on the graphical representation.
 If you wish to enter new data in the input fields labeled with
an LED symbol, simply click on the LED symbol. This symbol will
now begin to flash. By clicking with the mouse on the model, the
corresponding values are displayed in the dialogue window. It is of
course also possible to enter values in the input fields manually.
For editing data, CAT1000P also provides the option of altering or optimising
movement paths using the following functions:
• Exchange start and end point (line)
• Exchange and flip start and end point (plane)
• Exchange start and end angle (circle, cone, sphere, cylinder)
• Movement path (circle, cone, sphere, cylinder)
• Measuring lines or measuring circles (cylinder)
You can use the following functions when editing all elements:
Check points
304 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Calculate
For each specific element there are also specific functions available for
editing. Please see the following topics:
Edit (Element line)
Edit (Element circle)
Edit (Element cone)
Edit (Element sphere)
Edit (Element cylinder)
Edit (Element plane / grid)
Edit (Element plane / circular)
8.17.1.2 Check points

It is possible to perform a check of each and all measurement points to verify that
they are in fact located on the surface. In case that a measurement point is not
located on the surface (e.g. within a gap), this point is displayed in a colour of
your choice.
Also refer to "Settings for probe display".
If individual points are lost as a result of this check, GEOPAK can not use
the function "Automatic element measurement". In this case, only the
probing points and the intermediate positions are stored in the parts
program.
Any points that are positioned closer to the edge than the minimum edge
distance requires will be deactivated in the course of the check. To set the
minimum edge distance, use the dialogue "Minimum edge distance".
See also "Minimum edge distance".
8.17.1.3 Calculate
If you have changed data in the input fields of the dialogue manually, click on
"Calculate" afterwards.
The points in the 3D view are now updated. In addition, CAT1000P checks the
consistency of all inputs and, if applicable, corrects the values automatically.
This excludes the possibility of contradictory data in the different input fields.
12.04.13 v3.5 305

CAT1000P
8.17.2 Edit: Line

8.17.2.1 Edit Element Line: Overview
The following functions are available for editing the element line:
Check points
Calculate
When you have finished editing the data, confirm with "OK". The element has
been created. The commands are transferred to GEOPAK for measuring the
element.
8.17.2.2 Exchange start and end point

The values for the points are exchanged. The display of the
measurement points on the CAD model is automatically updated.
8.17.2.3 Change probing direction

Click on the "Change probing direction" symbol when the surface

normal in the CAD model is wrong. CAT1000P reverses the surface normal
automatically.
Reverse the surface normal
 The surface normal is used to calculate the probing direction. The
surface normal usually points from the material outwards, in
particular with volume models (e.g. models with an input in STEP
format).
 It is, however, also possible that the surface normal leads into the
material. This is often the case with specifically surface-oriented
models (e.g. VDAFS, IGES). In this case, the CAT1000P would
calculate the probing direction wrongly. Collisions will occur.
 CAT1000P automatically reverses the normal in the event of
recognisable errors occurring in the CAD model. However,
CAT1000P can not recognise all instances of error in the CAD
model.
In such a case, the 3D view of the measurement points preview
immediately reveals whether the surface normal and the associated
calculated probing direction are correct. If the probing direction is
wrong you can reverse the surface normal with a mouse click.
8.17.3 Edit: Circle

8.17.3.1 Edit Element Circle: Overview
The following functions are available for editing the element circle:
306 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Check points
Calculate
Angle
Define movement strategy
When you have finished editing the data, confirm with "OK". The element has
been created.
8.17.3.2 Angle
 Click on a point in the CAD model to define the required start angle.
This point should have the required angle to the circle plane.
 Now click on a point in the CAD model, to define the required end
angle.
 The display of the measurement points in the 3D view updates itself
automatically. Check the display to determine if the measurement
points have the optimum distribution.
Hint
To check the start and end angle we recommend that you view the circle
and the model from above in the 3D view.
By clicking on the symbol you can exchange the start and end angle.
The display of the measurement points in the 3D view is automatically updated.
By clicking on the symbol you can determine that a full circle is to be

measured.
8.17.3.3 Movement strategy (circle)

The functions "Circular" or "Slot width" are used to avoid the occurrence of
collisions.
Circular
If your CMM possesses the function of travelling a circular orbit, you

should activate this function when you wish to measure an external circle (e.g. a
bolt). You will avoid the intermediate positions which would be necessary when
travelling on straight paths.
Slot width
If your CMM does not possess the function of travelling a circular

orbit, you should determine a slot width for an external circle you wish to measure
(by clicking on the symbol or by manual input). This slot width is an indication of
the amount of space available for moving. Following this, the movement paths
between the probes are calculated as follows:
 from this slot width
 from the current probe sphere diameter and
 from the safety distance.
12.04.13 v3.5 307

CAT1000P
The number of intermediate positions calculated is always the smallest possible.

It depends essentially on the number of measurement points and the slot width.
If you wish to change the slot width, click on the symbol. Then proceed as
follows:
 Click on the surface near the edge bounding the slot.
 The numerical value is entered automatically in the input field.
 As with all input data, you can also enter the slot width manually.
Movement direction
Define the movement direction by clicking on the symbol either
 in counter clockwise direction or
 clockwise direction.
8.17.4 Edit: Cone

8.17.4.1 Edit Element Cone: Overview
The following functions are available for editing the data of the element cone:
Check points
Calculate
Angle
Movement strategy
8.17.4.2 Angle
angle.
Hint

measured.
308 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.17.4.3 Movement Strategy (Cone, Sphere)

Circular path
If your CMM is able to move along a circular path, activate this function if
you want to measure an outer circle (for example a bolt). You avoid intermediate
positions which would be necessary when moving on straight paths.
Movement direction
Define the movement direction by clicking one of the buttons.
 "Counterclockwise"
 "Clockwise"
Note
For a cone, the movement direction depends on the cone axis. You
determine the direction with the right-hand rule. If the thumb of your right
hand shows in direction of the apex, the fingers show the
counterclockwise direction of rotation (see illustration). For example, if you
measure a taper hole (inside cone) and you determine the movement
direction, make sure to adhere to this dependency.
Determination of the direction of rotation by means of the right-hand rule
8.17.5 Edit: Sphere

8.17.5.1 Edit Sphere: Overview
The following functions are available for editing the data of the element sphere:
Check points
Calculate
12.04.13 v3.5 309

CAT1000P
Angle
Zenith angle
Define movement strategy
8.17.5.2 Angle
angle.
Hint

measured.
8.17.5.3 Zenith Angle (Sphere)

For the element sphere, the measurement height is determined using angles.
The height angle is calculated from
 the vector of the of the centre point of the sphere to a point on the
circle and
 the axis for the absolute measurement height. The direction of this
axis defines zero degree.
Proceed as follows:
 Click on the LED symbol by the input field for measurement height
1. Here you can define the angle for the first circle measurement.
Click on a point in the CAD model on the sphere through which the
first circle should run.
 The flashing LED symbol now appears next to the input field for
measurement height 2.
 Here you can define the angle for the final circle measurement.
Click on a point in the CAD model on the sphere through which the
final circle should run.
 The circles located between the first and last circles are distributed
in equal angular distances.
For the element sphere, you define an angle. For the elements cylinder
and cone, however, you enter a height in millimetres in the input fields
"Measurement height 1" and "Measurement height 2".
310 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Point on upper pole
When you click on the symbol, a point is added to the upper pole. The
circles are uniformly distributed between the 2nd measurement height and the
pole. The input of the first measurement height is not required.
Point on lower pole
Proceed as for a point on the upper pole.

Note:
The total number of measurement points results from the number of
circles times the number of points. Added to this is a point (either only a
point on upper pole or only a point on lower pole) or two measurement
points (point on upper pole and point on lower pole).
Toggle the axis
By clicking on the symbol "Toggle axis for absolute measurement height",

you change the axis that defines zero degrees for the zenith angle.

Circular path
Movement direction
 "Clockwise"
Note
12.04.13 v3.5 311

CAT1000P
8.17.6 Edit: Plane (Grid)

8.17.6.1 Edit Plane (Grid): Overview
The following functions are available for editing the data of the element plane:
Check points
Calculate
Exchange start and end point and
Flip start and end point
Catch main axis


automatically.
format).
312 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P

model.
8.17.6.3 Exchange / flip start and end point (plane)


The start and end points on the reference line are exchanged.
Flip start and end point

The start point is exchanged with the point located diagonally opposite.
Example:
The situation is as follows:
You have defined a plane with three lines and three points per line. You have
hidden the surfaces. The first measurement point is displayed in yellow, the last
in blue.
Click on "Exchange start and end point".

The start and end points on the reference line are exchanged.
The measurement points will now be distributed as in the illustration below.
12.04.13 v3.5 313

CAT1000P
Now undo the last step by again clicking on "Exchange start and end
point".
The measurement points will now be distributed as in the following illustration.
Now click on "Flip start and end point". The start point is exchanged
with the point located diagonally opposite.
The measurement points will now be distributed as in the illustration below.
8.17.6.4 Catch main axis (plane)

With the "Catch main axis" function, you can orientate the reference
line of a plane to a main axis of the CAD model, in case the reference line be
slanting.
Example:
 You would like to measure a plane on a surface limited by a round
boundary.
 If you define the reference line with "Select complete edge", the
reference line would always be in a slanted position.
 To align the reference line towards a main axis of the

CAD model click on the "Catch main axis" symbol.
314 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.17.7 Edit Plane (Circle)

8.17.7.1 Edit Plane (Circular): Overview
The following functions are available for editing the data for the element plane
(circular):
Check points
Calculate
Movement strategy
Angle
8.17.7.2 Angle
angle.
Hint

measured.

Circular path
Movement direction
 "Clockwise"
12.04.13 v3.5 315

CAT1000P
Note


automatically.
format).
316 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P

model.
8.17.8 Edit: Cylinder

8.17.8.1 Edit Cylinder: Overview
The following functions are available for editing the data for the element cylinder:
Check points
Calculate
Angle
Movement strategy
8.17.8.2 Angle
angle.
Hint

measured.
8.17.8.3 Movement strategy (cylinder)

The following options are available for moving and measuring:
Measure lines or circles
You can either move or measure along the lines or along the circles.
 Either click on the "Measure lines" symbol, or
 on the "Measure circles" symbol.
12.04.13 v3.5 317

CAT1000P
Circular
If your CMM possesses the function of moving a circular orbit, you

should activate the function when you wish to measure an outer circle (e.g. a
bolt). You will avoid the intermediate positions which would be necessary when
moving on straight paths.
Slot width
If your CMM does not possess the function of moving a circular orbit,
you should determine a slot width for an outer circle you wish to measure (by
clicking on the symbol or by manual input). This slot width is an indication of the
amount of space available for moving. Following this, the moving paths between
the probings are calculated as follows:
 From this slot width
 From the current probe sphere diameter and
 From the safety distance.
The number of intermediate positions calculated is always the smallest possible.
It depends essentially on the number of measurement points and the slot width.
If you wish to change the slot width click on the symbol. Then proceed
as follows:
 Click on the surface near the edge bounding the slot.
 The numerical value is entered automatically in the input field.
 As with all inputs you can also enter the slot width manually.
Movement direction
Define the movement direction by clicking on the symbol, either
 in counter clockwise direction or
 clockwise direction.
8.18 Prepare Measurement

8.18.1 WEPROM
8.18.1.1 Import of Tolerance Data with WEPROM-File
Introduction and prerequisites
When loading a CAD-model in CAT1000P, only the nominal values of the CAD-
model are contained in the file.
GEOPAK needs the tolerance data for the evaluation.
318 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
WEPROM
For an increased effectiveness of measurement processes, a special file format
has been introduced in the course of the WEPROM research project. This is a file
in Q-DAS-format with an extension that is assigned to a CAD-file in STEP-
format.
• The WEPROM-CAD-file is available in STEP-format.
• The additional WEPROM-file is available in Q-DAS-format. It is
assigned to the WEPROM-CAD-file. This Q-DAS-file is called a
feature file. The feature file contains the tolerance data for the
feature of the CAD-file. These features refer to surfaces in the
CAD-model.
CAT1000P and GEOPAK
CAT1000P offers the following possibility for working with WEPROM-files:
 Load the CAD-model with CAT1000P and additionally load the
feature file.
 Measure a CAT1000P element.
 In GEOPAK, the tolerance dialogue for the measured element is
opened. The tolerance data are automatically written into this
tolerance dialogue.
Hint
You can use the CAT1000P elements line, circle, cone, sphere, plane and
cylinder, when working with WEPROM-files.
Example: Feature "Diameter"
Import of CAD-File with Feature File: Steps
WEPROM Window
WEPROM: Examples
8.18.1.2 Example: Feature "Diameter"

Example: The feature "diameter" is measured and tolerated by means of the
dialogue "Element circle".
Task
You want to tolerate a circle diameter because this circle diameter is listed in the
feature file.
Load a CAD-model and the corresponding feature file.
Create a part program command with CAT1000P for circle measurement. For
this, also read the topic "CAT1000P: Element Circle".
Proceed as follows:
 Open the WEPROM window via the menu bar / Window.
 Click on the feature "diameter" that you want to measure and
tolerate.
 In the 3D-view of the CAD-model the circle is graphically
highlighted.
 Start the CAT1000P dialogue "Element circle" using the

menu bar / Measurement / Circle, or use the icon in the toolbar.
12.04.13 v3.5 319

CAT1000P
 Click in the 3D-view on the circle to be measured.
 Activate in the dialogue "Element circle" the button

"Automatic tolerance".
 Confirm with "OK". The commands are transferred for the
measurement of the element circle to GEOPAK.
Tolerance comparison on GEOPAK
After you have finished the element circle, the dialogue "Tolerance comparison
element circle" in GEOPAK opens.
 The dialogue "Tolerance comparison element circle" contains the
nominal values belonging to the measured element. These nominal
values are taken directly from the CAD-model.
 Furthermore, the dialogue already contains the tolerances for the
feature "diameter".
 The tolerances of the feature "diameter" of the element circle, the
nominal values and the actual values are automatically used for a
tolerance comparison in GEOPAK after the measurement.

Import of CAD-Files with Feature File: Introduction
Import of CAD-File with FEature File: Steps
WEPROM Window
WEPROM: Examples
8.18.1.3 Import of CAD-File with Feature File: Steps

Dialogue "Load Model"
Start
Load a CAD-file in STEP-format and the corresponding feature file. For how to
load a CAD-model, refer to the topic "Load Model".
 To get to the dialogue "Load model", use the menu File / Import
single model.
 Under "Select model file", select the desired CAD-file in STEP-
format.
 Under "Select feature file", select the feature file that complements
the selected CAD-model. This is a file in Q-DAS-format with the file
name extension ".dfd".
Restrictions
You can not use the option "Import multiple models" if you want to use a feature
file.
In the dialogue "Load model", several options (e.g. "mirror" and "sheet thickness"
are deactivated when you activate the check box "Use feature file for tolerances".
As these options change the topology of the model, the Q-DAS-file would not
match the changed model.
320 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P

WEPROM Window
WEPROM: Example
8.18.1.4 WEPROM Window

Start
You get to the WEPROM-window via the menu bar / Window.
In the WEPROM-window, all feature information for the features to be measured
is listed in a tree topology.
You have two options for sorting the data:
 Click the card "Feature".
 The data are sorted by feature numbers.
 Click the card "Reference".
 The data are sorted by references.
Tolerated features
If you have already tolerated features, these features are marked in green. You
can, at your option, position these features at the end of the list.
Button "Options"
A click on the button "Options" and the window "View options" opens. Here, you
define, how the features or references are sorted in the tree topology.
Button "Deactivate not referenced surfaces"
A click on the button "Deactivate not referenced surfaces" deactivates all
surfaces having no references from features. Deactivated surfaces are shown in
red in the 3D-view.
WEPROM: Examples
8.18.1.5 WEPROM: Examples

WEPROM-Window and 3D-View
When clicking a feature, the corresponding referenced position is graphically
highlighted in the CAD-model.
Example 1
First, open the WEPROM-window and measure the features.
Click in the WEPROM-window on a feature.
One or more surfaces in the CAD-model are now graphically highlighted in the
3D-view, because the feature refers to this (these) surface(s).
12.04.13 v3.5 321

CAT1000P
Open a CAT1000P-element dialogue to create a part program command for

measurement.
You can only use the graphically highlighted surfaces of the CAD-model to create
a part program command for measurement.
In the CAT1000P-element dialogue, the button "Automatic tolerance"

is active. The tolerance data of all features belonging to the measured
geometrical element are transferred to GEOPAK.
GEOPAK automatically opens the dialogue "Tolerance comparison". The nominal
values and tolerances from CAT1000P are written into the GEOPAK dialogue
"Tolerance comparison).
Example 2
First, open the CAT1000P element dialogue and measure an element. All
features referring to the selected surface are automatically tolerated in GEOPAK.
Example 3
Interrupt the creation of the part program. Then continue in CMM repeat mode. In
this case, the status of the features is reset, i.e. already tolerated features are set
to the status "tolerated" and are marked in "green".
WEPROM Window
8.18.2 Virtual Alignment

8.18.2.1 Virtual Alignment of Workpiece
Task
By aligning the CAD model with the virtual CMM, the correct angles between
CMM and CAD model are shown in the 3D view. This correct representation is
required for working with the collision control.
Situation
You create a part program in offline mode. You are working with the virtual CMM.
If the actual alignment does not correspond to the virtual alignment, use the
option of the virtual alignment of the workpiece.
This is how you can find out in the 3D-view, which probes are available for
selection for your measurement task.
Example: The 3D graphic indicates which probe is suitable for your workpiece.
Furthermore the representation of the complete CMM shows if a measurement is
at all possible. So you will see, for example, if the racks are blocking the
movement path or if the measurement range of the CMM is sufficient for the
intended measurement.
See also:
Virtual Alignment: Dialogue
Virtual Alignment: Position of CAD Model
Change CAD-Co-ordinate System
322 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.18.2.2 Virtual Alignment: Dialogue

Dialogue start
To get to the dialogue "Part alignment", go to the menu bar / File / Part
alignment or click the symbol.
Dialogue "Part alignment"
Before starting to work with the dialogue "Part alignment", you should first go to
the menu "View" and activate the entries "Show machine position" and "Show
machine co-ordinate system".
Steps
Go to the "Selection mode" and click the buttons "Surfaces", "Edges" or "Circles".
 If you select "Surfaces", the surface normal determines the
direction.
 If you select "Edges", the direction of the edge determines the
direction.
 If you select "Circles", the plane axis of the circle determines the
direction.
Rotate
Rotating has the following effects in the 3D view:
 The CMM remains unchanged at the original position. The
workpiece rotates around its centre point which is the centre point of
the movement box.
 The CAD position (bottom part of the dialogue) is also automatically
changed upon rotation.
Under "Rotate" you define how the alignment of the CAD model shall be
changed.
The input fields X, Y and Z contain the current angles between the relevant CMM
axis and the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis of the CAD model.
 In the 3D view you can define the alignment of the CMM axis by
clicking a surface, an edge or a circle.
 In each section to a CMM axis you can reverse the

direction of the axis by clicking the symbol.
 In each section to a CMM axis you can rotate around the

corresponding CMM axis by using these arrows.
The input of the first axis is complete as soon as you have changed the direction
of another axis, i.e. when
• you change the direction of another axis by clicking another axis
(mouse click on a surface or edge) or
• when clicking the button "Change probing direction"

for another axis.
12.04.13 v3.5 323

CAT1000P
Afterwards you cannot change the first axis again. The LED symbol in front of this
axis is no longer selectable which means that the direction of this axis cannot be
changed again.
You can, however, change the direction of the axes using these arrows
without ruling out the other axes.
See also:
Virtual Alignment of Workpiece
8.18.2.3 Virtual Alignment: Position of CAD Model

Defining the position of the CAD model on the CMM
Determine a point on a CAD model to define the reference position of the CAD
model in the CAD co-ordinates. You can either define the complete position by
clicking the LED symbol in front of "CAD position" or you can define each co-
ordinate separately by clicking the LED symbol in front of a co-ordinate.
Enter the reference position as table co-ordinates in the relevant text boxes for
the machine position.
Table co-ordinates in this context mean machine co-ordinates where the origin of
the Z co-ordinate is placed on the table.
When working with the selection mode "Circle", the circle centre supplies the co-
ordinates.
Hint
Display the co-ordinate system of the CAD model while working in this
dialogue. You can compare the co-ordinate system of the CAD model with
the machine or table co-ordinates system in order to check the correct
axis alignment.
For how to display the co-ordinate system of the CAD model refer to the
topic "General Graphic Settings". (Settings/Graphic/General)
Tipp
To cancel changes you have made in the dialogue "Part alignment",
click the "Reset" button.
Recentre
If you activate this button, the alignment is performed again. In this

alignment, the movement box which includes the CAD model is placed in the
middle of the measuring range of the CMM.
When working with GEOPAK CMM co-ordinates and when starting the dialogue
"Part alignment" the function "Recentre" is automatically executed. This is
required to see the part in 3D view.
Defining rotary table centre as machine position
When working with a rotary table click this button and the rotary table centre
is used as machine position. This facilitates to align the workpiece in centre on
the rotary table.
324 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Store co-ordinate system
Activate the button if you want to store the co-ordinate system. In the "Co-
ordinate system no." field, input the number you want to store the co-ordinate
system under.
You can use this "virtual co-ordinate system" in the "Alignment wizard" as start
point for the alignment.
Hint
The display is updated following each mouse click. If the dialogue is not
confirmed with "OK" but instead closed with "Cancel", the 3D view shown
just before your changes is restored.
Close dialogue "Part alignment"
If you confirm the "Workpiece alignment" dialogue with OK, the new alignment is
transferred to GEOPAK.
See also:
8.18.2.4 Change CAD Co-ordinate System

Task
Use the dialogue "Change CAD co-ordinate system" to move and rotate the co-
ordinate system of the CAD model with mouse clicks in the 3D view.
The 3D representation is updated following each mouse click.
Dialogue start
You get to the dialogue "Change CAD co-ordinate system" via the menu bar / File
/ Change CAD co-ordinate system.
8.18.2.4.1 Steps in the Dialogue "Change CAD Co-ordinate System"

Pick mode
In the "Pick mode", click the buttons "Pick surface point", "Pick
edge" or "Pick new circle".
 If you select "Pick surface point", the surface normal determines the
direction.
 If you select "Pick edge", the direction of the edge determines the
direction.
 If you select "Pick new circle", the plane axis of the circle determines
the direction.
Rotate
Rotation is always executed around the point of origin of the CAD model.
Under "Rotate" you define how the CAD co-ordinate system shall be changed.
 You can change the values for the Z-axis, Y-axis and X-axis. In the
3D view you can determine the alignment of the axis in the CAD co-
ordinate system by clicking on a surface, an edge or a circle.
12.04.13 v3.5 325

CAT1000P
 In each section to an axis you can reverse the direction of

the axis by clicking the symbol.
 In each section to an axis you can rotate around the

corresponding axis by using these arrows.
The input of the first axis is complete as soon as you have changed the direction
of another axis, i.e. when
• you change the direction of another axis by clicking another axis
(mouse click on a surface or edge) or
• when clicking the button "Change probing direction" for

another axis.
Afterwards, you cannot change the first axis again. The LED symbol in front of
this axis is no longer selectable which means that the direction of this axis cannot
be changed again.
You can, however, change the direction of the axes using these arrows
without ruling out the other axes.
8.18.2.4.2 Origin of the CAD model

Here, you determine the origin of the CAD model.
 You can either define the complete position by clicking the LED
symbol in front of "CAD position"
 or you define each co-ordinate separately by clicking the LED
symbol in front of a co-ordinate.
See also:
8.18.3 Alignment Wizard

8.18.3.1 Alignment Wizard: Introduction
Using the Alignment Wizard command, you can establish a workpiece co-
ordinate system in CAT1000 which matches the co-ordinate system of the CAD
model.
Calling the command
 Click the button in CAT1000, or

 click "File/Alignment Wizard..." on the menu bar.
 The "Alignment Wizard" dialogue box appears.
326 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
"Alignment Wizard" dialogue box

 Under "Calculation method", you determine by which type of
alignment the co-ordinate system is created. You have two options:
• Alignment Wizard for RPS
• Alignment Wizard for Best Fit

 Under "First co-ord. system", you determine on which type of co-
ordinate system the alignment is based. You have two options:
• "Manual measurement": You can select manual measuring

points for the alignment.
• "Load co-ord. system": You use an existing co-ordinate

system as the starting point for the alignment. For this, either
you apply a valid co-ordinate system from GEOPAK or you
create one using "Virtual alignment". Enter the corresponding
number in the "Co-ord. system no." text box.
 Click "Next".
 Depending on the selected calculation method, either the
"Alignment Wizard for RPS" dialogue box or the "Alignment Wizard
for Best Fit" dialogue box appears.
Related topics
Best Fit: Basics
Alignment with RPS
Display manual measuring points in the CAD model
8.18.3.2 Alignment Wizard for RPS

You create the co-ordinate system based on RPS points. You specify the 6
degrees of freedom for this. More detailed information in this regard can be found
under "Alignment with RPS".
12.04.13 v3.5 327

CAT1000P
Invoke dialogue
 Click on the icon or "File/Alignment Wizard..." in the menu bar.
 Activate "RPS" in the "Alignment Wizard" dialogue window and

then click on "Next". Detailed information about the other setting
options can be found under "Alignment Wizard ".
 The "Alignment Wizard for RPS" dialogue window opens.
"Alignment Wizard for RPS" dialogue window

Work operations
Make the entries in the "Alignment Wizard for RPS" dialogue window in the
following sequence:
 Select the elements which are to be measured for the alignment.
See also "Select elements".
 Input the parameters for the alignment. See also "Input parameters".
8.18.3.3 Select Elements (Alignment Wizard for RPS)

You create a part program for the manual measurement. This part program is
stored as a subprogram and is thus available to you in the repeat operation.
Proceed as follows
These will be applied in the table of the measurement process. The
following elements can be selected:
• Point: When clicking the button, the "Element Point"

dialogue box appears. You can now define the point.
• Surface point with pre-probing: When clicking the button,

the "Surface point with pre-probing" dialogue box appears. You
can now define the surface point with pre-probing.
• Sphere: When clicking the button, the "Element Sphere"

dialogue box appears. You can now define the sphere.
328 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
• Inclined circle: When clicking the button, the "Inclined

Circle" dialogue box appears. You can now define the circle.
 Using the buttons, you specify which co-ordinates

(X, Y or Z axis) are determined by the element.
Note
The 6 degrees of freedom must be specified for a complete alignment.
This means that 6 values are basically required. If only one coordinate is
determined with each element, 6 elements are necessary. If 3 coordinates
are determined with the first element, 2 coordinates with the second and 1
coordinate with the third, only 3 elements are required (3-2-1 rule). More
detailed information in this regard can be found under "Alignment with
RPS".
 When you have defined all elements, the complete measurement
process is displayed in the "Alignment Wizard for RPS" dialogue
window.
Display of the complete manual measurement process in the "Alignment Wizard

for RPS" dialogue window.
 In the "Tol." text box enter a value for each element. This value
determines the accuracy with which each element is to be reached.
Are all elements within a specified tolerance, the iteration is finished.
 If you need a different probe than the current one for the
measurement of an element, then click the arrow in the "Probe"
column. In the drop-down menu, select either "Change probe by
table" or "Change probe by angle".
 If you want to move a selected element, then click the

"Up" or "Down" button.
 Click the "Delete" button to delete a selected element.

Further entries are still required for the alignment. More detailed information in
this regard can be found under "Input Parameters".
8.18.3.4 Input Parameters (Alignment Wizard for RPS)

You define all other parameters for the alignment when you have selected the
elements for the manual measurement in the "Alignment Wizard for RPS"
dialogue box.
Proceed as follows
 In the "Co-ordinate system no." text box, enter the number by which
you want to save the workpiece co-ordinate system.
12.04.13 v3.5 329

CAT1000P
 In the "Snap range" text box enter a value for the position tolerance
of all measured elements. The snap range serves as plausibility
check. Is one of the manual measurement points outside the snap
range you will be asked if you want to repeat the measurement.
 Specify a name for the subprogram for the manual measurement in
the "Manual subprogram" text box.
 Specify a name for the subprogram for the iteration in the "Iteration
subprogram" text box.
 Select how the iteration should be performed. You have two options:
• When clicking the "CNC re-measure" button, the alignment is
improved by repeated measurements in CNC mode.
• When clicking the "Iteration by re-calculation" button, the

alignment is improved by repeated calculation of the
measurement values.
Note
When the "Iteration by re-calculation" is selected, the "Element circle"
button is not available. If you have already specified a point measurement
and then select the "Iteration by re-calculation" button, the error message
"Point not possible when using iteration by re-calculation" appears.
 Specify how often the calculation or measurement is repeated in the
"Maximum iterations" text box. The iteration is complete when all
points are within the required tolerance (see "Select Elements").
This happens independently of the number of iterations you have
entered.
 Enter the safety distance for the first measurement in CNC mode in
the "Saf. dist. for first exec." text box.
 If you have previously activated the "CNC re-measure" button, enter
a value for the other CNC measurements in the "Saf. dist. for
following exec." text box.
Note
For the first repetition, select a larger safety distance than for the following
repetitions. If the "Iteration by re-calculation" button is selected, the "Saf.dist. for
following exec." text box is not available. For manual measurement the "Saf.dist.
for first exec." is not available.
 Confirm with "OK" and the manual subroutine starts in GEOPAK.
 The manual measuring points are displayed to you in the CAD
model. See also "Display manual measuring points in the CAD
model".
 Before the CNC measurement a graphic display of the CNC
movement path is created and the "Continue CNC Alignment
wizard" message box including the message "Continue with CNC
measurement?/Please check the displayed movement path./Move
machine to safety position./Enable collision check or clearance
height if necessary." appears.
330 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
"Continue CNC - Alignment Wizard" message box

 Check the movement path and if necessary activate the "Collision
Control".
 You can carry out a "Simulation" of the movement path for testing.
 Confirm the message without selecting the "Save part program
without CNC execution." check box.
• Click "Yes" to carry out the measurement in CNC mode.
• Click "No" to exit the Alignment Wizard.
 Select the "Save part program without CNC execution." check box
and confirm the message.
• Click "Yes" to save the subprogram. The part program call is
not entered in the part program. This can be done later in the
part program editor.
8.18.3.5 Alignment Wizard for Best Fit

You create the co-ordinate system using Best Fit. Thereby, the alignment is
repeated from one starting point so often until a "as good as possible" match
between the workpiece co-ordinate system and the CAD model is achieved. More
detailed information in this regard can be found under "Best Fit: Basics".
Invoke dialogue
 Click on the icon or "File/Alignment Wizard..." in the menu bar.
 Activate "Best Fit" in the "Alignment Wizard" dialogue window

and then click on "Next". Detailed information about the other setting
options can be found under "Alignment Wizard ".
 The "Alignment Wizard for Best Fit" dialogue window opens.
12.04.13 v3.5 331

CAT1000P
"Alignment Wizard for Best Fit" dialogue window

Work operations
Make the entries in the "Alignment Wizard for Best Fit" dialogue window in the
following sequence:
See also "Select elements".
 Input the parameters for the alignment. See also "Input parameters".
8.18.3.6 Select Elements (Alignment Wizard for Best Fit)

You create a part program for the manual measurement. This part program is
stored as a subprogram and is thus available to you in the repeat operation.
Proceed as follows
These will be applied in the measurement process table. The
following elements can be selected:
• Point: When clicking the button, the "Element Point" dialogue
box appears. You can now define the point.
• Surface point with pre-probing: When clicking the button,

the "Surface point with pre-probing" dialogue box appears. You
can now define the surface point with pre-probing.
• Sphere: When clicking the button, the "Element Sphere"

dialogue box appears. You can now define the sphere.
• Inclined circle: When clicking the button, the "Inclined

Circle" dialogue box appears. You can now define the circle.
332 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 When you have defined all elements, the complete measurement

process is displayed in the "Alignment Wizard for Best Fit" dialogue
box.
Display of the complete manual measurement process in the "Alignment Wizard

for Best Fit" dialogue box.
 In the "Tol." text box enter a value for each element. This value
determines the accuracy with which each element is to be reached.
Are all elements within a specified tolerance, the iteration is finished.
 If you need a different probe than the current one for the
measurement of an element, then click the arrow in the "Probe"
column. In the drop-down menu, select either "Change probe by
table" or "Change probe by angle".
 If you want to move a selected element, then click the

"Up" or "Down" button.
 Click the "Delete" button to delete a selected element.

Further entries are still required for the alignment. More detailed information in
this regard can be found under "Input Parameters".
8.18.3.7 Input Parameters (Alignment Wizard for Best Fit)

You define all other parameters for the alignment when you have selected the
elements for the manual measurement in the "Alignment Wizard for Best Fit"
dialogue box.
Proceed as follows
 In the "Co-ordinate system no." text box, enter the number by which
you want to save the workpiece co-ordinate system.
 In the "Snap range" text box enter a value for the position tolerance
of all measured elements. The snap range serves as plausibility
check. Is one of the manual measurement points outside the snap
range you will be asked if you want to repeat the measurement.
 Specify a name for the subprogram for the manual measurement in
the "Manual subprogram" text box.
 Specify a name for the subprogram for the iteration in the "Iteration
subprogram" text box.
 Select how the iteration should be performed. You have two options:
• When clicking the "CNC re-measure" button, the alignment is
improved by repeated measurements in CNC mode.
12.04.13 v3.5 333

CAT1000P
• When clicking the "Iteration by re-calculation" button, the

alignment is improved by repeated calculation of the
measurement values.
Note
When the "Iteration by re-calculation" is selected, the "Element circle"
button is not available. If you have already specified a point measurement
and then select the "Iteration by re-calculation" button, the error message
"Point not possible when using iteration by re-calculation" appears.
 In the "Maximum iterations" text box, determine how often the
calculation or measurement is repeated. If all measurement points
are within the required tolerance, (see "Select Elements"), the
iteration is finished. This does not depend on the entered number of
repetitions.
 Enter the safety distance for the first measurement in CNC mode in
the "Saf. dist. for first exec." text box.
 If you have previously activated the "CNC re-measure" button, enter
a value for the other CNC measurements in the "Saf. dist. for
following exec." text box.
Note
For the first repetition, select a larger safety distance than for the following
repetitions. If the "Iteration by re-calculation" button is selected, the "Saf.dist. for
following exec." text box is not available. For manual measurement the "Saf.dist.
for first exec." is not available.
 Confirm with "OK" and the manual subprogram starts in GEOPAK.
 The manual measuring points are displayed to you in the CAD
model. See also "Display manual measuring points in the CAD
model".
 Before the CNC measurement a graphic display of the CNC
movement path is created and the "Continue CNC Alignment
wizard" message box including the message "Continue with CNC
measurement?/Please check the displayed movement path./Move
machine to safety position./Enable collision check or clearance
height if necessary." appears.
"Continue CNC - Alignment Wizard" message box

 Check the movement path and if necessary activate the "Collision
Control".
 You can carry out a "Simulation" of the movement path for testing.
334 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 Confirm the message without selecting the "Save part program

without CNC execution." check box.
• Click "Yes" to carry out the measurement in CNC mode.
 Select the "Save part program without CNC execution." check box
and confirm the message.
• Click "Yes" to save the subprogram. The part program call is
not entered in the part program. This can be done later in the
part program editor.
8.18.4 Collision Check (CAT1000P)
You can carry out a collision check in CAT1000 only when no clearance
height has been determined in GEOPAK before.
Normally the co-ordinate measurement machine (CMM) takes the shortest direct
route to the target point. Certain features of the workpiece - for example a bulge
blocking the direct route - can lead to collisions.
You can carry out collision check for elements that you have created with
CAT1000P. All points and intermediate positions of an element are checked.
Temporary activation of collision check
You can specifically activate or deactivate collision check for a certain element.
The flexible selection of the collision check reduces the calculation effort/time
required for your task.
Permanent activation of collision check
When creating elements that do not have a "Collision check" button in the
dialogue box, a permanent activation of the collision check is recommended.
To activate the collision check, click "Collision check" on the

"Measurement" menu or click the "Collision check" button in the toolbar.
Procedure
 The CMM moves over the safety distance to the point that is above
the measurement start point.
The measurement start point is the point before a measurement
point, from which the CMM moves at measurement speed.
 From this position the CMM moves to the measurement start point
of the next measurement point. Collision check for this CMM
movement takes place. If a collision is detected, this point is not
measured as it cannot be reached without collision.
 Collision check always takes place when the points of the element
are recalculated.
 Should the work process become too slow as a result of this
procedure, you can temporarily deactivate the collision check during
creation of the element in the dialogue boxes listed above.
Afterwards activate the collision check again. Collision check is
carried out for the following recalculation.
12.04.13 v3.5 335

CAT1000P
 Between two elements the CMM moves over the safety distance.
This movement corresponds to the movement in GEOPAK. In this
case, a collision check of the CMM movement takes only place from
the safety distance to the element.
Example without collision check

Collision check is not activated; a collision would take place
Example with collision check

Collision check is activated
The CMM moves over the safety distance to the point that is above the
measurement start point.
See also
Settings for Measurement: Avoidance Path
336 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.18.5 Move CMM

8.18.5.1 Move CMM: Introduction
8.18.5.1.1 Purpose of the function "Move CMM"

 When you create part programs offline using the virtual machine, it
will often be necessary to define intermediate positions.
 The "Move CMM" function in CAT1000S and CAT1000P enables
you to define an intermediate position by a mouse click on the 3D
view of the CAD model.
 The graphic display of the movement allows you to perform an
optical collision check.
 You can also perform an automatic collision check. For this, activate
the collision check in CAT1000S and CAT1000P. The graphics will
now show possible collision situations.
 You can check the movement path and possible collisions in the
graphics prior to confirming the machine movement.
For the function "Move CMM" (which is possible only in the learn mode) you use
the two dialogues:
 "Move Machine" dialogue
 "Settings for Machine Movement" dialogue
8.18.5.1.2 Activating the "Move CMM" function
Activate the "Move CMM" function using the symbol or the menu
"Measurement" and "Move machine".
For detailed information about this subject refer to:
"Settings for machine movement" dialogue
"Move machine" dialogue
Move CMM: Background
Move CMM: Confirm position
8.18.5.2 "Settings for machine movement" dialogue

To get to the "Settings for Machine Movement" dialogue, use the menu
"Settings".
 Activate "Confirm position" if you want to obtain information prior to
moving the CMM.
 Activate "Use model points", if the intermediate position is required
to be calculated by means of an intersection point with the model.
 Activate "Move parallel to view", if the CMM is to be moved from the
current position parallel to the screen view plane.
 Activate the button "Use movement box" if the movement box shall
be used for calculation.
• You can have a movement box displayed in the graphics by
clicking on "Get box". A movement box is calculated for the
complete model.
12.04.13 v3.5 337

CAT1000P
• If you activate the check box "Offset for movement box", you
can define a value in the corresponding input box. This is the
value with which the movement box is offset in all axes.
• You define the planes of the movement box on which the
intermediate positions can be located. To define these planes,
click the "Min" and "Max" checkboxes of the three planes on or
off.
Example: If the work piece is aligned on the CMM table in such
a way that the XY plane of the work piece corresponds to the
XY plane of the CMM, it will be necessary to click off the
minimum value for Z. Otherwise a collision with the CMM table
would occur.
• All values can also be entered manually.
8.18.5.3 "Move machine" dialogue

Working with the "Move machine" dialogue is only possible after having
performed the following two steps:
 Activate the "Confirm position" entry in the "Settings for Machine
Movement" dialogue.
 Select an intermediate position by a click in the 3D view.
Upon completion of these two steps the co-ordinates (numerical values) of the
calculated intermediate position will be shown in the "Move machine" dialogue.
This position is also shown in the graphics window.
"Recalculate point": Click on this symbol, if you have manually

changed the values and you want to see the target position in the graphics.
"Recalculate and show": Activate this function, if the movement path

from the current machine position to the intermediate position is to be updated
"Restart dialogue": Click on this symbol if you want the dialogue to

remain open after the intermediate position has been reached.
Confirm with "OK" to actually start the CMM movement.
8.18.5.4 Move CMM: Background

Background
The "Move CMM" function enables you to define intermediate positions in the 3D
view of the CAD model by a mouse click.
However, this mouse click in the 3D view of the CAD model provides only two-
dimensional information.
Problem
Based on the two-dimensional information (on the screen) a three-dimensional
information shall be created.
338 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
How to proceed
In order to obtain a three-dimensional information, the program proceeds as
follows (see ill. below):

4: Movement box
6: View plane
7: Position you have clicked on
 Click into the 3D view of the CAD model.
 The view direction corresponds to a line running through the model
space. This line contains the points 1, 2, 3, 7 (see ill.).
 The two-dimensional information is available.
 The line through the model space is calculated. This line contains
the points 1, 2, 3, 7 (see ill.).
 Using this line you can now obtain the three-dimensional information
required to define an intermediate position with one of three
available methods.
Refer to the subjects:
8.18.5.5 Intermediate positions: Three methods

There are three methods to obtain the three-dimensional information required for
defining intermediate positions in CAT1000S and CAT1000P.
The methods and settings for the methods are determined in the "Settings for
machine movement" dialogue window. You access this dialogue using the menu
bar, "Settings".
12.04.13 v3.5 339

CAT1000P

4: Movement box
6: View plane
7: Position which you have clicked
Intersection with the model
 You click directly on a surface.
 An intersection point of the line with the model (see ill. point 1) is
used to obtain an intermediate position.
 The point on the surface is shifted by an offset. This is a value you
define in the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue window (via
menu bar, "Settings"). The direction of the offset corresponds to the
surface normal of the surface which you have clicked on. The result
is the intermediate position.
 This calculation is possible only when you click directly on a surface.
Current machine position
 The second method uses the current machine position in order to
calculate the intermediate position. The "view direction line"
containing the points 1, 2, 3, 7 intersects point 2 (see ill.).
 With this method, the machine always moves only parallel to the
screen view plane.
 The machine does not perform an uncontrolled movement along the
view direction.
 This calculation is always possible. Consequently, there is no need
for you to click on a plane.
340 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Intersection with the movement box

 The third method uses an intersection of the "view direction line"
containing the points 1, 2, 3, 7 with the movement box (point 3 in the
ill.) The movement box corresponds to a clearance height for all
axes.
 You determine a minimum and a maximum value for each axis in
the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue window.
 A calculation can only be performed if the "view direction line" (see
ill.) actually intersects the valid planes of the movement box, i.e. you
must click a point that is positioned within the movement box.
 The edges of the movement box square are shown in red.
 The calculated positions are additionally shifted away from the
model by the currently valid probe radius and the safety distance.
Refer to the topic:
8.18.5.6 Intermediate positions: One or more methods

You can use one or more methods to define an intermediate position.
You determine the method in the "Settings for machine movement" dialogue
(refer to "Dialogue: Settings for machine movement" and "Intermediate positions:
Three methods").
If you select more than one method, the calculation will be performed in the
following sequence:
 Intersection with the model
 Move CMM parallel to view plane
 Intersection with the movement box.
Once you have made your decision for a combination, the following applies:
 The first successfully calculated point will be used.
 "Successfully" means:
• The point can be calculated.
• With the collision check function activated, no collision of the
probe tip will occur while the CMM is moving from the current to
the calculated position.
Tip
It makes sense to combine the options "Use model points" and "Use
movement box". As a rule, the option "Move parallel to view" should not
be combined with any other option.
Error
In case that an intermediate position cannot be calculated, the following will
occur, regardless of the method used:
 A beep will be sounding.
 At the same time, an error message appears in the status line of the
CAT1000S and CAT1000P windows.
12.04.13 v3.5 341

CAT1000P
8.18.5.7 Move CMM: Confirm position

In the dialogue window "Settings to move CMM", you use the check box "Confirm
position" to define whether the CMM movement starts immediately or upon query
(dialogue).
 Deactivating the "Confirm position" check box causes the CMM to
move immediately to the intermediate position.
 Activating the "Confirm position" check box causes the CMM to
move to the intermediate position only after you have confirmed the
"Move machine" dialogue.
The "Move machine" dialogue serves to check the selected co-
ordinates.
If you have deactivated the check box "Confirm position" in the window
"Settings for machine movement" and if you have at the same time
deactivated the collision control, this constitutes a risk of collisions. In this
case there will be no alert before the CMM carries out any movement that
may cause a collision.
 In case you use the "Move machine" dialogue to check the selected
co-ordinates, the 3D view will show a line from the current to the
calculated position of the CMM.
 The line and positions are shown in the colours you have defined for
"Move CMM" in the "Settings for probe display" dialogue window
(via menu bar, "Settings", "Graphics").
8.18.6 Rotate Table in CAT1000PS

Using the "Rotate table" command you can change the position of a rotary/index
table in CAT1000PS and GEOPAK. This facilitates the offline programming and
simulation of part programs with rotary/index tables in CAT1000PS.
Note
Scanning with rotary table is not supported by the simulation.
Conditions
 A rotary/index table in the "CMM SystemManager" in the
"MachineBuilder" has been defined.
 You have aligned the workpiece on the rotary table. For more
detailed information refer to "Virtual alignment: Position of the CAD
model".
Calling the command
There is no collision control during the rotary/index table is moving. Make

sure that there is no collision with workpiece and probe.
 In CAT1000PS click this button.

 Or choose "Measure/Rotate table..." from the menu bar.
 The "Rotate table" dialogue box appears.
342 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
"Rotate table" dialogue box

Input of parameters
 Determine an angle for the rotation. You can choose between two
types:
• absolute rotary angle
• relative rotary angle
 Click "Absolute rotary angle", determine the position for the

rotation and that independent of the current position. Enter the angle
in the text box below. Use the clock hand buttons to determine the
direction of rotation:
• counter clockwise
• clockwise
 Click "Relative rotary angle", determine the position for the

rotation and that dependent on the current position. Here, you
determine the direction of rotation by the sign. When entering a
positiv angle the table rotates counter clockwise, otherwise it rotates
clockwise.
 Click this button and the movement path is calculated and

displayed in the 3D-view. The "Simulation" toolbar is activated and
you can have a simulation of the rotation displayed.
 Click this button if you want to rotate several times. Click "OK"
each time to confirm and the dialogue box appears automatically for
each further rotation.
 Click "OK" and the command "Rotate table" is transferred to
GEOPAK, executed and added to the part program list.
Note
The workpiece co-ordinate system is automatically rotated with the rotary
table.
Related topics
Types of rotary tables
Rotate table
12.04.13 v3.5 343

CAT1000P
8.19 Further options when working with CAT1000P

8.19.1 Tips on working with CAT1000P
Measuring in several sections
With CAT1000P it is possible to measure geometric elements by mouse clicks,
either with one mouse click for a complete measurement or in several sections.
Measurements in several sections can be performed quite comfortably with the
CAT1000P in only a few steps. The interaction between the CAD display and the
dialogue window makes it possible to perform a measurement without great
efforts.
Example: Measuring a discontinuous edge
 Deactivate the "Element finished" function.
 One mouse click in the CAD model is sufficient to select the first
edge section to be measured. Confirm with "OK".
 Repeat this process for all edge sections to be measured.
 Before taking the measurement of the final section, activate the
"Element finished" function and confirm with "OK".
 You have now created the element line with GEOPAK.
8.19.2 Display measured elements

Once you have completed one of the element dialogues in CAT1000P by
confirming with "OK", you can have the element displayed in the 3D view. You
see the elements you have already measured.
Before you can use this option, you have to activate the "CAT1000P
elements" function. Use the menu bar and the menu "View" to get to the
"CAT1000P elements" function.
Colour settings
The elements are shown in green (default settings).
To change in the 3D view the colours of elements already created, proceed as
follows:
 Click on the entry "Model colours" in the "Settings" menu.
 Choose the "CAT1000P elements" button in the "Set Colours"
dialogue and define the colour of your choice.
8.20 Settings
8.20.1 Settings for Measurement: Introduction
To get to the "Settings for Measurement" dialogue, use the menu bar and the
"Settings" menu.
344 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Five tabs are available

 General
 Position Tolerance
 Surface
 Nominal Value
 Avoidance Path
Settings for measurement: General
Here you can establish a permissible deviation. This function is necessary
because CAT1000S / CAT1000P expects an ideal element for the calculation of
the probing points.
It may, however, happen that elements in the CAD model slightly deviate due to
roundoff errors. Verification of these probing points may show that these points
are not located exactly on the element. As a result of such check, the probing
points would be regarded as not valid points.
Establishing a permissible deviation helps overcome this problem. This distance
defines how far the calculated probing points are allowed to deviate from the
ideal element. Within this deviation, the probing points are regarded as valid
probing points.
If the permissible deviation is a small value, surfaces will be searched for in

a small range around the calculated measurement point.The smaller the
range the faster the calculation. If the range is, however, too small, it is
quite possible that the correct surface is not found. To reduce this risk you
are advised to determine a value that is not too small.
Number of decimals
Here, you can define the number of decimals.
Use master ball for collision check
If you activate the checkbox "Use master ball for collision check", the master ball
is used for collision check.
If you deactivate the checkbox "Use master ball for collision check", the master
ball is not used for collision check.
Example: You have defined the master ball in your configuration. Then you
removed the master ball from the CMM table. In this case you can deactivate the
collision check for the master ball.
Maximum step size for collision control
Here, you enter a value in the unit of your CAD model. Collisions with objects that
are smaller than this step size are possibly not recognised. On the other hand, a
smaller value entails a bigger calculation effort and is thus more time consuming.
8.20.2 Settings for Measurement: Nominal Value

8.20.2.1 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma":

Here you establish the digit after the comma starting from which CAT1000P will
round the nominal values of the elements.
12.04.13 v3.5 345

CAT1000P
Example:
 Based on the model data, the diameter of a circle has been
calculated. The diameter is 24,996 (length unit of the model loaded).
 In case you have established three digits after the comma, then
precisely this value will be transmitted to GEOPAK.
 If you limit the number of digits after the comma to 2, the circle
diameter will be rounded to 25.
8.20.2.2 Input box "Number of Digits after Comma Angle":

Here you establish the digit after the comma starting from which the angle will be
rounded in CAT1000P.
For further information regarding the dialogue refer to:
Avoidance path generation
8.20.3 Settings for CAT1000P Dialogues

In this dialogue you determine how the dialogues for element measurement shall
be represented in CAT1000P. Your selection is valid for all of the six CAT1000P
elements.
 Line
 Circle
 Cone
 Plane (grid)
 Plane (circular)
 Cylinder
Three options
 If you select the standard dialogue, only the most important options
for element measurement are shown in the dialogue, e.g. the
number of points to be measured.
 If you select the extended dialogue, all options for element
measurement are shown in the dialogue, i.e. for example also the
possible alternative calculation modes and programming helps.
 If you click the button "Reset default values for all dialogues", the
default values of the installation are used in the dialogues.
Example:
The standard dialogue is sufficient for creating part program commands for
measuring an element and if most data from the last work step shall be used.
Choose the extended dialogue if you want to create part program commands for
measuring a new element and if no data from the last work step shall be used.
In this case you can use the complete function range for creating part program
commands in the extended dialogue.
346 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.21 Multiple Circle Measurement

8.21.1 Multiple Circle Measurement (CAT1000P)
Task
If you want to measure many circles (for example perforated plates), you can use
the "Multiple circle measurement" function. Thus you can considerably reduce
your work steps.
Conditions
Multiple circle measurement is not possible unless the following conditions are
fulfilled:
 Whole circles must be used.
 Collision control is not possible with multiple circle measurement.
 To determine an avoidance path, use the clearance height. This
involves a relative clearance height for each circle.
 Multiple circle measurement can only be used for circles with
parallel circle axes.
Note
For multiple circle measurement the relative measurement height is
generally used.
Function call
 On the "Measurement" menu, click "Multiple circle".
 The "Multiple circle" dialogue box appears.
Multiple circle measurement with head touch
The movement methods "Slot width" and "Scanning" are not available for head
touch.
The stylus angle should be oriented towards the smallest circle. There is no
control of the angles (collision check).
The "Multiple circle" dialogue box can be extended or reduced

with these buttons.
CAD model
Adjust your CAD model in 3D view in a way that you have top view of the circles
to be measured. For the calculation of the movement path the nearest main plane
is used.
The following alignments are possible:
Possible main planes that can be used for the calculation of the movement
path for multiple circle measurement.
12.04.13 v3.5 347

CAT1000P
Selection of circles
Note
Pay attention to the following points when you use the handles for the
multiple circle measurement:
All circles that you want to select must be completely visible. Top view of
the circle plane is recommended for an optimal selection. For example, if
the representation of the part and consequently of the circles is too small,
it is possible that not all circles are selected.
For example, if the part is very large and not all the circles that you want
to select can be displayed in the 3D view, move the part. In this case
select the circles step by step.
After selection of the circles, make sure that the requested circles
have really been selected.
The following factors can lead to an incorrect selection of the circles:
 low magnification factor of the CAD model in the 3D view
 low/inappropriate screen resolution
 low resolution/accuracy of the CAD model
 unsuitable probe selection
 incline position of the model
Selection with reference circle
 Use the mouse (drag) to select a circle. This circle is the reference
circle.
 In 3D view, the reference circle is

highlighted with a ball (circle centre) and an arrow (path).
 Determine a relative reference height for the reference circle. For
this, select the "Reference height" check box.
 Use the keyboard to type the range that limits the selection of the
circles.
Selection without reference circle
 Use the mouse (drag) to select an area in which the circles to be
measured are positioned.
 All visible circle edges with the same orientation within the selected
area are measured.
 In 3D view, each measured circle is highlighted with a ball (circle
centre) and an arrow (path).
 You cannot use a reference heigh without a reference circle.
Change selection (options)
Invert selection: Select the "Invert selection" check box to add or remove
individual circles after the first selection.
Use these buttons to select inner circles and/or outer circles.
348 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
 You can determine a diameter range.

 Select the "Diameter" check box.
 Use the keyboard to type the diameter range.
 Only circles with diameters within this range are selected.
Measurement parameters
After selection determine the measurement parameters.
See also:
Measurement Parameters (Multiple Circle Measurement)
Measurement parameters
Movement Path (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
Options (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
Scanning (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
8.21.2 Measurement Parameters (Multiple Circle Measurement in

CAT1000P)
Start angle
Type the start angle using the keyboard.
Measurement height
Type the measurement height using the keyboard. For "Multiple circle
measurement", the relative measurement height is always used.
If you determine a relative measurement height, reference is always the circle
edge of the CAD model. The height relative to the edge that was used to select
the element is indicated.
Circular path
The "Circular" function is designed to avoid collisions. If your CMM is able to

move circular, you should select this function if you want to measure an outer
circle (for example bolt). Thus you avoid intermediate positions which would be
necessary when moving in straight lines.
Slot width
The "Slot width" function is designed to avoid collisions. If you want to

determine a slot width, click the "Slot width" button and type the slot width using
the keyboard.
If your CMM is not able to move circular, you should specify a slot width if you
want to measure outer circles. The slot width determines the space available to
move the probe system. Then the movement paths between the measurements
are calculated from the slot width, the current ball radius and the safety distance.
The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest
possible number. It depends basically on the number of measurement points and
the slot width.
Number of points
Type the number of points to be measured for each circle in the drop-down list
box.
Clearance height
Use the clearance height to create an avoidance path. This involves the relative
clearance height for each circle.
12.04.13 v3.5 349

CAT1000P
Name and memory

Type the name of the element in the "Name" text box.
The "Memory" text box contains the number of the next free memory proposed by
CAT1000P.
When clicking the "Add element number to name" button, the element name
is added to the memory number.
Movement direction
Click either the "Counter clockwise" or "Clockwise" button to determine

the movement direction.
Path (movement path)
After having determined the measurement parameters, specify the movement
path.
See also:
Movement Path (Multiple Circle Measurement)
Further topics related to the "Multiple Circle Measurement" dialogue box
Multiple Circle Measurement (CAT1000P)
Movement path (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
8.21.3 Movement Path (Multiple Circle Measurement CAT1000P)

"Multiple circle measurement" in CAT1000P offers several options to create the
optimal movement path for your measurement task.
Before you determine the movement path, adjust your CAD model in 3D view in a
way that you have top view of the circles to be measured. For the calculation of
the movement path the nearest main plane is used.
The following alignments are possible:
Possible main planes that can be used for the calculation of the movement
path for multiple circle measurement.
Path for bolt circle
If you want to measure bolt circles select the "Path for bolt circle" check box. So
the shortest movement path will be created.
Path selector button
Note
For multiple circle measurement it is not possible to create a diagonal
movement path.
With the path selector button you can select a path pattern that is perfect
for your measurement task. There are 16 different path patterns. You can change
the order by clicking the numbers of the path selector button.
350 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
For the direction of movement, there are two main patterns that are explained
below.
Zigzag path pattern
Order the numbers on the path selector as shown in the picture on the
left. With this pattern only one measuring direction (from left to right) between the
circles is used.
Zigzag pattern
Snake path pattern
Order the numbers on the path selector as shown in the picture on the
left. With this pattern a change between the measuring direction takes place.
Advantage of this pattern: the time necessary for movement is reduced by shorter
movement paths.
Snake pattern
Path width
When using the path selector you can additionally enter a "path width". The path
width optimises the movement path if the circles are arranged irregularly. In this
case the path width prevents unnecessary CMM movements.
Path width = 0.0. The movement path is long as the CMM measures each
circle line separately.
12.04.13 v3.5 351

CAT1000P
Path width = 12.0. The movement path is short as the CMM measures
several circle lines in one direction of movement.
Measurement Parameters (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
8.21.4 Options (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)

Calculate: If you have changed the values in the text boxes of the dialogue
box, click "Calculate". Display of the circles in 3D view is updated.
Reset dialogue values: You can delete the values entered in the dialogue
box at any time by clicking the "Reset dialogue values" button.
Scanning: If you want to scan a circle, click the "Scanning" button. Under
"Scanning", enter the scanning parameters. See alsoScanning: Multiple Circle
Measurement
Automatic tolerance: After measurement, you can automatically carry out

tolerance comparisons on the circles. Select the "Automatic tolerance" button.
When you click "OK" to confirm the multi circle measurement, the "Multi circle
tolerance" dialogue box appears.
In the group box in the middle of the dialogue box you

determine the type of calculation. See also "Type of Calculation".
Automatic projection plane: Normally the program calculates a plane from

the measurement points. Then it will be checked, which basic plane is closest to
this plane. The points are projected into this plane (automatic projection plane).
The circle is calculated.
Problems: If the circle with its measurement points is not positioned in a co-
ordinate system plane, the automatic projection takes place in the "wrong" plane.
In this case do not select the "Automatic projection plane" button.
Set value of 3rd axis to zero: Click this button if you want to measure circles
of different heights without a spatial component, for example for distance
measurement.
When clicking this button, the dialogue box is restarted after measurement.
Movement path (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
352 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
8.21.5 Scanning (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)

 If you want to scan the circles, click the "Scanning" button.
 Under "Scanning", enter the scanning parameters.
Method
In the "Method" list you can choose between two scanning methods:
 "Automatic best": If you choose this method, the best scanning
method supported by the CMM control is used.
 "Standard scan": If you choose this method, the part program
command "CNC scan" is used. The workpiece is scanned with the
speed entered in the "Scan. speed" text box.
Pitch
When clicking the "Pitch" button, the "Pitch" text box is available and the
"No. of pts." box (further up in the dialogue box) is no longer available. Define the
number of measurement points for each circle either by typing the number of
points or by typing the pitch. The pitch defines the distance of the individual
measurement points on the length of the element.
Note
It is possible that the number or the pitch of the points actually measured
differ slightly from the specified number or pitch.
Scan. speed
Type the scanning speed in the text box. You will find the optimum scanning
speed in your documents about the probe system and CMM.
Filter
You can select three filters from the drop-down list box. Also refer to the
GEOPAK topics "Filter contour/Filter element".
Set run in and run out for scanning
During scanning, errors may occur in the start and end area of the measurement.
In the "Run in" and "Run out" text boxes you determine the range in which no
scanning takes place. While moving within the "run in" area, the probe is not
scanning. While moving in the "run out" area, the probe is not scanning while it is
moved away from the scanning area. The selected measurement range is
expanded by the run in and run out. Make sure to consider this in your
measurement task to avoid a collision while the probe is moving.
Movement Path (Multiple Circle Measurement in CAT1000P)
8.21.6 Multi Circle Tolerance

With the GD&T wizard, you can easily define tolerances for several circles
directly in CAT1000.
After definition of all tolerances, the commands are transferred to GEOPAK.
12.04.13 v3.5 353

CAT1000P
Start
 Select the "Automatic tolerance" button in the "Multi Circle

Measurement" dialogue box.
 When you click "OK" in the "Multi circle measurement" dialogue box,
the "Multi circle tolerance" dialogue box appears.
"Multi circle tolerance" dialogue box

1 - List of measured circles
2 - Selection of circles with equal parameters
3 - Definition of tolerances
4 - Information box
Select circles for tolerancing
Selection from list of measured circles: The list contains the measured circles
including number, diameter and used tolerance values.
 From the list, select the circles to be toleranced:
• Select the corresponding check box.
• Or use the mouse to select the corresponding line. Multiple
selection is possible with the CTRL key or the shift key.
• To select several circles, hold the mouse key while moving the
mouse over the appropriate list lines. The selected lines are
highlighted in blue. Within the selected block, a mouse click in
one single check box selects all highlighted lines.
354 v3.5 12.04.13

CAT1000P
Selection of elements with equal parameters: Circles with the same diameter
often have the same tolerances. In this case it is recommended to select all
circles with the same diameter and to specify the tolerances. Besides the
selection of the same diameter, also the selection of the XYZ co-ordinates is
possible.
 Under "Select elements with equal....", select the "Diam." check box.
 In the corresponding text box, enter the diameter.
 Click "Select" and all circles with the specified diameter are
selected.
 The information box shows the number of selected

circles (in this example 6 of 14 measured circles.)
 When you click "Reset", the selection is cancelled.
Definition of tolerances
After selection of the circles, you define the tolerance limits for the diameter, for
the position and for the individual XYZ co-ordinates successively.
 Click one of the option buttons, for example "Diameter", to
determine the tolerance feature.
 In the "Upper tol." and "Lower tol." text boxes, enter the tolerance
limits.
 In the "Feature name" text box enter a name for the tolerance
feature.
 If you want to add the element number to the feature name,

click the "Add element number to name" button.
 If you want to make the tolerance data available to a statistical

program, click the "Transfer statistic data" button.
 Click "Apply".
 In the list of measured circles, the icon of the tolerance feature is
highlighted in green and the specified tolerance limits are shown.
 If you want to define further tolerance features, for example position
tolerances, click the "Position" option button and repeat the steps
made previously. You can also select another set of circles and
define the necessary tolerances.
 Click "OK" to confirm and the command is transferred to GEOPAK.
Further options
When you click the "Reset dialogue values" button, all values in the dialogue
box are reset.
When you click the "Keep dialogue open after OK" button, the dialogue box
remains open and you can tolerance several circles in any order.
Select this option if you want an order for your report that deviates from the
memory number of the circles.
Example
 Click the "Keep dialogue open after OK" button.

 Select several circles from the list.
 Specify the tolerance values for these circles and click "Apply".
12.04.13 v3.5 355

CAT1000P
 The defined tolerance values for the selected circles are shown in
the background colour green.
 Click "OK" and the tolerance commands for these circles are
transferred from CAT1000 to GEOPAK. The tolerance values of
these circles are shown in blue.
 The "Multi circle tolerance" dialogue box remains open. You can
define further tolerance values and transfer them to GEOPAK for
tolerancing.
356 v3.5 12.04.13

Um Cat1000ps e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Um Cat1000ps e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Um Cat1000ps e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAT1000S

Program for Tolerance Comparison

User's Manual v3.5

2 CAT1000PS Table of Contents

7.3.4.1 Settings for Measurement: Introduction ............................. 36

7.4.16 Commands Window............................................................... 66

7.5.11 Collision Check (CAT1000P)................................................. 93

7.5.28.1 Create Section.................................................................. 125

7.6.1 Select Element ..................................................................... 167

7.7.16 Protocol Output.................................................................... 206

8.2.5.2 Special cases ................................................................... 248

8.8.4 Circle Measurement and Thread Pitch............................... 280

8.17.2.3 Change probing direction ................................................. 306

8.18.3.4 Input Parameters (Alignment Wizard for RPS)................. 329

Measurement in CAT1000PS with the optical measurement system QVP

5 Hints for Help

6 Help for CAT1000P and CAT1000S

See also "CAT1000S contents".

7.2 General Preparation

After installation of the SpaceNavigator software make the settings of the

7.2.1.2 SpaceNavigator: Change 3D-View

Translating the controller cap in X pans the 3D-view

Translating the controller cap in Z pans the 3D-view up or

Translating the controller cap in Y zooms the 3D-view in or out.

Tilting the controller cap about X tilts the 3D-view.

Tilting the controller cap about Y rolls the 3D-view.

Twisting the controller cap about Z spins the 3D-view.

7.2.1.3 SpaceNavigator: Move Virtual Machine

 Translating the controller cap in X

 Translating the controller cap in Y updates the

 Translating the controller cap in Z updates the

 Tilting the controller cap

 Twisting the controller cap about Z updates

7.2.1.4 SpaceNavigator and "Move Machine"

7.2.1.5 SpaceNavigator and "Move in Five Axes"

7.2.1.6 SpaceNavigator and "Change Probe by Angle"

7.2.1.7 SpaceNavigator and "Scan on Curve"

SpaceNavigator and "Sweep Scan"

7.2.1.8 SpaceNavigator and "Sweep Scan"

7.2.1.9 SpaceNavigator and "Rotate Table"

If you twist the controller cap, the virtual table is twisted

The following movement dialogues are supported

7.3.1.2 Create graphic grid

7.3.2 Settings for 3D-View

7.3.3 Settings for CAD Files

7.3.3.2 Settings for IGES Import

Also read free contours

7.3.3.3 Settings for CATIA V4 Import

Use analytical planes

7.3.3.4 Settings for CATIA V5 Import

Read local co-ordinate system

7.3.3.5 Settings for CATIA V5 RepairConverter

7.3.3.6 Settings for Parasolid Import

7.3.3.7 Settings for Pro/E Import

7.3.3.8 Settings for STEP Import

7.3.3.9 Settings for VDAFS Import

7.3.3.10 Settings for Unigraphics Import

7.3.3.11 Settings for SolidWorks Import

7.3.3.12 Settings for Inventor Import